Andrew Wireless Innovations Group 9GB2000 Cellular Repeater User Manual vol1eac200drev1b2

Andrew Wireless Innovations Group Cellular Repeater vol1eac200drev1b2

UserManual.wiki >

Andrew Wireless Innovations Group >

9GB2000 User Manual HTML Version

users manual

EAC-2000 MANUAL ADDENDUM FOR DIGITAL OPERATION

D R A F T

15 July, 1999

1.1 Introduction

This section of the manual describes EAC-2000 operation when it has TIA-136

digital-channel sets installed. An EAC-2000 may be ordered directly from the

factory with digital channel sets installed, or upgrade kits may be ordered to add

digital channel-set capability to an existing EAC-2000 installation.

In general the installation issues (isolation needs, channel selection, etc.) are

identical for either type of system and are covered in detail in the AMPS EAC-2000

manual. The differences between a TIA-136 equipped system and a standard

AMPS-only system will be covered in this section.

The hardware differences for a digital-equipped EAC-2000 are:

1.1.1 Controller Module

Controller Module 19-20001-1 is required for TIA-136 digital operation. If an

existing EAC-2000 installation has the older (analog only) 19-5598-1 Controller

Module installed, it must be replaced with the dual-mode 19-20001-1 Controller

Module. The 19-20001-1 module will process both analog and digital calls.

1.1.2 RF Module

The 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module is required for TIA-136 operation. It may be

placed in any card cage slot in place of the analog 19-5599-1 Cellular I.F. module

within the following constraints:

• A 19-20000-1 module must be placed in slot 5 for DCCH operation.

• A 19-20000-1 module must be placed in slot 6 if dual-mode hand-in

operation is desired. If DCCH-only operation is implemented or if hand-

in of DTC calls is not required, then the analog 19-5599-1 Cellular I.F.

module may be left in slot 6.

• If dual-mode (analog control channel as well as a DCCH channel)

operation is desired, then an analog 19-5599-1 module must be installed in

slot 1 for the analog control channel.

• Any combination of 19-2000-1 IS-136 RF modules and 19-5599-1

Cellular I.F. modules may be placed in the remaining slots in the card

cage.

1.1.3 45W PA Module

The 1819.G1 class AB linear PA must be used with the 19-20000-1 module. The

class C PAs (21-117-1, 21-396-1, etc.) are usable only with the analog 19-5599-1

Cellular I.F. modules. Note also that the 1819.G1 linear PA cannot be used in

place of a class C PA. No power output will be provided in either case if the PA

is mismatched with its corresponding RF module.

Note that the 1819.G1 PA, the 19-20000-1 and the 19-20001-1 modules have

reverse-colored labels (white on blue instead of blue on white) to provide a quick

visual aid in identifying the modules required for TIA-136 operation. The

1819.G1 PA also has a label on its handle stating that it is an “IS-136 Linear PA”.

It is also white-on-blue to match the corresponding controller and RF module

labels.

1.2 Kit Contents

To allow field conversion of EAC-2000 installations to digital operation, two kits are

available:

If the EAC-2000 has a 19-5598-1 Controller module installed, then a EK2000DCCH

kit must be ordered. The EK2000ACCH kit consists of:

• One 19-20001-1 Controller Module

• One 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module

• One 1819.G1 IS-136 Linear PA

If the EAC-2000 has a 19-20001-1 Controller module installed, then an

EK2000DTC kit must be ordered. EK2000DTC kit consists of:

• One 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module

• One 1819.G1 IS-136 Linear PA

The EK2000DTC kit may be used for the DCCH channel if the EAC-2000 already

has the 19-20001-1 Controller Module installed. Otherwise, any number of

EK2000DTC kits may be ordered to add or increase DTC capacity in the EAC-2000.

Any shortage or apparent damage should be resolved before beginning the

installation.

1.3 Saving the existing System Configuration

If the Controller in an existing EAC-2000 installation is being upgraded to the 19-

20001-1 version, then many of the parameters programmed into the existing system

will also need to be copied to the new controller. To assist in this operation a blank

Parameter Worksheet is included in the appendix. This provides a place to list the

current setup parameters so that they can be entered as the new digital-capable

Controller is installed. The highlighted entries on the Parameter Worksheet are

digital-specific and will entered later.

Information on connecting a local terminal to the EAC-2000D is contained in Section

4.4 of Volume 1 of the EAC-2000 Manual.

1.4 Determining the Digital-specific Parameters

1.4.1 Identifying the Digital Donor Control Channel

The digital donor control channel is the IS-136 control channel of the primary cell

site with which the EAC-2000 will communicate. It can be used in conjunction with

an Analog Donor Control channel where both analog only and IS-136 mobiles are to

be served in the boosted coverage area.

•When the booster is adjacent to a single cell site, the control channel(s) of that

cell site is(are) the donor control channel(s).

•When the booster is adjacent to several cell sites, the control channel(s) of the

cell site with the most unused channels should be chosen. (This cell is then referred

to as the primary donor cell.) More than one cell site being received by a donor

antenna can result in unwanted hand-offs by the cellular system, causing dropped

calls. Therefore the donor antenna should be positioned to favor the desired donor

cell site. As in the analog case, the reverse-path signal level received from the EAC-

2000 by the adjacent cell sites must be less than the signal level received by the

selected donor site. Usually a 10 dB margin is sufficient.

•When both analog and digital donor channels are selected, it is best if they are

both from the same donor cell site as that makes positioning of the donor antenna

easier.

1.4.2 Selecting a Boosted Digital Control Channel

The boosted digital control channel (selection X) is the control channel that will be

used in the EAC-2000 coverage area. Select a channel that meets the following

requirements:

•At least a 3 channel separation from any donor channel (both control and

voice)

•At least a 21 channel separation from any boosted channel (both control and

voice). (Closer spacing is possible with higher losses, consult the factory)

•Conforms to the local system configuration. (Since IS-136 mobiles are

assisted in finding a DCCH, the system must be configured to add the

boosted Digital Control Channel to those information broadcasts). There are

several strategies in the cellular system setup that can assist mobile DCCH

selection. These are described in the appendix System Integration Issues

and Strategies.

1.4.3 Recording the digital parameters on the Parameter Worksheet

To make it easier to program the digital parameters into the system, they may be

entered onto the parameter worksheet. The digital parameters are highlighted so

they can be easily found.

2.0 Installing the new Hardware

This section of the manual details the installation of the hardware contained in the

DCCH kit. By convention the DCCH hardware is installed in slot 5, so any AMPS

hardware (PA and RF Module) currently installed in slot 5 must be removed or

relocated to another unused slot. The analog 19-5598-1 Controller will be removed

so it can be replaced with the 19-20001-1 IS-136 controller included in the DCCH

kit.

This upgrade will require the system be removed from service for a period of time

and should be scheduled to reduce impact on service.

2.1 Removing the AMPS hardware

Be sure that all current set-up information from the system has been recorded as

described in section 1.3 of this manual.

Slot 5 is the fifth position from the left in the RF/IF module card cage. The

corresponding PA position is the upper right slot in the lower (for a 10-channel

EAC-2000) PA cage. For a 5-channel EAC-2000, it is in the upper right slot of the

PA cage.

When no traffic is currently being handled by the booster shut off the booster.

Remove the Controller, RF module and PA that are currently in slot 5.

2.2 Installing the DCCH hardware

Install the 1819.G1 IS-136 PA into PA Slot 5

Install the 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module into IF slot 5

Install the IS-136 Controller into the controller slot

Connect the jumper cable from the IS-136 Controller to the IS-136 RF module as

shown in the detail Figure 1.

Verify all modules are fully seated, the retaining screws on the Controller and RF

Module are finger-tight, and the front-panel data cable is correctly installed between

the 19-20001-1 Controller and the 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module in slot 5.

If DTC kits are being installed, place the 19-20000-1 I.F. modules in the desired

slots. For DTC hand-in, a 19-20000-1 module must be placed in card cage slot 6.

19-20000-1 modules may be placed in any other available slot for DTC operation.

If analog control channel operation is to be provided, then an analog 19-5599-1

Cellular I.F. module must be left in card cage slot 1. If necessary, existing 19-5599-

1 analog modules may be removed to make room for the new 19-20000-1 digital

modules.

Note: The IS-136 PA(s) will be installed as part of the following procedure.

2.3 Preparing the AMPS hardware

Since the Controller contains all of the channel assignment information, when the

system is initially powered up with the 19-20001-1 Controller the system will

attempt to run with the factory defaults, causing a mismatch with the combiner

tuning. Therefore it is recommended that all the analog PA’s be pulled so that they

remain in their slot but do not make contact with the backplane connector. This

will effectively take them out of the system until the channels are correctly

programmed.

2.4 Connecting a Local Terminal

The IS-136 Controller uses the same RS-232 parameters and same style cable as the

original controller. Connect the terminal as follows.

1. Using the data cable that was provided with the EAC-2000, connect the

terminal to the 25-pin D-sub connector located on the front of the

controller module.

2. Power up the terminal and set it to the following parameters:

•9600 baud

•Even parity

•7 data bits, 1 stop bit

•Full duplex (no local echo)

If possible, also set the terminal to—

•All capitals

•Send carriage return only (no line feed)

•Disable AUTO XON/XOFF and soft scroll

If you are using a terminal emulation program, select TTY or VT100. Be

Local Terminal

Connector

Jumper Cable

Figure 1

Detail showing Local Terminal Connector and Installed Jumper Cable

aware that some terminal emulation programs generate extraneous characters

that may interfere with communicating with the EAC-2000.

3. Power up the EAC-2000. (After about 2 seconds, the terminal should respond

CONSOLE LOCKED.)

4. Enter <CR> (carriage return or enter, depending on the keyboard). (The

terminal should respond with a welcome message and prompt you for a

password.)

•If something comes up but is illegible, check the terminal setup.

• If nothing comes up, power down. Recheck the power hookup, the

terminal hookup, and the terminal setup.

5. Enter the password, followed by <CR>. The default password is 1234. (The

terminal should respond with more salutation and the > prompt.) The system

is ready for you to set parameters.

2.5 Configuring the System

Configuring the system consists of re-entering previous analog channel and setup

information as well as the new digital setup parameters into the IS-136 Controller.

To make this operation easier, the setup screens exactly parallel those used in the

AMPS EAC-2000, with additions to cover digital operation as needed. Since for

many systems the default values are acceptable, reprogramming of those values will

not be needed. The defaults for both the AMPS and digital-equipped EAC-2000 are

shown on the Parameter Worksheet.

2.6 Changes to the SET Menus for DCCH and DTC Operation

The following changes have been made to the SET menus to accommodate DCCH

and DTC operation:

1) In the RF Boards / Position X menu, STATUS parameter, the following choices

are now available (for all boards except board 6):

(0) DISABLED

(1) ENABLED AMPS Control

(2) ENABLED AMPS Voice

(3) ENABLED TDMA DCCH

(4) ENABLED TDMA DTC

For board 6, the choices are:

(0) DISABLED

(1) ENABLED Scan

Note that only one position Status may be set to ENABLED AMPS Control.

Also, only one position Status may be set to ENABLED TDMA DCCH

2) The Boosted Channel (whether it is voice, analog control or DCCH) is now set in

the RF Boards / Position X menu. For example, if you have the "Status" of a

board set to ENABLED TDMA DCCH, the position menu for that board will

display as follows:

Position 5

A Status ...............................ENABLED TDMA DCCH

B Boosted DCCH Channel ................. 169

C Diversity ............................ON

3) On the PA Menu, Selection K, "Key Forward PA" has been changed as follows.

If you select a PA number for which the associated Board STATUS is ENABLED

TDMA DCCH or ENABLED TDMA DTC, then you will be prompted to enter

the desired PA output power. The allowable range is 33 to 48 dBm in one dB

increments. In the case of the digital PA, there is no power adjustment screw.

Rather, the power out is controlled by software to be in a range of the PA power

set point - 0 to +0.5 dB.

Once you have entered the desired power out, the PA will be keyed, and the PA

power out reading will be displayed as usual. During this display, the PA power

out setting may be adjusted up or down by entering "U" or "D". This allows the

power out to be adjusted to compensate for the varying losses in the combiner and

the duplexer such that the desired power out at the antenna connector can be

achieved.

Following is the display that occurs when a TDMA PA is keyed.

Enter your selection ...k

NOTE: Keying PA may cause calls to drop

and will disrupt service in the EAC coverage area.

Enter RETURN to exit or number of PA to key : 5

PA 5 is DTC or DCCH; PA Output is software controlled to a

target range of PA Power Setting +/- .3 dB ...

Current PA Power Setting is : +46.5 dBm

Enter new value (or RETURN if no change) ...

While keyed, Enter "U" or "D" to adjust the PA Power Setting ...

Current PA Power Setting is : +46.5 dBm

PA Position 5 Channel Number 169 PA Power +46.6 dBm

4) On the PA Menu, if any board has Status set to Enabled TDMA DCCH or

Enabled TDMA Voice, additional power settings appear. Following is the full PA

Menu.

Power Amplifiers

A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ..................0

B Forward PA Power Step - Control ................0

C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off................0

D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+40.0 dBm

E Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+40.0 dBm

F Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off.....+40.0 dBm

G Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...................+20 dBm

H Reverse PA Power Set - Control .................+20 dBm

I Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+15 dBm

J Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+15 dBm

K Key Forward PA .................................POWER ADJ / COMBINER TUNING

L Key Reverse PA .................................POWER MEASUREMENT

M Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DCCH ........+40.0 dBm

N Reverse PA Power Set - DCCH ....................+20 dBm

O Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DTC .........+40.0 dBm

P Reverse PA Power Set - DTC .....................+20 dBm

X Done with this menu

Note that selections M through P are new. They allow setting of the Forward PA

Power Low Alarm Point and Reverse PA Power Set for DCCH and DTC boards

and PAs. These settings correspond in functionality to their counterparts for the

analog voice and control channels.

Note that there is no "Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point" setting for the DTC

or DCCH reverse PAs. The TDMA boards perform closed loop power control and

reverse PA power out checking. There is still an alarm generated if the Reverse

PA power output is low, however, the threshold at which the alarm occurs is not

operator settable.

5) The Control Channels menu (under the System Parameters menu) has been

changed to accommodate extra settings for DCCH. The following additional

menu items will appear if a board Status is set to Enabled TDMA DCCH.

I Donor DCCH Channel ................................. 400

J DCCH Channel State During "All Channels Busy" ...... DIRECTED RETRY

The Donor DCCH Channel setting has obvious functionality.

The DCCH Channel State During "All Channels Busy" paramater has

function that controls the Boosted DCCH operation when all channels

are busy (or, if there is no Donor DCCH being received).

The available choices are as follows.

(1) Off

(2) DENY ACCESS, BUT COUNT

(3) BOOST ACCESSES

(4) DIRECTED RETRY

These selections are identical to the selections for the analog "Control Channel

State when All Channels Busy" parameter.

6) The Control Channels Menu no longer has a "Boosted Control Channel" selection.

This channel is now entered in the RF Board menu.

7) The Voice Channels Menu no longer has a "Boosted Voice Channels" selection.

These channels are now entered in the RF Board menu.

8) The RSSI Alarm Points menu under the Alarms menu has two new settings to

accommodate the DCCH. The new RSSI Alarm Points menu is as follows:

RSSI Alarm Points

A Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ........DISABLED

B Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point .........-80 dBm

C Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ..........DISABLED

D Donor DCCH Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ...........DISABLED

E Donor DCCH Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point ............-80 dBm

Note that selections D and E are new. They allow the setting of the RSSI levels

that cause alarms for the Donor DCCH.

9) The PA power settings for the forward PA for DCCH and DTC have a resolution

of 0.1 dBm. Also, the settings for the analog PA's have been changed to have a

resolution of 0.1 dBm. The associated powers reported with the "SSS" command

and the "PWR" command will read with resolution of 0.1 dBm.

Note that the accuracy of this reading ultimately depends upon the calibration of

the sensor in the PA or or the M1 antenna power sensor. Typically, this accuracy

is +/- .75 dB.

The reason power out is reported with a resolution of 0.1 dB even though the

accuracy is no better than 0.75 dB is to allow small changes in output power to be

resolved and displayed. For example, if a reported power out changes from +46.7

dBm to +46.2 dBm in a short term, the appropriate conclusion to draw is that (1)

the power out initially was 46.7 +/- 0.75 dBm and (2) the power out dropped by

about 0.5 dB.

3.0 Tuning the Transmitter Combiner and Setting Output Power

The combiner must be tuned and the output power levels set whenever the boosted

channels are entered or changed. For the upgrade to DCCH at least the boosted

DCCH will be new and will require adjustment. Any other channel changes will

also require retuning.

Even if the DCCH is only new channel to be tuned, it is preferable to repeak the

combiner and verify the output power for the other channels.

3.1 Tuning the DCCH Combiner PA 5

1. With the system power OFF, connect power-measuring equipment to the M1

antenna port (see Figure XX). Be sure that PA 5 (the IS-136 PA) is fully seated).

Remove the cover plates from the forward combiner(s) to reveal the combiner

tuning screws. Then turn the power back on. Output power may be monitored

using a through-line wattmeter (or a wattmeter with a built-in load) to monitor

output power.

2. From the SET Main Menu, type B <CR> to display the Power Amplifiers Menu.

A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ..................0

B Forward PA Power Step - Control ................0

C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off................0

D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+40.0 dBm

E Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+40.0 dBm

F Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off.....+40.0 dBm

G Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...................+20 dBm

H Reverse PA Power Set - Control .................+20 dBm

I Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+15 dBm

J Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+15 dBm

K Key Forward PA .................................POWER ADJ / COMBINER TUNING

L Key Reverse PA .................................POWER MEASUREMENT

M Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DCCH ........+40.0 dBm

N Reverse PA Power Set - DCCH ....................+20 dBm

O Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DTC .........+40.0 dBm

P Reverse PA Power Set - DTC .....................+20 dBm

X Done with this menu

3. Type K <CR> to key a forward PA.

4. Type 5 <CR> to key PA 5 and display the forward power output as measured at the

sensor.

5. Refer to the illustration affixed to the inside of the front door of the EAC-2000

cabinet to determine which combiner cavities coordinate with which PAs. Loosen

the lock nut and adjust combiner cavity 5 using a screwdriver.

•If using a wattmeter, adjust for maximum power output as indicated by the

wattmeter.

•Retighten the lock nut.

NOTE: The power reading displayed on the terminal will not vary as the

combiner is tuned.

Combiner Cavity

6. Adjust the power output for PA 5 from the laptop computer as described in

paragraph 3) in section 2.6.

F NOTE: The PA power level displayed on the terminal is 3 to 4 dB

higher than the power level at the antenna port because of internal cable

and combiner losses. The displayed PA power ranges from +38 to +47

dBm (7–45 watts), which corresponds to a range at the M1 antenna

connector of +34 to +43 dBm (3–20 watts). If the displayed power level

is used instead of a wattmeter, take these differences into consideration.

Always use a wattmeter if an accurate power level reading at the M1

antenna connector is desired.

3.2 Adjusting Combiners and Power levels for PAs 1-4, and 7-11

In a like manner the combiner can be tuned for the remaining analog channels by selecting

a new PA each time. Each PA should be fully seated in its slot before proceeding. The

power level is set differently on the analog PA’s as follows:

1. Adjust the power output for each PA using a small screwdriver or adjustment tool to

turn the PA power potentiometer on the front of the PA (Figure 4-9). Use a

wattmeter, if available, to measure the power output. Adjust to the level necessary

to meet the authorized ERP level from the antenna.

F NOTE: The PA power level displayed on the terminal is 3 to 4 dB

higher than the power level at the antenna port because of internal cable

and combiner losses. The displayed PA power ranges from +38 to +47

dBm (7–45 watts), which corresponds to a range at the M1 antenna

connector of +34 to +43 dBm (3–20 watts). If the displayed power level

is used instead of a wattmeter, take these differences into consideration.

Always use a wattmeter if an accurate power level reading at the M1

antenna connector is desired.

Location of Analog PA Power Potentiometer

2. Note that the PA power potentiometer has a 7–10 dB turn down range. If the

power out cannot be adjusted low enough, hit ESC to return to the Power

Amplifiers Menu.

Select B, Forward PA Power Step - Control. This allows entry of a setting

between 0 and 3. Increasing the step by 1 causes the maximum power out to be

reduced by 4 dB (2→8 dB, 3→12 dB). Adjust this parameter in conjunction with

the potentiometer to achieve the desired output power.

3. Repeat steps 3 (selecting a new PA each time) through 7 to adjust the remaining

analog PAs (if installed).

If low power out is desired, use selection A, Forward PA Power Step - Voice, for

PAs 2–5 and 7–11.

4. When all PAs have been adjusted, make a second pass through the PAs to check

tuning and power levels, and make further adjustments as needed. This step is

needed because one of the cavities might have been close to the point to which a

second cavity was being tuned. This would cause erroneous power readings and

adjustment during the initial pass.

3.3 Adjusting the PA 6 Power Level

PA 6 output power does not pass through the combiner. (For a description of PA 6

function, see Section 2 of Volume 3, Technical Information.) To adjust its power

level—

1. Turn the power off, move the power measuring equipment to the M2 antenna port,

and turn the power back on.

If low power out of PA 6 is desired, use selection C, Forward PA Power Step -

Hand-off, to reduce the maximum power out.

NOTE: If a digital module is installed in slot 6, then use the procedure described in

paragraph 3) in section 2.6 for setting the power output level.

EAC-2000 Operating Parameters Work Sheet

Serial Number ____________________ (from “SSS” command)

RF Boards

1234567891011

Status _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Diversity_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Power Amplifiers

Forward PA Power Step - Voice _____

Forward PA Power Step - Control _____

Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off _____

Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice _____

Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control _____

Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off _____

Reverse PA Power Set - Voice _____

Reverse PA Power Set - Control _____

Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice _____

Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control _____

Site Id

Site Identification ______________

Multi-Hop Feature _____

Control Channels

Donor Control Channel _____

Boosted Control Channel _____

RF Board Pair to Use for Control _____

Control Channel State _____

Directed Retry Channels 1_____ 2_____ 3_____ 4_____ 5_____ 6_____

Backup Control Channel Option _____

Revertive Control Channel Option _____

• Substitute Control Channel _____

• Booster Link Channel _____

• These selections only appear if Backup Control Channel is enabled or if Multi-Hop mode

3 or 4 is selected.

Voice Channels

Boosted Voice Channel 2 ____ 3 ____ 4 ____ 5 ____ 7 ____ 8 ____ 9 ____ 10 ____ 11 ____

Donor Voice Channels

5970 Hz SAT 6000 Hz SAT 6030 Hz SAT

____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Modem Control

Master Password ________________

Restricted Password ____________

Console Timeout _____

Auto Dial Enable _____

Dial-up Phone Number 1 __________________________

Dial-up Phone Number 2 __________________________

Auto Dial Trials Max _____

Max Auto Dial Trial Period _____

Delay Between Auto Dial Trials _____

Modem Mobile MIN ________________

Modem Mobile Power step _____

Modem Setup

NOTE: Record these strings before the upgrade, but do NOT reenter them after version 2X.03 or

later is installed. Versions 2X.03 and later have new default strings that allow the remote link to

run at high baud rates and to use error correction.

Init String __________________________

Dial Command _________________________

Hangup String _______________________

Local Port Baud Rate _____

Local Port Comm Params _____

Remote Port Baud Rate _____

Remote Port Comm Params _____

Thresholds and Power Control Menu

Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold _____

Hand-in Threshold _____

Multi-Donor Activation Threshold _____

Hand-back Threshold _____

Hand-in Mobile Power Step _____

Hand-back Mobile Power Step _____

RSSI Averaging Speed _____

Delay Between Hand-in Attempts _____

Station Power Class Selective Boosting ___________

Call Disconnect Parameters

Donor RSSI _____

Sat Fade Timeout _____

Max Number of Hand-back Attempts _____

Minimum Delay Between Hand-back Attempts _____

Call Processing Parameters Menu

Mobile RSSI > Threshold Parameters _____

Hand-back Grab-back Control _____

Alarms Menu

Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point _____

PA to Antenna Return Loss - High Alarm Point _____

PA Temp - High Alarm Point _____

PA Temp - Fan Activation Point _____

PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point _____

Power Control Causes PA Power Cutback _____

+28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point _____

+28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point _____

+12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point _____

+6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point _____

External Analog Inputs Menu

PA 1-6 Cage: PA 7-11 Cage:

Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State _____

Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State _____

Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State _____

Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State _____

External Digital Inputs Menu

PA 1-6 Cage: PA 7-11 Cage:

Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State _____

Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State _____

Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State _____

Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State _____

External Digital Outputs Menu

PA 1-6 Cage: PA 7-11 Cage:

Ext. Digital Output 1 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 1 State _____

Ext. Digital Output 2 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 2 State _____

Ext. Digital Output 3 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 3 State _____

Ext. Digital Output 4 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 4 State _____

Critical Alarms

(NOTE: default values for these are shown)

Board Out-of-Service Alarm...........................................CRITICAL ___________

Board ROM Alarm.........................................................CRITICAL ___________

Board Calibration Memory Alarm ..................................CRITICAL ___________

Serial Data Link Alarm ..................................................CRITICAL ___________

Personality Mismatch Alarm...........................................CRITICAL ___________

Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm ..........................................CRITICAL ___________

RVS PA PWR Low Alarm ............................................ CRITICAL ___________

RSSI Alarm ...................................................................LOG ONLY ___________

PA Out-of-Service Alarm ..............................................CRITICAL ___________

PA TEMP - High Alarm ................................................CRITICAL ___________

PA Power - Low Alarm ................................................. CRITICAL ___________

PA to Antenna Loss High Alarm ...................................CRITICAL ___________

Antenna RET Loss Alarm .............................................. CRITICAL ___________

ROM Alarm ..................................................................CRITICAL ___________

RAM Alarm ..................................................................CRITICAL ___________

NOVRAM Alarm .......................................................... CRITICAL ___________

SAT Detector Alarm ...................................................... CRITICAL ___________

Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm..............................CRITICAL ___________

External Analog Input Alarm.......................................... LOG ONLY ___________

External Digital Input Alarm ..........................................LOG ONLY ___________

RSSI Alarm Points

Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point NONE _____

Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point -80 dBm _____

Forward Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point NONE _____

$036

($& 0DQXDO

Installation • Operation • Technical

Order No. 27-7654-3

Issue 12/95

Field Support

If you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact

at one of the following telephone numbers:

Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)

or (216) 349-8413

Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413

The AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual (Order No. 27-7654-3, 12/95) includes the

following:

27-7655-2 Volume 1, Installation Procedures

27-7656-2 Volume 2, Operating Procedures

27-7657-2 Volume 3, Technical Information

27-7658-3 Appendices

27-7659-2 Glossary and Index

27-7660-1 Parts and Accessories Ordering Information

LIMITED WARRANTY

ALLEN TELECOM SYSTEMS, a Division of the ALLEN TELECOM GROUP,

INC. ("ALLEN TELECOM") warrants, on the terms and conditions hereto set forth,

all products manufactured by it to be free under normal use and service from defects

in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment,

to the first consumer (the "Warranty Period").

ALLEN TELECOM’s obligation under this Limited Warranty is limited to prompt

repair or replacement of the product, at its option, without charge, at an authorized

ALLEN TELECOM dealer or at the factory of ALLEN TELECOM in Cleveland,

Ohio, when the product is returned to an authorized dealer or to the factory with all

transportation charges prepaid and examination of the product shall disclose it to have

been defective in the respects aforesaid during the Warranty Period.

The Limited Warranty shall not be extended beyond its original term with respect

to any part or parts repaired or replaced by ALLEN TELECOM hereunder.

The Warranty Period shall not apply to any product which has been repaired or

altered in any manner by anyone other than ALLEN TELECOM or an authorized

outlet of ALLEN TELECOM, or if the defect, malfunction or failure of the product

was caused by damage by lightning, flood or other acts of nature or by power surges,

or from unreasonable use, or from improper installation or application, or to any

product which has not been maintained or used in accordance with the operating

specifications set forth in ALLEN TELECOM’s written instructions.

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY

PERIOD SPECIFIED ABOVE.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ALLEN TELECOM BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR

OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY.

Some states do not allow limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the

above limitation may not apply to you. Some states do not allow the exclusion or

limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion

may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may

also have other rights which vary from state to state.

ALLEN TELECOM neither assumes nor authorizes any person to assume for it

any obligation or liability other than as herein expressly stated.

iii

&RQWHQWV

Quick Start Checklist...................................... ix

1. Introduction ........................................ 1-1

2. Preliminary Decisions ................................. 2-1

3. Installing the Hardware ................................ 3-1

4. Setting Up for Initial Operation .......................... 4-1

5. Installing the Remote Link .............................. 5-1

6. Optimizing Performance ............................... 6-1

7. Multi-Hop™ Operation ................................. 7-1

8. Operation with Multi-Donor™ Units ....................... 8-1

9. RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE ......................... 9-1

10. Combined Operation: Multi-Hop / Multi-Donor.............. 10-1

1. Introduction ........................................ 1-1

2. SET Command...................................... 2-1

3. System Monitoring Commands .......................... 3-1

4. Special Commands ................................... 4-1

1. Introduction ........................................ 1-1

2. EAC-2000™ Description ............................... 2-1

3. Specifications and Drawings ............................ 3-1

A. Troubleshooting Guide ................................A-1

B. Isolation .......................................... B-1

C. Reference Oscillator Adjustment .......................... C-1

........................................... Glossary-1

................................................ Index-1

.......................Parts-1

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual (27-7654-3, 12/95) Page v

9ROXPH

,QVWDOODWLRQ3URFHGXUHV

27-7655-2

Issue 12/95

Field Support

If you need technical assistance with the AMPS EAC-2000™, contact

at one of the following telephone numbers:

Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)

or (216) 349-8413

Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413

Contents

............................................ vi

.......................................vii

.......................................... 1-1

1.1 About This Volume ................................. 1-1

1.1.1 Contents .................................. 1-1

1.1.2 Terminology ............................... 1-3

1.2 About the AMPS EAC-2000™.......................... 1-4

1.2.1 Use of Boosters............................. 1-4

1.2.2 Frequency Allocation ......................... 1-4

1.2.3 EAC-2000 Operation ......................... 1-4

................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction ....................................... 2-1

2.2 Use of Multi-hop™ Configuration or Multi-donor™ Units ........ 2-2

2.3 Site Requirements ................................... 2-2

2.3.1 Location .................................. 2-2

2.3.2 ac Service ................................. 2-3

2.3.3 Space .................................... 2-3

2.3.4 Mounting Surface ........................... 2-4

2.4 Antennas ......................................... 2-4

2.4.1 Type .................................... 2-5

2.4.2 Placement ................................ 2-6

2.4.3 Measuring Signal Level and Isolation .............. 2-9

2.5 Selecting Channels ................................. 2-11

2.5.1 Identifying the Donor Control Channel ............ 2-11

2.5.2 Selecting a Boosted Control Channel ............. 2-12

2.5.3 The Revertive Control Channel Option............ 2-13

2.5.4 The Substitute Control Channel ................. 2-13

• Disabling the Substitute Control Channel ...... 2-14

• Enabling the Substitute Control Channel ....... 2-14

2.5.5 Selecting the Directed Retry Channels ............ 2-15

2.5.6 Selecting Donor Voice Channels ................ 2-16

2.5.7 Selecting Boosted Voice Channels ............... 2-17

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page iii

................................. 3-1

3.1 Introduction ....................................... 3-1

3.2 Mechanical Installation ............................... 3-4

3.2.1 Uncrating the Equipment ...................... 3-4

3.2.2 Mounting the Cabinet......................... 3-4

3.2.3 Securing the Doors .......................... 3-5

3.3 Connecting the EAC-2000 to ac Power ................... 3-6

3.4 Installing the Antennas ............................... 3-6

3.4.1 Connecting the Antennas ...................... 3-7

3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Controls (Optional) .............. 3-8

........................... 4-1

4.1 Introduction ....................................... 4-1

4.2 Powering Up the EAC-2000 ........................... 4-3

4.3 Powering Down the EAC-2000 ......................... 4-4

4.4 Connecting a Local Terminal ........................... 4-4

4.5 Becoming Familiar with System Commands ................ 4-6

4.5.1 Basic Commands............................ 4-6

4.5.2 Using the SET Menus ....................... 4-10

4.6 Setting Initial Parameters ............................. 4-12

4.6.1 Checking System Status ...................... 4-12

4.6.2 Entering the Site ID ......................... 4-13

4.6.3 Setting the Donor Control Channel .............. 4-14

4.6.4 Setting the Boosted Control Channel ............. 4-15

4.6.5 Setting the Directed Retry Channels .............. 4-15

4.6.6 Setting the Donor Voice Channels ............... 4-16

4.6.7 Setting the Boosted Voice Channels .............. 4-18

4.6.8 Programming Alarms and Thresholds............. 4-18

4.6.9 Programming the Modem Mobile MIN,

Mobile Power Step, and Passwords .............. 4-24

4.7 Tuning Transmitter Combiner and Setting Output Power ....... 4-25

4.7.1 Adjusting Combiners and

Power Levels for PAs 1–5 and 7-11 .............. 4-25

4.7.2 Adjusting the PA 6 Power Level ................ 4-28

4.7.3 Setting Reverse Path Output Power (If Necessary) .... 4-29

4.7.4 Setting PA Power Low Alarm Points ............. 4-30

4.7.5 Setting Time and Report Values ................ 4-31

Page iv AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

............................... 5-1

5.1 Introduction ....................................... 5-1

5.2 Setting Up Service .................................. 5-3

5.3 Programming the Mobile Radio ......................... 5-4

5.4 Checking Out the Mobile.............................. 5-4

5.5 Testing the Remote Link .............................. 5-5

5.5.1 EAC-2000 Answering ........................ 5-5

5.5.2 EAC-2000 Originating ........................ 5-6

................................ 6-1

6.1 Introduction ....................................... 6-1

6.2 Determining Hand-in and Hand-back Thresholds ............. 6-1

6.3 Setting Hand-in and Hand-back Thresholds ................. 6-2

.................................. 7-1

7.1 Introduction ....................................... 7-1

7.2 How Multi-Hop Operation Works ........................ 7-1

7.3 Installing the EAC-2000 in Multi-Hop Configuration .......... 7-2

7.3.1 Achieving Antenna Isolation and Signal Level ........ 7-3

7.3.2 Enabling the Multi-Hop Feature ................. 7-3

7.3.3 Selecting Boosted Channels for Each Unit .......... 7-4

7.3.4 Setting the Hand-back Threshold ................. 7-6

7.3.5 Reviewing the Hand-in Threshold ................ 7-9

........................ 8-1

8.1 Introduction ....................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Purpose of Multi-Donor Units ................... 8-1

8.1.2 MDU Operation ............................. 8-2

8.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for MDU Operation ................ 8-2

8.2.1 Achieving Adequate Signal Level at the EAC-2000 .... 8-3

8.2.2 Achieving Adequate Signal Level at the MDU ....... 8-3

8.2.3 Setting the Multi-Donor Activation Threshold ........ 8-4

8.2.4 Assigning a Booster Link Channel................ 8-4

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page v

. 10-1

10.1 Introduction ...................................... 10-1

10.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for Combined Operation ............ 10-2

10.2.1 Requirements ............................. 10-2

10.2.2 Channel Assignments ........................ 10-2

1-1. Important Terms Used in This Manual....................... 1-3

1-2. System Operation ..................................... 1-5

2-1. Pre-Installation Checklist ................................ 2-1

2-2. Recommended Space................................... 2-3

2-3 Typical Antenna Installation .............................. 2-8

2-4 Antenna Isolation v. Horizontal Separation .................... 2-9

2-5 Antenna Isolation v. Vertical Separation ..................... 2-10

3-1. Hardware Installation Checklist ............................ 3-2

3-2. EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed) ..................... 3-2

3-3. EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed) ..................... 3-3

3-4. Outdoor Cabinet Footprint ............................... 3-4

3-5. Antenna Connectors .................................... 3-7

3-6. External Alarm/Control Connector Pin Out .................... 3-8

3-7. Electrical Specifications for Inputs and Outputs ................. 3-9

3-8. Typical Wiring for External Inputs and Outputs ............... 3-11

4-1. Setup Checklist ....................................... 4-2

4-2. EAC-2000 Breakers .................................... 4-3

4-3. Breaker Locations ..................................... 4-3

4-4. Location of Local Terminal Connector ....................... 4-4

4-5. Command Definitions .................................. 4-6

4-6. System Commands .................................... 4-8

4-7. SET Command Menu Map.............................. 4-11

4-8. Combiner Cavity .................................... 4-25

4-9. Location of PA Power Potentiometer ....................... 4-27

5-1. Remote Link Installation Checklist ......................... 5-3

7-1. Example of Valid Channel Set ............................ 7-5

10-1. Combined Configuration Example......................... 10-1

10-2. Channel Assignment Example............................ 10-3

Page vi AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Quick Start Checklist

This checklist provides a brief summary of steps for starting up the AMPS EAC-

2000™. For detailed instructions, see Sections 1–6. For special configurations and

options, see Sections 7–10.

(See Section 2)

4 antennas: M1, M2, D1 and mobile

Isolation: greater than 75 dB measured between D1 and M1, M2.

Signal level: -75 dBm or greater from donor on D1 antenna.

ac power: 240 V/20 A service wired to power panel in rear.

Channel separation: Boosted channel set assigned with no boosted

channel closer than 3 channels (90 kHz) to any donor channel.

Separation by 150 kHz is recommended.

Mobile MIN assigned for programming of modem mobile.

Donor channels: Have list of donor channels and SAT ready.

(See Section 4)

1. Connect terminal or computer RS-232 port to 25-pin D female connector

on controller board using supplied cable. Set up terminal for 9600-E-7-1,

no CTS/RTS, no X-on/X-off.

2. Turn on rear panel ac breaker.

3. Turn on power supply ac breaker(s). Be sure the 6/12 V power switch

is on.

4. The terminal should "come alive" and display CONSOLE LOCKED.

Press

ENTER, and receive the banner showing the firmware revision and

the unit serial number. At the password prompt, enter the default

password

1234 and <CR>.

Continued . . .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page vii

Quick Start Checklist

(See Sections 4, 5, and 6)

1. Type SSS <CR>. (Nothing should show DISABLED. If anything shows

disabled, refer to Appendix A, Troubleshooting Guide.)

2. Type ALA <CR>. (There should be no alarms. If there are any OUT

OF SERVICE or memory alarms, refer to Appendix A.)

3. Type SET <CR> and go into submenu C, System Parameters.

4. Enter submenu A and program the site ID.

5. Enter submenu B and program the donor and boosted control channels.

Decide how the control channel is to act when all channels are busy.

6. Enter submenu C and program the boosted voice channel numbers for

channels 2–5 and 7-11, if installed.

7. Program the donor voice channels into list A, B, or C, depending upon

the SAT used at the donor. To enter a 15-channel set, enter a plus sign

(+) before the first channel number. Delete unneeded channels.

8. Enter the Modem Control submenu D and program the modem mobile

MIN that has been assigned. Calls made to and from this number will

not be transferred to the booster, but will be trapped-out and handled

directly by the donor. Also set the modem mobile power step to the

desired level.

9. Turn off the system power and connect power measuring equipment to the

M1 antenna port. Turn system power back on. From the SET Main

menu, enter submenu B, Power Amplifiers. Select menu entry K (Key

Forward PA) for combiner tuning. Select amplifiers 1-5 and 7-11, if

installed. Use a screwdriver to adjust the combiner for maximum power

output. Use a small screwdriver or adjusting tool to adjust the PA power

pot on the front of each PA for desired power out of the unit.

10. Turn off the system power, connect the power measuring equipment to

the M2 antenna port, and turn the system power back on. From the SET

Main Menu, enter submenu B, Power Amplifiers. Select menu entry K

(Key Forward PA) for combiner tuning and select PA 6. Adjust the

power to be equal to the voice channel power.

11. Remove the test equipment and use <CTRL> X to exit the SET menu

completely. Press

<CR> at the question prompt.

Continued . . .

Page viii AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Quick Start Checklist

(Continued)

12. From the command entry level >, use the TIM command to set the date

and time.

13. From the command entry level >, enter DCS=0, DCH=0, and ALA=0 to

reset the report values.

1. Connect the 4 antennas. The unit is now operational!

2. Type SCS <CR> and make some calls. You will see your MIN

displayed on call originations and answers.

3. Connect the handset to the connector on the front of the mobile shelf (see

Section 5).

4. Program hand-in/hand-back thresholds as desired (see Section 6).

5. After completing installation and setup, secure cabinet doors.

See Sections 7–10 for special configurations and options.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page ix

6HFWLRQ ,QWURGXFWLRQ

1.1 About This Volume

This volume, the first of three volumes pertaining to the AMPS EAC-

2000™, contains detailed procedures for installing the EAC-2000.

This volume has been divided into a Quick Start Checklist and 12

sections, described below. Volume 2 contains operating procedures,

and Volume 3 contains technical information. A set of appendices

(described below), a glossary, and an index accompany the three

volumes.

• Brief summary of installation and

setup procedures.

• Contents of this volume, key terms,

and a general introduction to the AMPS EAC-2000.

• Factors to consider before

you begin installation.

• Procedures for

mechanical, electrical, and antenna installation and connection

of external alarms or controls.

• Procedures for

powering up the system, connecting a local terminal,

programming parameters, tuning the transmitter combiner, and

setting output power.

• Procedures for

setting up, programming, and checking out the mobile, and

testing the remote link.

• Procedures for setting

hand-back and hand-in thresholds to optimize booster

performance.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-1

(Continued)

• Procedures for installing

the EAC-2000 in a Multi-Hop chain.

• Special

installation procedures when using the EAC-2000 with Multi-

Donor Units.

•

• Recommendations for

resolving selected installation and operation problems.

• Recommendations for achieving

antenna isolation.

Procedures for ordering

parts and accessories for units that are under warranty and for units

on which the warranty has expired.

For detailed descriptions of all EAC-2000 operating parameters and

procedures for setting them, refer to Volume 2. For a more detailed

description of the EAC-2000 and how it works, refer to Volume 3.

Page 1-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Figure 1-1 lists key terms used in this volume. Additional terms and

acronyms are defined in the Glossary.

Figure 1-1. Important Terms Used in This Manual

Advanced Mobile Phone System. Cellular standard that provides

compatible operation in the 824–849 and 869–894 MHz band.

To receive, amplify, and reradiate signals to fill in weak

coverage areas.

A system that boosts or repeats.

The area where subscribers obtain coverage through the

booster.

The cell site in communication with the booster.

The control channel used between the cell site and the booster

(and all the mobiles in direct contact with the cell site).

The control channel used between the booster and the mobile

in the booster coverage area (a different frequency than the

donor control channel).

™The trademarked name for a booster made by Allen Telecom

Systems.

The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by the donor cell,

which is received, amplified, and reradiated by a booster and

received ultimately by a subscriber in the booster coverage area.

Synonymous with , usually applied to boosters that

translate frequencies. The EAC-2000 is type-accepted as a

repeater.

The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by a subscriber

mobile in the booster coverage area, which is received,

amplified, and reradiated by a booster and received ultimately by

the donor cell site.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-3

1.2 About the AMPS EAC-2000

This section provides a brief overview of how the EAC-2000 operates. For a

more detailed discussion, refer to Volume 3, Technical Information.

Cellular telephone systems transmit signals in two directions between

cell sites and mobile telephones within the signal coverage area. The

signal path from the cell site to the mobiles is called the

path, and the path from mobiles to cell site is the path.

If weak signal transmissions occur within the coverage area because

of indoor applications, terrain obstructions, or distance from the

transmitter, a relatively inexpensive way to extend transmission range

is to install a signal booster that receives the signal, amplifies it, and

reradiates it. (See Figure 1-2.)

AMPS cellular systems use 824–849 MHz for reverse and 869–894

MHz for forward transmissions. These frequency bands are divided

into systems A and B, each with designated and

The EAC-2000 booster uses up to 21 individual narrowband

amplifiers: 1 (reverse) for the control channel, up to nine (forward

and reverse) for voice channels, and one amplifier (forward only) for

hand-in and data message transmissions. The reverse half of this

board acts as a locate receiver. There are two amplifiers for each IF

board (forward and reverse); each is a single channel (30 kHz) wide

and has dual synthesizers that control input and output channels

independently.

The simplified diagram in Figure 1-2 illustrates one board (forward

and reverse paths) being used for the control channel, and one board

(forward and reverse) being used for one voice channel.

Page 1-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

Figure 1-2. System Operation

The EAC-2000 monitors the donor

control channel to obtain system-specific information. It generates a

control channel data stream and transmits it on another control

channel frequency. Mobiles that are unable to receive the original

channel then lock onto the boosted control channel and communicate

with the cell site through the booster. Control channel translation is

possible because the mobiles always lock onto the strongest control

channel.

The amplifiers for boosting voice

channels are keyed as needed when voice channel activity is detected

in the boosted coverage area. The EAC-2000 identifies mobiles in

the booster coverage area by two methods: one for identifying

mobiles that place or answer calls from within the booster coverage

area and another for identifying mobiles that enter the area with a call

in progress.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-5

(Continued)

When a call is placed or answered from within the booster coverage

area, the following sequence occurs:

1. The mobile accesses the reverse boosted control channel. The

EAC-2000 receives the access, then accesses the reverse donor

control channel.

2. The EAC-2000 waits for the corresponding voice channel

designation message on the forward channel.

3. The EAC-2000 modifies the voice channel designation message

by substituting one of its boosted voice channels for the donor

voice channel, thus sending the mobile to one of the boosted

voice channels.

4. A boost path is set up between the mobile and the primary

donor cell site, with the mobile operating on the boosted voice

channel, the donor operating on the donor voice channel, and

the EAC-2000 translating and boosting between the two.

To identify mobiles that may drive into the boosted coverage area

with a call in progress, the EAC-2000 scans the donor voice channels

and maintains a Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) average

for each channel. If the average RSSI exceeds a preset threshold, the

EAC-2000 hands the mobile to one of the boosted voice channels.

To provide for situations in

which in-progress calls may be linked to various neighboring cell

sites (multi-donor operation), the system allows for entry of three

separate , one for each possible

Supervisory Access Tone (SAT) frequency.

If the booster is adjacent to a single cell site, that cell site is referred

to as the , and the control channel of that cell site is the

. The voice channels used in the donor cell

may be entered into the donor voice channel list with the SAT of that

cell site to handle mobiles that drive between the donor and booster

with a call up.

Page 1-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

If the booster is adjacent to several cell sites and there are donor

antennas pointing at these cell sites, the control channel of one of the

cell sites is chosen as the donor control channel, and this cell is then

referred to as the . The voice channels of all the

neighboring cells are entered into the scan list with the SAT of the

neighboring cells.

Calls placed or answered from within the booster coverage area

(identified by decoding the data streams) are boosted back to the

primary donor cell. Calls handed in (identified by channel scanning)

are boosted back to the cell on which the call was in progress.

The EAC-2000 monitors for SAT fade, weak

mobile RSSI, or mobile release to determine when to hand back the

mobile or terminate the translation through the booster. If weak RSSI

is detected, the EAC-2000 then sends the mobile a hand-off message

directing it back to the original donor voice channel. This allows the

mobile to be covered as it drives out of the booster coverage area

back into the donor cell site coverage area.

When a

mobile is heading away from the booster coverage area, it should be

handed back to the donor cell site only if there is a strong enough

signal to support the transmission. If the mobile is heading away

from the donor cell, handing it back to that cell would result in a

weak signal. To handle this situation, the EAC-2000 uses the

Shortly after sending the hand-off message, the EAC-2000 tries to

grab the mobile back by sending it a second hand-off message

directing it back to the boosted voice channel. Since the mobile

responds to the strongest signal, it will ignore the grab-back message

if the signal from the donor is stronger. If the booster signal is

stronger, the mobile will come back to the booster voice channel. If

the mobile’s RSSI is weak, the EAC-2000 will periodically send

hand-back/grab-backs but continue to handle the mobile until the

signal level is unusable.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-7

6HFWLRQ 3UHOLPLQDU\'HFLVLRQV

2.1 Introduction

Before the EAC-2000 can be installed, preliminary decisions must be made

about the following:

• Use of Multi-hop configuration

• Booster site

• Antenna placement

• Control and voice channels to be used

As an installer, you may be involved in some or all of these decisions. The

checklist in Figure 2-1 provides a brief overview of preparations to be made

prior to installing the EAC-2000.

Figure 2-1. Pre-Installation Checklist

1. Coverage area and distance from base station identified. (Sec. 2.3.1)

2. Electrical service verified for installation site. (Sec. 2.3.2)

3. Site selected in accordance with EAC-2000 weight and space requirements.

(Secs. 2.3.3 and 2.3.4)

4. M1, M2, D1 and mobile modem antennas selected and installed. (Sec. 2.4)

Minimum vertical separation of antennas achieved.

5. Antenna isolation and signal levels from the cell site measured. (Sec. 2.4.3)

6. RF channels selected: (Sec. 2.5)

Donor control channel

Boosted control channel

Directed retry channels (at least one of the six directed retry channels should

be assigned)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-1

2.2 Use of Multi-Hop™ Configuration or Multi-Donor™ Units

Multi-hop operation involves setting up two or more EAC-2000 units to operate

together in a line. This configuration is described in greater detail in Section 7.

Use of Multi-Donor Units involves placing a reverse-translating Multi-Donor

Unit at cell sites adjacent to the booster to allow mobiles to be handed-off to the

appropriate cells as they leave the booster area. Operation with Multi-Donor

Units is described in Section 8.

If either of these arrangements is to be used, system parameters will need to be

set accordingly. Minimum signal level requirements will also be affected.

2.3 Site Requirements

The site chosen for the EAC-2000 must meet requirements related to location,

electrical service, space, and mounting surface, as described below.

If a line-of-sight path between donor

cell and booster is maintained and a high-gain 6- to 10-foot (2- to 3-

meter) dish antenna is used, the EAC-2000 may be placed up to 80

miles (130 km) away from the donor cell. (Using frequency

translation for both voice and control channels makes it possible to

place the booster farther from the donor cell than is possible with

nontranslating boosters.)

The unit should be placed as close as

possible to the antennas to avoid excessive cable loss. Losses should

be kept to 3 dB or less for each antenna cable.

Page 2-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The following ac service is required:

• 240 Vac

• single-phase

• 20-amp minimum service

The EAC-2000 unit is approximately 2 ft (W) x 3 ft 5 in (D) x 5 ft

7 in (H) (61 cm x 104 cm x 170 cm). Allow space for the unit itself

plus additional space for access to the front and rear doors.

Figure 2-2. Recommended Space

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-3

The outdoor cabinet should be bolted to a concrete or other

weatherproof pad capable of supporting approximately 250 pounds

per square foot (1220 kg per square meter). Adequate drainage away

from the pad should be provided to prevent water from accumulating

underneath the cabinet.

2.4 Antennas

The EAC-2000 requires four antennas:

• Primary antenna facing donor cell site(s), used for—

- Reception of control and voice channel signals from donor cell

site(s).

- Transmission of control and voice signals back to cell site(s).

• Primary antenna facing mobiles in the booster coverage

area, used for—

- Transmission of boosted control channel and boosted voice channels

to mobiles.

- Diversity reception from mobiles.

- Transmission of hand-back messages to mobiles.

• Second antenna facing mobiles in the booster coverage area,

used for—

- Sending hand-in and grab-back messages to mobiles.

- Diversity reception from mobiles.

- Sending data messages to multi-hop EAC-2000s and Multi-Donor

Units.

• Antenna for the installed cellular mobile. Used for—

- Receiving and transmitting signals from any cell site in the system.

Ensure that the proper antenna type and placement have been selected for each

antenna.

Page 2-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The antennas for the booster area should be chosen by the same

criteria as used for a cell site. A typical installation might use the

following antennas:

• One high-gain directional antenna pointed toward the

donor cell.

• and Two identical directional or omnidirectional

antennas.

A directional antenna facing away from the donor's coverage

area is recommended for installations where the booster is

located near the edge of the donor cell's coverage area. This

arrangement prevents the unnecessary boosting of mobiles that

are in the donor cell's primary coverage area. It also allows

fewer channels of equipment to be used at the booster location.

Omnidirectional antennas are appropriate for most other

applications.

Regardless of the type of antenna chosen, the

M1 and M2 antennas must have identical gain and

patterns, and be installed to cover the same area.

• A low-gain or YAGI base station antenna.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-5

Antenna locations must meet the following

requirements for minimum signal level, physical separation, and

isolation.

• The minimum signal level from any

cell to be used as a donor must be -75 dBm at the D1 antenna

connector on the EAC-2000. The minimum signal level from

the donor cell must be at least -105 dBm at the mobile antenna

feed.

Multi-hop configurations: An EAC-2000 not adjacent to the

donor requires a forward signal level of at least -70 dBm (at the

D1 antenna connector) from the previous EAC-2000 in the chain.

Each booster along the path must be able to communicate only

with the previous and next booster. They are not required to be

able to receive from or transmit back to the donor cell site.

Multi-Donor Units: The RF path between the M2 antenna and

the Multi-Donor Unit "booster link antenna" must be such that

the Multi-Donor Units can receive at least a -100 dBm signal

when the EAC-2000 transmits using PA 6.

• For diversity operation, the M1 and M2

antennas should be physically separated by 10 feet (3 m)

horizontally or 3 feet (1 m) vertically.

Even if diversity reception is not required, both

the M1 and M2 antennas must be installed, since both

antennas are used to transmit to the boosted mobiles.

Page 2-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

• Isolation between the D1 and M1 and between the

D1 and M2 antennas . Isolation

between the mobile antenna and all of the others

Figure 2-3 shows a typical installation. M1 and M2 are placed

highest on the tower to achieve the best coverage to the boosted

area. D1 is placed below M1 and M2. At least 50 feet (15 m)

of vertical separation is usually needed to meet the isolation

requirement.

The isolation achieved at a given separation will

vary greatly depending upon the type of antennas, nearby

reflections, etc. Fifty feet (15 m) vertical separation may

not be enough in all cases.

D1 must be placed high enough to receive the required

minimum signal level from the donor. The mobile antenna can

usually be placed close to the ground. At least 35 feet (11 m)

vertical separation between the mobile antenna and the others is

usually needed, however, more may be required in some

installations.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-7

(Continued)

Figure 2-3. Typical Antenna Installation

Page 2-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

To verify the correct placement and alignment of the antennas, it will

be necessary to measure the signal level from the donor cell site (on

the selected donor control channel) and the isolation between the

various antennas to ensure they meet the required levels.

To measure the donor control channel signal level—

• connect a communications service monitor or some other

frequency selective measuring instrument to the D1 antenna;

monitor the control channel from the donor cell;

• adjust the orientation of the D1 antenna to peak this reading; at

least -75 dBm is required.

To measure antenna isolation—

Antenna isolation can be measured using a spectrum analyzer and a

tracking generator. These functions are often combined in cellular

communications monitors.

The tracking generator output is applied to the coax connector going

to one of the system antennas, while the spectrum analyzer input is

connected to one of the other system antennas. The tracking

generator output level should be set to maximum (usually about 0

dBm), with the spectrum analyzer set to check both the transmit and

receive ends of the band. If a 0 dBm signal is used as the source, the

dBm reading on the analyzer will be equal to the amount of isolation

achieved between the two antennas.

Isolation is usually frequency dependent, with several

nulls and peaks possible in each band. The highest peak in

either band defines the minimum isolation that is achieved with

a particular antenna installation.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-9

(Continued)

Signals from the cellular system will likely be stronger than the

sweep signal received from the tracking generator, and difficulty may

be experienced in measuring the actual isolation.

Many spectrum analyzers have difficulty reading signals below -60

to -70 dBm when sweeping a broad bandwidth. In this case, the

band may be swept in smaller frequency segments, or a separate

signal generator with higher possible output power may be substituted

for the tracking generator. The signal generator frequency and

amplitude can be manually changed to avoid conflict with existing

strong signals from the donor and other cell sites.

The signal generator should be manually swept through both the low

split and the high split bands to determine the minimum isolation

point.

To measure isolation—

1. Supply a known signal level of about 0 to +20 dBm across the

band into one of the antenna feeds (M1, D1, or mobile).

2. Using test equipment, measure the signal level received on the

other antenna feeds.

3. Adjust antenna locations and orientations to achieve the desired

antenna isolations.

4. Move the signal source to other antennas, and recheck the

isolation. Be sure to check both the forward and the reverse

bands.

5. If the D1 antenna has been repositioned, recheck the received

donor control channel signal level to verify that it exceeds -75

dBm.

6. Record these measurements.

Refer to Appendix B for a more detailed procedure for measuring

isolation.

Page 2-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

2.5 Selecting Channels

Before beginning to install the hardware, identify the various channels on which

the system will operate:

• Donor control channel

• Boosted control channel

• Substitute control channel (if Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled)

• Donor voice channels (primary and neighboring)

• Boosted voice channels

• Directed retry channels

Make note of all selected channels. They will be entered as system parameters

during installation (Volume 1, Section 4). Control channel parameters are listed

under the Control Channels Menu, shown here with all available selections.

Refer to this menu for sections 2.5.1 through 2.5.5.

A Donor Control Channel ...................................... 337

B Boosted Control Channel .................................... 340

C RF Board to Use for Control Channel ............................. 1

D Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy" ...... DIRECTED RETRY

E Directed Retry Channels .................................... LIST

F Back-up Control Channel Option ......................... DISABLED

G Revertive Control Channel Option ........................ DISABLED

H Substitute Control Channel ............................. DISABLED

I Booster Link Channel....................................... 550

J Booster Link Channel - Previous EAC ........................... 571

The donor control channel (selection ) is the control channel of the

primary cell site with which the EAC-2000 will communicate.

•, the control

channel of that cell site is the donor control channel.

•, the control

channel of the cell site with the most unused channels should be

chosen. (This cell is then referred to as the primary donor cell.)

More than one cell site being received by a donor antenna can

result in unwanted hand-offs by the cellular system, causing

dropped calls.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-11

The boosted control channel (selection ) is the control channel that

will be used in the EAC-2000 coverage area. Select a channel that

meets the following requirements:

• Must be one of the dedicated control channels:

– System A = channels 313–333

– System B = channels 334–354

• Must be different from the control channels used in cells

adjacent to the booster to avoid interference.

There must be at least a 3-channel spacing between any

boosted channel and any donor channel.

When the Revertive Control Channel Option (selection G) is enabled,

the EAC-2000 continues to repeat the control channel (forward and

reverse) when all of the normal voice channels become occupied. If

another call goes through, the control channel equipment is

redesignated to operate as voice, and the last candidate is assigned to

and boosted by the control channel equipment.

Because of the fixed-tuned combiner used in the forward direction,

the mobile operates in voice mode on the boosted control channel.

The EAC-2000 translates the boosted control channel to the originally

assigned donor voice channel. The donor side of the EAC-2000

channels is not fixed in frequency.

When the call on the control channel ends, the equipment reverts to

repeating the control channel. If a call on one of the normal voice

channels ends, the EAC-2000 hands-off the mobile operating on the

control channel equipment to the available voice channel equipment

(this is referred to as ). The control channel equipment

then reverts to repeating the control channel.

Page 2-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

If the Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled, the Substitute

Control Channel parameter (selection ) will appear.

This parameter may be enabled to keep mobiles not in a call from

roaming during times when the control channel equipment is being

used to boost a voice call. The EAC-2000 uses channel 6 equipment

(the only RF elements not involved in boosting a voice call) to put

the substitute control channel on the air.

The Substitute Control Channel parameter may be disabled. In this

case, the Revertive Control Channel option will still operate. That is,

calls will be handled by the control channel equipment and

transferred to voice channel equipment when it becomes available.

However, during this time no control channel will be transmitted in

the booster coverage area.

This selection would be appropriate if there is sufficient control

channel coverage from other cells throughout the majority of the

booster coverage area, or if it is permissible to allow mobiles to

roam.

If substitute control channel transmission is desired, a channel must

be chosen and entered. Choose a channel that meets the following

criteria:

• Separated from the boosted control channel by at least 90 kHz.

(This prevents interference. There is no advantage to greater

separation.)

• Different from the donor control channel, and separated from it

by at least 90 kHz.

• Different from the control channels of other cells that may

provide coverage in the booster coverage area.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-13

The directed retry channels parameter (selection ) is probably the

best option for most EAC-2000 installations. The parameter is a

factory-set default and is one of five options available under selection

(Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy") of the

Control Channels Menu.

When the EAC-2000 is busy, the boosted control channel (or

substitute control channel, if Revertive Control Channel Option is

enabled) remains on the air. If more accesses or page responses

come in, the EAC-2000 sends the mobile a special "directed retry"

message. This message gives the mobile a list of up to six other

control channels on which to attempt the access. These are the

and are assigned by the customer.

The list of six channels is sent to the mobile in the directed retry

message. The mobile will scan this set of channels and try its access

on the strongest of the six channels.

The donor control channel and the control channel of

cells adjacent to the boosted coverage area should be entered.

The boosted control channel must not be in this list.

Page 2-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The donor and boosted voice channels can be accessed from the

Voice Channels Menu, shown here with all available selections.

Refer to this menu for sections 2.5.5 and 2.5.6.

A Donor Voice Channels (5970 Hz SAT) .................. List

B Donor Voice Channels (6000 Hz SAT) .................. List

C Donor Voice Channels (6030 Hz SAT) .................. List

M Donor Voice Channels (MULTIPLE SAT) ................ List

2 Boosted Voice Channel Position 2 ...................... 361

3 Boosted Voice Channel Position 3 ...................... 382

4 Boosted Voice Channel Position 4 ...................... 403

5 Boosted Voice Channel Position 5 ...................... 424

7 Boosted Voice Channel Position 7 ...................... 445

8 Boosted Voice Channel Position 8 ...................... 466

9 Boosted Voice Channel Position 9 ...................... 487

10 Boosted Voice Channel Position 10 ..................... 508

11 Boosted Voice Channel Position 11 ..................... 529

The EAC-2000 allows three lists of donor voice channels to be

entered, one for each possible SAT frequency. The lists are used to

identify mobiles that may drive into the booster coverage area with

a call already in progress (that is, already on a voice channel). The

EAC-2000 scans the donor voice channels on the lists, looking for

RSSI above a preset hand-in threshold.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-15

(Continued)

Identify the donor voice channels with the following guidelines in

mind:

• All voice channels of the primary donor cell will be entered in

the donor voice channel list with the SAT of the primary donor

cell.

• The voice channels of neighboring cells will not be entered into

the donor voice channel lists with the SATs of the neighboring

cells unless the EAC-2000 donor antenna system has been

configured for multi-donor operation.

• For a donor cell site to be included in the donor voice channel

list, the signal level at the booster from that donor cell site must

be the same as the primary donor. If the antenna installation is

such that this criterion is not met for one of the neighboring cell

sites, that cell's voice channels should not be entered in the list.

You must select channels for the boosted voice channels. Note that

the number of boosted voice channels is almost always smaller than

the number of channels on the donor voice channel lists. For

example, the primary donor cell may have 15 voice channels, and the

EAC-2000 may have 9 voice channels.

Select an unused channel for each channel of equipment that is

installed in the EAC-2000, according to the following guidelines:

• Select the boosted voice channels in the same manner as for a

cell site.

• Consider channel reuse in the system when assigning the

boosted control and voice channels.

• Be sure the channels are spaced at least 600 kHz apart to allow

the combiner to operate properly.

• Be sure there is at least a 90 kHz separation between any

boosted and any donor channel.

Page 2-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

The following table illustrates proper channel separation:

1, 22, 43...

4, 25, 47...

2, 23...

3, 24...

If there is only one donor cell and it uses voice channels 1, 22, 43...,

then the closest spaced channel set that could be used for boosted

voice channels would be 4, 25, 47.... The channel sets 2, 23... and

3, 24... could not be chosen because they are too close.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-17

6HFWLRQ ,QVWDOOLQJWKH+DUGZDUH

3.1 Introduction

This section provides instructions for—

• Mechanical installation

• Connecting ac power

• Installing the antennas

• Connecting external alarms/controls (optional)

The checklist in Figure 3-1 presents a brief overview of these installation

procedures. For more detailed descriptions of the procedures, refer to Sections

3.2–3.5.

Figures 3-2 and 3-3 show front and back views of the EAC-2000 with the doors

removed.

Figure 3-1. Hardware Installation Checklist

1. EAC-2000 uncrated and contents checked. (Sec. 3.2.1)

2. Holes drilled in pad (if using expandable anchors). (Sec 3.2.2)

3. EAC-2000 positioned, using lifting equipment, and bolted in place. (Sec.

3.2.2)

4. With ac service breaker and all EAC-2000 switches and breakers off, ac

electrical connections made. (Sec. 3.3)

• Green to ground

• White to neutral

• Black to 240 Vac (one side of ac service)

• Red to 240 Vac (other side of ac service)

5. Antennas connected; signal level and isolation measured/adjusted. (Sec. 3.4)

6. External alarms/controls connected, if required. (Sec. 3.5)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-1

Figure 3-2. EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed)

Page 3-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Figure 3-3. EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-3

3.2 Mechanical Installation

The container includes these items:

• The EAC-2000 unit

• EAC-2000 manual (Volumes 1, 2, and 3), power supply manual,

mobile manual, and modem manual

Remove the shipping material from around the cabinet. Check the

contents and take care that no hardware or manuals are misplaced.

The mounting rails on the bottom of the cabinet provide clearance

space under the cabinet to allow moisture to evaporate. Four 5/8 in.

(16 mm) diameter holes are provided in the rails for bolting the

cabinet to the pad. The preferred mounting method is to drill holes

in the pad and use expandable anchors. Alternatively, bolts can be

cast into the concrete. Mount the cabinet to the pad as follows:

1. If using expandable anchors, determine the bolt locations (see

Figure 3-4) and drill holes in the pad.

Figure 3-4. Outdoor Cabinet Footprint

Page 3-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

2. Place the cabinet on the pad where it will be installed.

The EAC-2000 weighs almost

900 pounds (408 kg)! Use lifting equipment

to position the unit. Lifting rings on the

cabinet are provided for this purpose.

3. Bolt the cabinet to the pad.

Later, after all installation steps have been completed (including

electrical connections and initial system operation), secure the doors

as follows:

1. Close the cabinet door.

2. Secure the door with a lock to prevent unauthorized access.

3.3 Connecting the EAC-2000 to ac Power

To connect the EAC-2000 to the ac mains, make the following connections:

• Green wire to ground

• White wire to neutral

• Red and black wires to 240 Vac service

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-5

3.4 Installing the Antennas

Antennas should already have been mounted, as described in Section 2.4.2, in

locations that meet the following requirements:

• Minimum signal level from any donor cell: -75 dBm or greater at the D1

antenna connector. (See Section 2.4.2 for multi-hop and multi-donor unit

variations.)

• Physical separation: M1 and M2 antennas separated at least 10 feet (3 m)

horizontally or 3 feet (1 m) vertically (if diversity receive is desired).

• Isolation between D1 and M1, and between D1 and M2:

- > 75 dB

• Modem antenna: Placed so as to minimize interference with the M1, M2,

and D1 antennas (minimum 60 dB isolation required). The minimum

signal level required for proper operation is -105 dBm.

Antenna installation involves connecting the antennas to the EAC-2000,

measuring isolation and signal level, and making needed adjustments.

Connect the antennas to the EAC-2000. All antenna connectors (type

N) are located on the top rear of the cabinet, arranged as shown in

Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5. Antenna Connectors

Page 3-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Controls (Optional)

The EAC-2000 includes the following inputs and outputs, which may be used

to monitor or control non-EAC-2000 equipment:

• 4 digital inputs per PA cage

• 4 open collector digital outputs per PA cage

• 4 analog inputs per PA cage

• 1 +5 Vdc/100 mA source for powering external circuitry per PA cage

These inputs and outputs are located on the back of the PA cages on DB-25

female connectors. The pin designations are shown in Figure 3-6. The signals

on the pins are controlled and monitored via the local or remote link. Electrical

specifications for the pins are shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-6. External Alarm/Control Connector Pin Out

Pin Function Pin Function

1+5 Vdc/100 mA 14 Ground

2Ext. Digital Output 4 15 Ground

3Ext. Digital Output 3 16 Ground

4Ext. Digital Output 2 17 Ground

5Ext. Digital Output 1 18 Ground

6Ext. Digital Input 4 19 Ground

7Ext. Digital Input 3 20 Ground

8Ext. Digital Input 2 21 Ground

9Ext. Digital Input 1 22 Ground

10 Ext. Analog Input 4 23 Ground

11 Ext. Analog Input 3 24 Ground

12 Ext. Analog Input 2 25 Ground

13 Ext. Analog Input 1

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-7

3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Control (Optional) (Continued)

Figure 3-7. Electrical Specifications for Inputs and Outputs

Pins Specifications

Digital Inputs (pins 6,7, 8, 9):

Load: > 100 kΩ

Low: < 2 Vdc

High: > 4 Vdc max. +28 Vdc

Open Collector Outputs (pins 2, 3, 4, 5): Max. +15 Vdc, 20 mA

Impedance 733 Ω

Analog input (pins 10, 11, 12, 13):

Load: 1 MΩ

Range: 0–5 Vdc, 20 mV resolution

+5 Vdc source (pin 1): +5 Vdc ±5%, 100 mA max.

The system designer should have identified any external alarms and controls to

be connected. Make external alarm/control connections as follows:

1. Identify the input/output connection to be used for each external

alarm/control that is to be installed. Figure 3-8 shows a typical wiring

diagram for external alarm input.

2. Make connections using a compatible male connector (not supplied).

Page 3-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Control (Optional) (Continued)

Figure 3-8. Typical Wiring for External Alarm Input

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-9

6HFWLRQ 6HWWLQJ8SIRU,QLWLDO2SHUDWLRQ

4.1 Introduction

Most of the EAC-2000 operating parameters are under software control and can

be changed from either a local terminal or a remote terminal. You will probably

have to change some of these parameters to get the system running. After

programming channels, you will also need to tune the transmitter combiner and

adjust power levels.

This section describes procedures for—

• Powering up and powering down the EAC-2000

• Connecting the local terminal

• Becoming familiar with system commands

• Programming initial parameters

• Tuning the transmitter combiner and setting output power

The checklist in Figure 4-1 presents a brief overview of these procedures. For

more detailed descriptions of the procedures, refer to Sections 4.2–4.7. For

detailed descriptions of all parameters, refer to Volume 2, Operating Procedures.

Additional instructions for special EAC-2000 configurations and options are

provided in Sections 7 through 10. If you have problems during setup, refer to

Appendix A, Troubleshooting Guide.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-1

Figure 4-1. Setup Checklist

1. Local terminal connected: (Sec. 4.2 and 4.4)

a. Terminal powered up and set to 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits,

1 stop bit, full duplex, all capitals, send carriage return only, auto

XON/XOFF and soft scroll disabled.

b. EAC-2000 powered up and password entered.

2. System status (SSS) and alarm (ALA) report checked; no disabled and no

alarms shown. (Sec. 4.6.1)

3. Site ID entered. (Sec. 4.6.2)

4. RF Channels programmed:

a. Donor control channel programmed. (Sec. 4.6.3)

b. Boosted control channel programmed. (Sec. 4.6.4)

c. Donor voice channels entered in voice channel lists. (Sec. 4.6.5)

d. Boosted voice channels programmed. (Sec. 4.6.6)

5. Alarms and thresholds set (if desired). (Sec. 4.6.7)

6. Modem mobile MIN, mobile power step, and passwords programmed. (Sec.

4.6.8)

7. Transmitter combiner tuned and output power set:

a. PAs 1–5 and 7-11 (if installed) adjusted. (Sec. 4.7.1)

b. PA 6 adjusted. (Sec. 4.7.2)

c. Reverse path power level adjusted. (Sec. 4.7.3)

8. Clock set. (Sec. 4.7.4)

9. Call history, call statistics, and alarm report reset to 0: (Sec. 4.7.4)

a. DCH = 0 <CR>

b. DCS = 0 <CR>

c. ALA = 0 <CR>

Page 4-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

4.2 Powering Up the EAC-2000

Figure 4-2 lists the locations and functions of the EAC-2000 breakers. Figure

4-3 shows their locations.

Figure 4-2. EAC-2000 Breakers

Breaker Cabinet Location Controls

Main ac junction box ac service to entire cabinet

(lower left rear)

ac Breaker #1 28 Vdc power supply ac to power supply #1

(lower front)

ac Breaker #2 28 Vdc power supply ac to power supply #2

(lower front)

NOTE: Some configurations contain only one 28 Vdc power

supply.

PA dc Breakers Back of PA cage dc power to each PA

(one per PA)

Begin with all breakers off. To power up the system, switch on the breakers in

the following order:

1. Main ac breaker

2. ac breaker(s) (if both power supplies are installed, switch both on

simultaneously)

The PA dc breakers are provided to prevent wiring harness

damage in the event of catastrophic PA failure. These breakers cannot be

turned off manually. Refer to Appendix A, Section A.15.4, before

resetting a tripped PA dc breaker.

4.3 Powering Down the EAC-2000

To power down, switch off the breakers in the reverse order, as follows:

1. ac breakers

2. Main ac breaker (optional)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-3

Figure 4-3. Breaker Locations

Page 4-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

4.4 Connecting a Local Terminal

The EAC-2000 communicates with a conventional ASCII, RS232 terminal.

Connect the terminal as follows.

1. Using the cable provided in the tuck pack, connect the terminal to the 25-

pin D-sub connector located on the front of the controller module.

Figure 4-4. Location of Local Terminal Connector

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-5

4.4 Connecting a Local Terminal (Continued)

2. Power up the terminal and set it to the following parameters:

• 9600 baud

• Even parity

• 7 data bits, 1 stop bit

• Full duplex (no local echo)

If possible, also set the terminal to—

• All capitals

• Send carriage return only (no line feed)

• Disable AUTO XON/XOFF and soft scroll

If you are using a terminal emulation program, select TTY or VT100. Be

aware that some terminal emulation programs generate extraneous

characters that may interfere with communicating with the EAC-2000.

3. Power up the EAC-2000. (After about 2 seconds, the terminal should

respond CONSOLE LOCKED.)

4. Enter (carriage return or enter, depending on the keyboard). (The

terminal should respond with a welcome message and prompt you for a

password.)

• If something comes up but is illegible, check the terminal setup.

• If nothing comes up, power down. Recheck the power hookup, the

terminal hookup, and the terminal setup.

5. Enter the password, followed by . The default password is 1234.

(The terminal should respond with more salutation and the > prompt.)

The system is ready for you to set parameters.

Page 4-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

4.5 Becoming Familiar with System Commands

If you are new to EAC-2000 installation, you should use this section to gain

familiarity with basic rules for entering commands, as well as key commands

that will be used in setting up the system. If you are already familiar with the

system, turn to Section 4.6.

Figure 4-5 lists definitions of symbols and abbreviations that are used

in this section of the manual.

Figure 4-5. Command Definitions

Symbol/

Abbreviation Definition

>Command entry level. The system uses this prompt character

to indicate it is ready to accept commands.

<CR> Carriage return or enter.

<CTRL> Control. The control key is used in combination with other keys.

For example, <CTRL> Z means to hold down the control key

while pressing the Z key.

ESC Escape. Escape is a single key marked ESC on most keyboards.

The system responds to commands that consist of three

letters followed by up to three data fields, as follows:

In this syntax—

• COM is the particular three-letter command.

• FIELD 1 consists of up to four hex characters followed by a

hyphen (-).

• FIELD 2 consists of up to four hex characters followed by an

equals (=) sign.

• FIELD 3 consists of up to four hex characters.

• Each command ends with a carriage return (<CR>).

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-7

(Continued)

Very few commands entry of the

data fields. After the initial command has been entered, the system

usually prompts for data it needs. If a command does not depend on

a certain field, any data entered in that field will be ignored.

When entering commands—

• Spaces may be added to separate the fields, after the first three

letters have been entered.

• Leading zeros may be omitted.

• Use DELETE or BACKSPACE to correct mistakes.

• End the command with .

Figure 4-6 lists the commands you

are most likely to use. The most complex command is SET. This

command is structured to enable you to enter parameters easily and

accurately. The other commands, which are much simpler, require

little or no subsequent data input. Their action is complete in a

matter of seconds.

In an operational

system, SET may drop calls if certain parameters are changed.

RES will drop all calls currently being boosted. Otherwise, the

system commands do not interfere with call processing.

Some commands enter a

mode in which the program does something continuously. (These

commands are indicated by a dagger (†) in Figure 4-6.) To get out

of this mode and return to the command entry level, hit <ESC> or

type .

Entering or from the command

entry level (>) will cause the characters entered on the line to

be erased.

Page 4-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Figure 4-6. System Commands

HELp Gives a list of the primary commands.

SETup Invokes a menu-driven entry mode used to inspect or

change all EAC-2000 operating parameters. (To exit this

command, type and answer .)

Show System Gives a one-page listing of current EAC-2000 parameter

Status settings and conditions of monitored input parameters.

†Show Call Shows current status of each board. Updates listing if

Status status changes (e.g., if a call is set up or taken down) and

gives reason for change.

†Show Scanned Shows average RSSIs of channels being scanned.

RSSI

†RSSI Report Gives a continuously updated reading of RSSIs on all RF

boards.

ALArm Report Gives a report of the number of times various alarm

conditions have occurred since last system reset.

Display Call Displays various call statistics per board (totals since

Statistics last DCS=0 command).

Display Call Displays hourly totals of certain call statistics for

the

History last running week.

TIMe Displays/changes current clock time and date.

RESet Resets EAC-2000. Parameters in effect when command is

issued will be preserved.

LOCk Forces password entry before accepting subsequent

commands.

†PoWeR Repeatedly lists power readings on all installed PAs.

display

†SAT report Repeatedly lists the SAT readings on the boards.

REVision Displays hardware revisions in the EAC-2000.

†Mobile ID Lists the last five access attempts by mobiles.

Number

† To exit this command, hit ESC or type .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-9

(Continued)

A session can be ended in three ways:

• This command should be used if the session

involves only system monitoring or minor parameter changes.

It ensures security, but lets alarms and call statistics continue to

accumulate.

• This command should be used if extensive

parameter changes have been made during a session. This

method—

- Ensures that all parameter changes take effect, since all

hardware is initialized after a reset.

- Ensures security because the password must be reentered

to get back to the command level.

- Initializes all alarm condition counters to 0.

• An inactivity timer is included in the

program with a default inactivity timeout setting of 5 minutes.

If a keyboard entry is not detected within the designated period,

the system terminates any currently running command (e.g.,

SET) and simulates the action of LOC. This avoids leaving the

EAC-2000 in an insecure state if the remote link is lost before

the session is properly ended.

If a remote terminal is linked by modem to the

EAC-2000, LOC, RES or timeout will terminate the link.

Page 4-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Configuring the EAC-2000 to fill in a coverage area in a specific

cellular system is easy, using either the local terminal or a remote

terminal. From the command entry level (>), the SET command

invokes the setup utility which displays a progression of menus. The

menus provide a guided path to each EAC-2000 parameter. Figure

4-7 illustrates the paths to follow through the SET menus to reach

each available parameter. For descriptions of all SET menus and

commands, see Volume 2, Operating Procedures.

Each command brings up a menu of items from

which to choose, with a character in front of each item. To select an

item, type the character and . The next menu (or the

parameter to be changed) will be displayed.

To move backward along a path, type

, or just . (Both entries correspond to the "Done

with this menu" selection.) The previous menu will be displayed.

Continue in this manner until you have the SET Main Menu.

To exit SET, type at any menu level. Or,

type while at the Main Menu level.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-11

Figure 4-7. SET Command Menu Map

Page 4-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

4.6 Setting Initial Parameters

Before you can operate the EAC-2000, you must check system status and

program the following:

• Site identification

• Donor control channel

• Boosted control channel

• Directed retry channels

• Donor voice channels

• Boosted voice channels

You should already have the list of selected channels, as described in

Section 2.4. You may also program alarms and thresholds, modem mobile MIN,

mobile power step, and passwords at this time.

If the EAC-2000 is to be used in a , additional

parameters must also be set. See Section 7 for procedures.

Check the system status, as follows, to be sure parameters were

returned to default status after factory testing.

1. At the > prompt, type . (A report will be

displayed giving the current state of various parameters for

each RF board.)

2. At the > prompt, type . (A report will be

displayed giving the number of times various alarm conditions

have occurred since the last system reset.)

No alarms should be listed. If there are any OUT OF SERVICE

or memory alarms, refer to Appendix A, Troubleshooting

Guide.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-13

1. At the > prompt, type to display the SET Main Menu.

A RF Boards

B Power Amplifiers

D Alarms

E Set Defaults

2. Type to display the System Parameters Menu.

B Control Channels . . Donor Boosted State

C Voice Channels.... Donor Donor SAT Boosted

D Modem Control.... Passwords Console Time-out Auto-Dial Control

Dial-up Phone Modem Mobile

E Thresholds ....... Hand-In Hand-Back Multi-Donor

Mobile Power RSSI Averaging Hand-In Delay

F Disconnect Control . Donor RSSI SAT Fade Time-out

Hand-Back Delay Hand-Back Attempts

G Call Processing .... RSSI > Thresh Hand-Back / Grab-Back

3. Type to display the Site ID Menu (shown below with

default values).

B Multi-Hop Feature ......................DISABLED

4. Type to access the Site Identification parameter.

5. Enter a name (up to 20 characters) that uniquely identifies the site.

6. Type to back out of the Site ID Menu.

Page 4-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to display

the Control Channels Menu.

B Boosted Control Channel ................................ 340

C RF Board To Use For Control Channel ........................ 1

D Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy" . . DIRECTED RETRY

E Directed Retry Channels ................................ LIST

F Back-up Control Channel Option ..................... DISABLED

G Revertive Control Channel Option .................... DISABLED

H Substitute Control Channel ......................... DISABLED

I Booster Link Channel................................... 550

J Booster Link Channel - Previous EAC ....................... 571

This menu represents all selections available on the

Control Channels Menu. Not all selections appear at all times.

Following are selections that are only available when used in

conjunction with other parameters:

• Appears only if selection

(Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy") is

set to Directed Retry.

• Appears only if the

Back-up Control Channel Option (selection ) or the

Revertive Control Channel Option (selection ) is set to

enabled. When selection is disabled and selection is

enabled, board 1 will be used for the last call, but no

control channel will come up when board 1 is boosting a

call.

• Appears only if the Multi-

Donor Activation Threshold (selection on Thresholds

and Power Control Menu) is enabled.

• Appears

only if the Multi-hop Feature is enabled and set to mode

3 or 4.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-15

(Continued)

4. Type to access the Donor Control Channel parameter.

5. Enter the channel number (see Section 2.4), then .

6. To return to the Control Channels Menu, type .

1. From the Control Channels Menu, type to access the

Boosted Control Channel parameter. This parameter establishes

the boosted control channel, to which combiner port 1 is tuned.

2. Enter the channel number (see Section 2.4), then .

1. From the Control Channels Menu, type to access the

Directed Retry Channels parameter.

2. Enter the control channel numbers of all nearby cells, including

the donor. The mobile will be directed to attempt calls on these

channels when the EAC-2000 is busy.

3. To return to the System Parameters Menu, type

twice.

Page 4-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to display

the Voice Channels Menu.

M Donor Voice Channels (Multiple SAT) ..............List

2 Boosted Voice Channel Position 2 .................361

3 Boosted Voice Channel Position 3 .................382

4 Boosted Voice Channel Position 4 .................403

5 Boosted Voice Channel Position 5 .................424

7 Boosted Voice Channel Position 7 .................445

8 Boosted Voice Channel Position 8 .................466

9 Boosted Voice Channel Position 9 .................487

10 Boosted Voice Channel Position 10 ................508

11 Boosted Voice Channel Position 11 ................529

2. Notice the SATs for the first three donor voice channel lists.

Determine which list(s) to use for the donor voice channels you

identified earlier (see Section 2.4).

, Donor Voice Channels (Multiple SAT), is for use in

some configurations. Enter channels into this

list if the EAC-2000 is part of a Multi-hop

configuration (as described in Section 10).

3. Type , , or , followed by , to access the Donor

Voice Channels Menu for the corresponding SAT.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-17

(Continued)

4. Enter channels in the list, as described below. A given channel

may be entered in only one list. The system will support a

maximum of 105 total channels in all four lists (A, B, C, and

M).

a. , type [channel number] .

b. , after the enter multiple

channel numbers separated by commas or spaces. If you

enter a plus (+) sign before a single channel entry, 15

channels will be added, spaced 21 channels apart, starting

with the channel entered. You can then delete extra

channels as necessary.

c. , type [channel

number] .

d. , after the enter multiple

channel numbers separated by commas or spaces. To

remove the entire list, type .

5. To return to the Voice Channels Menu, type .

Page 4-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The Voice Channels menu gives you access to boosted voice

channels 2–11, to which combiner ports 2–11, respectively, are tuned.

Boosted channel 1 is normally used to boost the control channel and

does not need to be set. Program channels 2–11 (excluding 6), as

follows.

1. Type the combiner port number ( to ), followed by

to access the desired corresponding Boosted Voice Channel

parameter.

2. Enter the channel number, followed by .

3. To return to the Voice Channels Menu, type .

4. Repeat steps 1–3 for each boosted voice channel.

1. From the SET Main Menu, type to display the

Alarms Menu (shown below with default values).

A M1 Antenna return loss - Low Alarm Point .........6 dB

B M2 Antenna return loss - Low Alarm Point .........9 dB

C PA Temp - High Alarm Point ............... 90 Deg C

D PA Temp - Fan Activation Point ............. 60 Deg C

E PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point .......... 90 Deg C

F Mobile Power Control causes PA Power Cutback DISABLED

G +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point ..... 23.0 Volts

H +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 23.0 Volts

I +12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 10.0 Volts

J +6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ............5.4 Volts

K External Analog Inputs .................. Alarm Points

L External Digital Inputs .................. Alarm States

M External Digital Outputs ...................... States

N Critical Alarms ................ALARMS REPORTED

O RSSI - Alarms .................... ALARM POINTS

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-19

(Continued)

2. Type to set the fan activation point (the internal

temperature that causes the cabinet heat exchanger to be turned

on).

The 60oC default setting is adequate for most installations.

Lower the threshold to 50oC if the control channel transmitter

output is increased to its maximum (45W) output level.

3. Type to access the +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm

Point parameter.

Loss of ac power will cause the EAC-2000 to run on power

from the battery plant (if installed). The battery voltage will

drop to the low alarm point after a period of time, causing an

alarm.

The default value (23.0 V) will be adequate for most

installations. If an external battery plant is used, the low alarm

point may be adjusted upward (e.g., to 25–26 V) if desired to

provide an immediate alarm in the event of the loss of ac

power.

Page 4-20 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

4. If external analog inputs are connected to the EAC-2000

external alarm/controls ports, type to access the

External Analog Inputs menu.

PA 1–6 Cage:

1 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

2 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

3 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

4 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

PA 7–11 Cage:

5 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

6 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

7 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

8 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts

Choose the number of the input(s) connected and program the

alarm point. You may specify DISABLED or

ABOVE/BELOW a threshold, which may be between 0 and 5

Volts.

If PA 7–11 Cage is not included in the unit, then

the hardware for those inputs is not installed and the

alarms should be left as DISABLED.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-21

(Continued)

5. If external digital inputs are connected to the EAC-2000

external alarm/controls ports, type to access the

External Digital Inputs menu.

PA 1–6 Cage:

1 Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

2 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

3 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

4 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

PA 7–11 Cage:

5 Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

6 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

7 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

8 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low

Choose the number of the input(s) connected and program the

alarm state. You may specify DISABLED, HIGH or LOW.

6. If external digital outputs are connected to the EAC-2000

external alarm/controls ports, type to access the

External Digital Outputs menu.

PA 1–6 Cage:

1 Ext. Digital Output 1 State .................... LOW

2 Ext. Digital Output 2 State .................... LOW

3 Ext. Digital Output 3 State .................... LOW

4 Ext. Digital Output 4 State .................... LOW

PA 7–11 Cage:

5 Ext. Digital Output 1 State .................... LOW

6 Ext. Digital Output 2 State .................... LOW

7 Ext. Digital Output 3 State .................... LOW

8 Ext. Digital Output 4 State .................... LOW

Page 4-22 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

Choose the number of the output(s) connected and program the

desired state. You may specify:

•Low

• Low if critical alarm exists

•High

• High if critical alarm exists

The "low/high if critical alarm exists" options are provided to

allow for connection to external alarm signaling equipment.

7. Type to review the Critical Alarms Menu, shown

here with default values.

A Board Out-of-Service Alarm ............... CRITICAL

B Board ROM Alarm...................... CRITICAL

C Board Calibration Memory Alarm ........... CRITICAL

D Serial Data Link Alarm................... CRITICAL

E Personality Mismatch Alarm ............... CRITICAL

F Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm ............... CRITICAL

G RVS PA Pwr Low Alarm ................. CRITICAL

H RSSI Alarm.......................... LOG ONLY

I PA Out-of-Service Alarm ................. CRITICAL

J PA Temp - High Alarm ................. LOG ONLY

K PA Power - Low Alarm .................. CRITICAL

L PA to Antenna Loss High Alarm ............ CRITICAL

M Antenna Ret Loss Alarm.................. CRITICAL

N ROM Alarm .......................... CRITICAL

O RAM Alarm .......................... CRITICAL

P NOVRAM Alarm ....................... CRITICAL

Q SAT Detector Alarm .................... CRITICAL

R Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm ......... CRITICAL

S External Analog Input Alarm .............. LOG ONLY

T External Digital Input - Alarms ............ LOG ONLY

Z Display More Critical Alarms

This illustration represents the complete Critical

Alarms Menu. In actual application, only half of the

Critical Alarms Menu can be viewed at a time due to

minimal screen space. To access additional Critical

Alarms Menu selections, type .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-23

(Continued)

will cause the EAC-2000 to automatically dial

an alarm telephone number when the Auto-Dial feature is

enabled. will be counted and displayed in

the ALA screen, but will not cause the EAC-2000 to dial its

programmed alarm number.

The default values shown above will be adequate for most

installations.

• To change an alarm, type the letter of that alarm and

• To alternate between the two Critical Alarms Menu

displays, type .

8. Type at the Alarms Menu to review the RSSI

Alarms Menu.

A Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point . . . NONE

B Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point . . -80 dBm

C Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point .... NONE

is the

most critical of these alarm thresholds. This threshold should

be set lower (within a range of -85 to -95 dBm), to ensure

continued operation, under the following circumstances:

• If the booster is being operated at a minimum (-75 dBm)

donor signal level and some fading exists on the donor-to-

booster path.

, may be set at a level 10–15 dB higher than the

normal signal levels being received from the donor, if desired.

This will allow the EAC-2000 to log alarms in the event of IF

board failures with their RSSI measuring circuits.

Page 4-24 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The assigned mobile identification number (MIN) of the mobile and

the desired mobile power step should be loaded into the booster.

This allows the booster to trap calls to and from the remote link to

force operation on the donor voice channels. By doing so, the remote

link does not tie up one of the boosted voice channels. Passwords

may also be programmed now.

1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to display the

Modem Control Menu, shown here with default values.

A Master Password ............................1234

B Restricted Password ..........................5678

C Console Time-out..................... 30 (x 10 Sec)

D Auto-dial Enable ...................... DISARMED

E Dial-up Phone Number 1 ................12163498684

F Dial-up Phone Number 2 .................... NONE

G Auto-dial Trials Max .......................... 10

H Delay Between Auto-dial Retries ............6 (x 10 sec)

I Max Auto-dial Trial Period ................9 (x 10 sec)

J Modem Setup ...................... PARAMETERS

K Modem Mobile MIN ....................1234567890

L Modem Mobile Power Step....................... 7

2. Type to access the Modem Mobile MIN parameter.

3. Enter the 10-digit MIN, followed by .

4. Type to access the Modem Mobile Power Step.

5. Enter the desired power level step (7 = minimum, 0 =

maximum). Enter to record the desired power step.

WARNING!! Use the minimum power step

allowable to minimize the possibility of over-

loading the EAC-2000’s reverse input pre-

amplifier.

6. If desired, use menu entries A and B to enter the passwords.

(They may be left at the defaults for now if desired.)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-25

4.7 Tuning Transmitter Combiner and Setting Output Power

The transmitter combiner must be tuned, and output power levels set, whenever

boosted control and voice channels are entered or changed. This process

involves tuning the combiner cavities of PAs 1–5 and 7-11 (if installed) and

adjusting their power output levels, and adjusting the power output level for PA

1. With the system power , connect power measuring

equipment to the M1 antenna port (see Figure 3-5). Remove

the cover plates from the forward combiner(s) to reveal the

combiner tuning screws. Then turn the power back on. Output

power may be monitored using a through-line wattmeter (or a

wattmeter with a built-in load) to monitor output power.

2. From the SET Main Menu, type to display the Power

Amplifiers Menu.

A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ................... 0

B Forward PA Power Step - Control .................. 0

C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off ................. 0

D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+40 dBm

E Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control....+40 dBm

F Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off . . . +40 dBm

G Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...............+20 dBm

H Reverse PA Power Set - Control ..............+20 dBm

I Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+15 dBm

J Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control ....+15 dBm

K Key Forward PA ..... POWER ADJ/COMBINER TUNING

L Key Reverse PA ............POWER MEASUREMENT

3. Type to key a forward PA.

4. Type to key PA 1 and display the forward power

output as measured at the sensor.

Page 4-26 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

5. Refer to the illustration affixed to the inside of the front door of

the EAC-2000 cabinet to determine which combiner cavities

coordinate with which PAs. Loosen the lock nut and adjust

combiner cavity 1 using a screwdriver.

• If using a wattmeter, adjust for

as indicated by the wattmeter.

• Retighten the lock nut.

The power reading displayed on the terminal will not

vary as the combiner is tuned.

Figure 4-8. Combiner Cavity

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-27

(Continued)

6. Adjust the power output for PA 1 using a small screwdriver or

adjustment tool to turn the PA power potentiometer on the front

of the PA (Figure 4-9). Use a wattmeter, if available, to

measure the power output. Adjust to the level necessary to

meet the authorized ERP level from the antenna.

The control channel output power level is set at

the factory for 10 watts at the M1 antenna connector.

The power level displayed on the terminal is

4 dB higher than the power level at the antenna port

because of cable and combiner losses. The displayed

power ranges from +38 to +47 dBm (7–45 watts), which

corresponds to a range at the M1 antenna connector of

+34 to +43 dBm (3–20 watts). If the displayed power

level is used instead of a wattmeter, take these differences

into consideration.

Figure 4-9. Location of PA Power Potentiometer

Page 4-28 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

7. Note that the PA power potentiometer has a 7–10 dB turn down

range. If the power out cannot be adjusted low enough, hit

to return to the Power Amplifiers Menu.

Select , Forward PA Power Step - Control. This allows entry

of a setting between 0 and 3. Increasing the step by 1 causes

the maximum power out to be reduced by 4 dB (2→8 dB, 3→12

dB). Adjust this parameter in conjunction with the

potentiometer to achieve the desired output power.

8. Repeat steps 3 (selecting a new PA each time) through 7 to

adjust PAs 2-5 and 7-11 (if installed).

If low power out is desired, use selection , Forward PA Power

Step - Voice, for PAs 2–5 and 7–11.

9. When all PAs have been adjusted, make a second pass through

the PAs to check tuning and power levels, and make further

adjustments as needed. This step is needed because one of the

cavities might have been close to the point to which a second

cavity was being tuned. This would cause erroneous power

readings and adjustment during the initial pass.

PA 6 output power does not pass through the combiner. (For a

description of PA 6 function, see Section 2 of Volume 3, Technical

Information.) To adjust its power level—

1. Turn the power off, move the power measuring equipment to

the M2 antenna port, and turn the power back on.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-29

(Continued)

2. Key PA 6 and adjust the PA 6 power level as described above.

The power level should be equal to the power level of the voice

channel. Hit to unkey the PA.

If low power out of PA 6 is desired, use selection , Forward

PA Power Step - Hand-off, to reduce the maximum power out.

3. Remove the power measuring equipment. Type

to back out of the SET menu completely. Hit at the

question prompt (defaults NO).

The output power in the reverse direction (from booster to donor cell)

is +20 dBm per channel. It is set at a much lower level than in the

forward direction to prevent reuse interference with other cells that

may be in the system. If the minimum received signal requirements

are met for the forward direction, then by reciprocity +20 dBm per

channel in the reverse direction is sufficient.

Adjustment of the reverse power level is seldom

needed. However, in certain installations the output level may

need to be reduced.

For example, in an installation with a very good path between the

donor cell and the booster, the +20 dBm output level may be so high

that the signal received at the cell site is above the cell site’s dynamic

power control cutback threshold.

In this situation, mobiles handled through the EAC-2000 will be

powered back by the serving cell site. Because the EAC-2000

reverse path attempts to level its output power at +20 dBm no matter

what the received signal strength is, mobiles in this situation will

ultimately be powered back to the minimum (VMAC=7) power level,

and calls will drop.

Page 4-30 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

The +20 dBm output level can be reduced with the following

procedure:

1. From the SET Main Menu, type to display the Power

Amplifiers Menu.

2. Use selections I and J , the reverse PA power for voice and

control channels.

3. Enter the desired level from +5 to +20 dBm.

Another way to remedy this situation is to install pads in increments

of 10 dB between the donor antenna and the donor duplexer ANT

connector. This method has the added advantage of increasing

effective antenna isolation.

Note that the Power Amplifiers Menu also includes the low power

alarm points. The default values are appropriate for PAs set to the

factory power levels (+46.5 dBm forward, +20 dBm reverse).

If the power outs have been adjusted lower than this, reduce the

alarm points as well. Normally, the alarm point should be set 5 dB

lower than the power reported on the terminal while keyed.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-31

The EAC-2000 keeps various statistics of calls handled by the booster

and alarms that have been logged:

• Running totals of the number and duration of calls handled per

board can be displayed using the DCS command.

• Incremental totals of certain call statistics can be displayed

using the DCH command.

• Alarms logged since the last system reset can be displayed

using the ALA command.

The EAC-2000 clock is used in updating these statistics. To set the

clock and reset the report values to 0, complete the following steps:

1. At the > prompt, type to access the clock. Enter the

current date and time.

2. Type to reset the Display Call History parameter.

3. Type to reset the Display Call Statistics parameter.

4. Type to reset the Alarm Report parameter.

Page 4-32 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

6HFWLRQ ,QVWDOOLQJWKH5HPRWH/LQN

5.1 Introduction

The AMPS EAC-2000 come equipped with—

• Microcomm TravelPorte MNP-10 modem

• Motorola cellular radio

The modem is compatible with many international modem standards including:

• Bell 103 (300 BPS)

• Bell 212A (1200 BPS)

• CCITT V.21 (300 BPS)

• CCITT V.22 (1200 BPS)

• CCITT V.22 BIS (2400 BPS)

• CCITT V.32 (4800 and 9600 BPS)

• CCITT V.42 (error correction)

• CCITT V.42 BIS (data compression)

• MNP Class 5 (data compression)

The mobile in the EAC-2000 may be dialed using a remote terminal and

compatible modem. In most cases, the Microcomm modem in the EAC-2000

automatically negotiates with the originating modem to determine the highest

speed that the link (and modems) will support. Error correction and data

compression capabilities of the modems are also automatically negotiated, and

if both modems support common protocols, the session will utilize them.

Once the remote link is established, the interface with the system is exactly like

that on the local link, but at a different baud rate. If both links are up,

characters typed on either terminal are echoed to both, along with the resulting

EAC-2000 output. This makes it possible for an experienced operator to

exercise the system remotely while someone watches locally, or for the two to

exercise the system together.

Establishing the remote link involves—

• Setting up service to the mobile radio

• Programming the mobile radio

• Checking out the mobile radio

• Testing the remote link

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 5-1

5.1 Introduction (Continued)

The checklist in Figure 5-1 presents a brief overview of these procedures. For

more detailed descriptions of the procedures, refer to Sections 5.2–5.5.

Figure 5-1. Remote Link Installation Checklist

1. Service set up with local supplier. (Sec. 5.2)

2. Mobile radio programmed: (Sec. 5.3)

3. Mobile checked out for proper operation: (Sec. 5.4)

a. Powering up.

b. Call originating.

c. Answering.

4. Remote link tested:

a. EAC-2000 Answering tested. (Sec. 5.5.1)

b. EAC-2000 Originating tested. (Sec. 5.5.2)

5.2 Setting Up Service

1. Set up service to the mobile by contacting the local cellular service

supplier. Provide them with the mobile serial number.

2. Obtain from the service supplier the values for the parameters that will be

programmed into the mobile.

3. Be sure the MIN of the cellular mobile has been loaded into the booster

(see Section 4.6.9).

Page 5-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

5.3 Programming the Mobile Radio

The radio is programmed using the supplied handset, which plugs into the front

of the mobile shelf. To program the radio, consult the provided manual or

contact the Extend-A-Cell Hotline.

The sequence to cause the Motorola radio to enter the

programming mode is (total of 13 zeros).

Once programming and initial testing is complete, the handset should be

removed and stored in the cabinet.

5.4 Checking Out the Mobile

After the mobile has been set up and programmed, check it for proper operation

by completing the following steps.

1. With the handset connected, power up the EAC-2000. After a short while,

the "no sequence" indication should disappear.

• If the mobile does not come into service, check the antenna, the

antenna connection and the mobile programming.

2. Make sure the mobile can originate and answer calls in the conventional

fashion. The mobile with the handset can be used to communicate with a

partner while trying to optimize the booster performance.

3. Dial the mobile using another cellular phone. The mobile should ring a

few times, then answer, then send about several seconds of answer-back

tone (1800 Hz).

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 5-3

5.5 Testing the Remote Link

After the remote link has been installed and programmed, you should test its

operation. The EAC-2000 should be able to answer calls placed from the

remote link. It should also be able (if so programmed) to place calls to a

predetermined number when certain alarm conditions exist.

The EAC-2000 constantly monitors and answers incoming calls even

if it is being exercised via the local link. To test the booster’s ability

to answer calls from the remote link, complete the following steps.

1. Ensure that the remote link has been installed as required:

• Conventional ASCII terminal

• Modem: Microcomm TravelPorte MNP-10 compatible

modem

• Terminal and modem set to—

- Appropriate baud rate for the modem

- 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

- Full duplex (no local echo)

2. Dial the phone number of the mobile in the EAC-2000. (After

about one ring, the EAC-2000 will answer and try to set up

communication.)

• If the modems fail to connect, the modems will terminate

the call after a set period of time.

• If the modems are successful in establishing a link, the

remote modem will indicate CONNECT.

3. Type . (The familiar EAC-2000 response should

appear.)

If there are illegible characters, check the modem/terminal

parameter setup.

Page 5-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The EAC-2000 constantly monitors and logs several alarm conditions.

These conditions can be viewed using the ALA command. They are

described in Volume 2, Operating Procedures.

Each type of alarm can be defined as "critical" or "log only" using

the SET command. If an alarm defined as critical occurs more than

a predetermined number of times, a is said to exist.

The system indicates any critical alarms at the beginning of each

communication session.

The system can also be set up to call a predetermined number if a

critical alarm exists. (The default setup is to place a call when

a critical alarm exists.) If the system has been programmed to

automatically report alarms, it will attempt to do so only if all of the

following conditions exist:

• A critical alarm exists.

• The console is locked.

• The mobile is connected and in service.

• The system has not successfully reported an alarm since the

"Auto-Dial Enable" parameter was set to ARMED.

• The system has not unsuccessfully tried to report an alarm more

than the designated number of times (the Auto-Dial Trials Max

parameter) since the Auto-Dial Enable parameter was set to

ARMED.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 5-5

(Continued)

When an auto-dial call is made, the

following sequence occurs:

1. As the call is auto-dialed, the local console displays DIALING

REMOTE LINK. ( from the local link at this point will

abort the attempt.)

2. After the number is dialed, the EAC-2000 waits up to 90

seconds for a remote modem to answer and establish a

connection.

3. Five seconds after connect, the EAC-2000 automatically lists the

alarm report (see ALA Command in Volume 2, Operating

Procedures). The report is echoed locally.

4. If the connection stays up for the duration of the report listing,

the attempt is considered successful. The EAC-2000 disarms

itself after a successful call to prevent duplicate reports.

5. After the report, the system waits up to 60 seconds for a <CR>.

If a <CR> is received, a normal interactive session begins.

Otherwise, the EAC-2000 ends the call.

6. If a second dial-up phone number is programmed, the sequence

will be repeated using the second number.

The system will abort the call and

consider the attempt a failure if either of the following occurs:

• The modems do not connect within a set period of time (the

programmed "Max Auto-Dial Trial Period" parameter, default

90 seconds).

• The modems connect but lose the connection before the entire

report is listed.

After a failed attempt, the system will display the message

ORIGINATION ATTEMPT FAILED on the local console. It will then

wait a specified period of time (the programmed "Delay Between

Auto-Dial Retries" parameter). If all the conditions for making the

call are still in effect, another attempt will be made.

One way to test the call origination feature is to artificially create an

alarm by setting the +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point to +35

Volts.

Page 5-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

6HFWLRQ 2SWLPL]LQJ3HUIRUPDQFH

6.1 Introduction

After the EAC-2000 has been installed, the system must be checked out to

determine if adjustments to the hand-in ndk threholds eded to ensure optimum

performance.

6.2 Determining Hand-in and Hand-back Thresholds

To determine hand-in and hand-back thresholds, conduct coverage tests using

equipment whose power and antenna configuration match the predominate

customer equipment in the coverage area. Conduct the tests as follows:

1. Select the default hand-in and hand-back thresholds as a starting point for

initial system testing. These thresholds will serve adequately for many

installations.

2. Test these thresholds throughout the coverage area from an automobile

with an outside cellular antenna. For best results, use a cellular mobile

capable of displaying received signal levels and the channel on which it is

operating. Make signal level measurements by monitoring the boosted

control channel. Make calls to a test number to determine whether the call

is set up via the booster or whether the mobile is being handed in or out

of the boosted area.

Make sure the hand-back threshold is at least 5 dB below the hand-in

threshold. Setting the thresholds too low or too high can result in the

following types of problems:

• Unnecessary boosting of mobiles that

otherwise will have good service from the donor.

• Missing some mobiles that need

boosting.

• Excessive noise on the call before

it is handed back to the original voice channel.

• Too many hand-back attempts by

the EAC-2000.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 6-1

6.3 Setting Hand-in and Hand-back Thresholds

To change threshold settings, complete the following steps:

1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to access the

Thresholds and Power Control Menu.

Thresholds and Power Control Menu Default Values

A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ................. -60 dBm

B Hand-in Threshold .................................. -90 dBm

C Multi-Donor Activation Threshold .....................DISABLED

D Hand-back Threshold ............................... -100 dBm

E Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................ 0

F Hand-back Mobile Power Step .............................. 0

G RSSI Averaging Speed .............................. MEDIUM

H Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ......................... 5 Sec

I Station Power Class Selective Boosting . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSES

2. Type to access the Hand-in Threshold parameter. This

parameter sets the signal level threshold at which a mobile on one of the

donor voice channels becomes a candidate for boosting.

3. Enter the new threshold. The hand-in threshold has an allowable range of

-100 dBm to -40 dBm. Entering 0 disables the threshold.

4. Type to return to the Thresholds and Power Control Menu.

5. Type to access the Hand-back Threshold parameter. This

parameter sets the signal level threshold at which a mobile being boosted

becomes a candidate for returning to the original donor site voice channel.

6. Enter the new threshold. The hand-back threshold has an allowable range

of -120 dBm to -20 dBm. Entering 0 disables the threshold.

The default values shown for the other parameters (menu entries A, E, F,

G, H and I) are adequate for most installations. Refer to Volume 2,

Operating Procedures, for explanations of these parameters if adjustment

is necessary. Refer to Volume 1, Section 8, for setting the Multi-Donor

Activation Threshold (menu entry C).

Page 6-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

6HFWLRQ 0XOWL+RS 2SHUDWLRQ

7.1 Introduction

Two or more EAC-2000 units may be set up to operate together in a line—for

example, along a major corridor leading into a metropolitan area. This is

referred to as . EAC-2000s and Extend-A-Cell IVs may

also be mixed in a Multi-hop configuration. An example of a Multi-hop

configuration is shown below.

Donor

Cell ⇔Booster

#1 ⇔Booster

#2 ⇔Booster

7.2 How Multi-Hop Operation Works

The boosters are set up so that there is a two-way RF path between the donor

and booster #1 and between each pair of adjacent boosters. This arrangement

can be used to handle situations in which a mobile—

• Places or answers a call while in the coverage area of any of the boosters.

• Drives across the coverage boundary:

- Donor-to-booster

- Booster-to-booster (away from donor)

- Booster-to-booster (toward donor)

- Booster-to-donor

When a mobile places or answers a

call, the first exchange of information occurs on the reverse control channel

(from mobile to donor). If the call is a mobile-answered call, the exchange is

a page response. If it is a mobile-originated call, the mobile does an access.

There is little difference in the way EAC-2000 boosters handle these two. Since

the mobiles self-locate, the control channel chosen for the access determines in

which booster's coverage area (if any) the mobile is located.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-1

7.2 How Multi-Hop Operation Works (Continued)

All boosters between the terminating

booster and the donor cell repeat the access or page response and decode it.

From the decoding they extract the mobile identification number (MIN). Next,

the cellular system assigns a voice channel to that particular mobile by sending,

over the forward control channel, an initial voice channel designation (IVCD)

message consisting of the mobile’s MIN and a voice channel that will be used

by the donor for the call.

The Multi-hop boosters are all monitoring the forward control channel data

stream. The boosters that decode the access or page response on the reverse

control channel also decode the corresponding IVCD message on the forward

channel and change the channel to one of its boosted channels.

Booster #1 substitutes its chosen boosted channel for the donor voice channel

in the IVCD message and sets up a boost path between the donor-assigned voice

channel and the boosted voice channel of booster #1. Likewise, booster #2

changes the channel number in the IVCD message and sets up a boost path

between the boosted voice channels of boosters #1 and #2.

All of the boosters between the terminating EAC-2000, where the call is placed,

and the donor cell will in this fashion identify that particular mobile as a

candidate for repeating and will decode the associated IVCD messages.

7.3 Installing the EAC-2000 in Multi-Hop Configuration

When installing the EAC-2000 in Multi-hop configuration, you should give

special attention to—

• Achieving antenna isolation and signal level

• Enabling the Multi-hop feature

• Entering the EAC position

• Selecting boosted channels for each unit

• Assigning a booster link channel

• Setting hand-back and hand-in thresholds

Page 7-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The antenna isolation requirements for Multi-

hop operation are the same as for standard operation.

For optimum performance, each booster that is

adjacent to the donor requires a forward signal level from the

previous booster in the chain of at least -70 dBm (at the D1 antenna

connector).

Each booster along the path must be able to communicate with the

previous and next booster only. They are not required to be able to

receive from or to transmit back to the donor cell site.

1. From the SET Main Menu, type to display the

System Parameters Menu.

2. Type to display the Site ID Menu, shown here with

the Multi-hop Feature enabled. ( The default setting for

the Multi-hop Feature is .)

A Site Identification......................Not Assigned

3. Type to access the Multi-hop Feature parameter.

The following choices will appear:

(0) Disabled

(1) Enabled Mode 1–Adjacent to donor

(2) Enabled Mode 2–Adjacent to EAC-2000

(3) Enabled Mode 3–Adjacent to an EAC-IV (no prior EAC-

2000 in chain)

(4) Enabled Mode 4–Adjacent to an EAC-IV (with prior

EAC-2000 in chain)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-3

(Continued)

4. Select the proper mode. This depends only upon the kind of

equipment that is adjacent to the EAC-2000.

•Use if the EAC-2000 is the first in the chain,

adjacent to the donor cell.

•Use if the previous equipment is another EAC-

2000.

•Use if the previous equipment is an EAC-IV, and

this is the closest EAC-2000 to the donor.

•Use if the previous equipment is an EAC-IV, but

there is at least one EAC-2000 between this and the donor.

If Mode 3 or 4 is used, the "Booster Link Channel Previous

EAC" will appear in the Control Channels Menu. The booster

link channel number for the EAC-IV should be entered.

• The EAC-IV "position" parameter should be entered as "1" if

the previous equipment is an EAC-2000. The EAC-2000

appears to be a donor to the EAC-IV.

A set of boosted channels must be chosen for each EAC-2000 in a

multi-hop configuration. A particular EAC-2000 may be viewed as

having the previous booster in the chain as a "donor."

Page 7-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

Therefore, in choosing the boosted channel set for a particular

booster, ensure that the set is separated by at least three channels (90

kHz) from the channel sets of both the previous booster and the next

one.

Figure 7-1. Example of Valid Channel Set

Control channel: 316

Voice channels: 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148,169,...295

Boosted control channel: 319

Donor control channel: 316

Boosted voice channels: 4,25,46,67

Donor voice channel list: 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148,169,...295

Boosted control channel: 322

Donor control channel: 319

Boosted voice channels: 7,28,49,70

Donor voice channel list: 4,25,46,67

Boosted control channel: 325

Donor control channel: 322

Boosted voice channels: 10,31,52,73

Donor voice channel list: 7,28,49,70

For a Multi-hop configuration, there is an additional consideration in

setting the hand-back threshold (the signal level at which mobiles are

considered "weak," causing the mobile to be handed back to the

previous EAC-2000 in the chain).

An EAC-2000 has no way of detecting whether a given call is being

handled directly or by the next booster. Therefore,

If booster #1 typically experiences a reverse signal

level of -90 dBm from booster #2 when booster #2 is handling

a call, then booster #1 should have its hand-back threshold no

higher than -100 dBm. Otherwise, booster #1 might mistake a

call being handled by booster #2 (or #3) as a weak mobile and

try to hand it back to the donor cell. This would probably

result in a dropped call.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-5

(Continued)

To determine the hand-back threshold, the following procedure is

recommended:

1. Disable the hand-in and hand-back thresholds for all boosters in

the chain, as follows:

a. From the System Parameters Menu, type: to

display the Thresholds and Power Control Menu.

A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ................ -60 dBm

C Multi-Donor Activation Threshold .................... DISABLED

E Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................ 0

F Hand-back Mobile Power Step .............................. 0

G RSSI Averaging Speed ..............................MEDIUM

H Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ......................... 5 sec

I Station Power Class Selective Boosting . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSES

b. Type to access the Hand-in Threshold

parameter.

c. Type to disable the hand-in threshold.

d. Type to return to the Thresholds menu.

e. Type to access the Hand-back Threshold

parameter.

f. Type to disable the hand-back threshold.

2. After powering up all of the EAC-2000 units, verify that the

received signal levels meet the minimum needed.

3. Verify call operation with each booster, in good signal level

conditions (within 1/2 mile of the booster). Make sure that calls

can stay up at least 1 minute to eliminate link fading as a

problem.

Page 7-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

4. Establish a to use for the hand-back threshold:

a. Set up a call on the last EAC-2000 in the chain at a good

signal level position, sitting still.

b. With the call up, monitor and record the reverse signal

levels received by each booster all the way back to the

donor. To do this—

• Use the SCS command (from the > prompt) to

identify which board pair is handling the call.

• Type (capital or lower case). The reverse signal

level is reported for the board that is handling the

call.

The hand-back threshold should be at least 10 dB below the

reverse RF level received when the next booster is handling the

call. The allowable range is -120 dBm to -20 dBm.

If a system of boosters were spread out so that

all were receiving -70 dBm in the forward direction, then

the reverse signal levels from the next booster would be

about -92 dBm. In this situation, the highest hand-back

threshold recommended would be -102 dBm. If the

threshold were set higher (e.g., -95 dBm), then normal

signal level variations would cause an EAC-2000 to hand

back a mobile actually being handled by another booster.

Set the new hand-back threshold as follows:

1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to display

the Thresholds and Power Control Menu.

2. Type to access the Hand-back Threshold parameter.

3. Enter the new threshold, followed by .

There are no new limitations imposed upon the hand-in threshold in

a Multi-hop configuration. However, it must be

for that same EAC-2000.

The allowable range is -120 dBm to -20 dBm.

Review the hand-in threshold to be sure it meets these criteria, and

adjust it if necessary.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-7

6HFWLRQ 2SHUDWLRQZLWK0XOWL'RQRU 8QLWV

8.1 Introduction

The basic EAC-2000 handles most cases of hand-in and hand-back to the donor

cells. However, in installations where the EAC-2000 is adjacent to more than

one donor, the "hand-back to a different cell site" situation requires special

consideration.

If a mobile being boosted back to one donor cell drives toward

another donor cell, a dilemma occurs. The serving cellular system

thinks the mobile is on one voice channel, while the booster actually

has it translated to another channel.

Under normal operation, the signal at the donor from the booster is

usually below the system’s hand-off threshold. Thus, the donor will

always identify the mobile as a candidate for hand-off, and the

cellular system will try to find the mobile in the cell sites adjacent to

the donor. However, because the mobile is actually on the booster’s

translated voice channel, it will not be seen in any adjacent or nearby

cell site. Therefore, the system will not hand the mobile to another

cell unless special means are provided to allow that cell site to

measure the signal level of the boosted mobile.

This can be resolved by providing the adjacent cell sites with

equipment with which to see the mobile on the voice channel that the

cellular system thinks it is on. The cellular system can then

determine which adjacent cell the mobile is driving into, assign a

voice channel in that cell, and then send a hand-off message sending

the mobile to that channel.

This can be achieved by placing a reverse-translating Multi-Donor

Unit (MDU) at each of the cell sites adjacent to the booster.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 8-1

The MDU, which is connected to the cell-site receive antennas,

scans for boosted mobiles and then translates those mobiles back to

the donor’s voice channel for presentation to the cell-site locating

receiver.

The MDUs must know the relationships in effect between boosted

and donor channels for calls being handled by the EAC-2000

booster(s). This is accomplished by data signaling between the EAC-

2000 and any adjacent MDUs on a booster link channel.

The EAC-2000 looks for the boosted mobile signal level to fall below

a settable . If this happens, the

booster encodes and transmits the channel relationships to any MDUs

that may be listening. This does not mean, however, that the mobile

will necessarily be handed off. Transmission of this information

merely allows the MDU to know (if it is able to see the mobile signal

at a sufficient level) to which channel it should "untranslate" the

mobile.

For a more complete description of MDU operation,

see the Multi-Donor Extend-A-Cell® IV Technical Manual.

8.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for MDU Operation

When installing the EAC-2000 for operation with Multi-Donor Units, give

special attention to—

• Achieving adequate signal level at the booster and at the MDU

• Assigning a booster link channel

• Setting a multi-donor activation threshold

Page 8-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

The following signal level requirements apply to MDU

configurations:

• If more than one donor cell site is to be used, then signal levels

from each site must be at least -75 dBm at the EAC-2000.

• Signal levels on the reverse path (from the EAC-2000 to each

donor cell site) must arrive at the donor cell sites at

approximately the same amplitude. (This is necessary to keep

the cellular system from erroneously trying to hand the mobile

from one donor cell to the other.)

• Reverse path signals that arrive at the donor cell sites from the

EAC-2000 must be within the hand-off hysteresis window used

by the cellular system.

This signal balancing (if necessary) is usually accomplished by using

multiple directional donor antennas at the EAC-2000, with the

stronger path being attenuated with pads to match the weaker path.

Another alternative is to increase the hand-off hysteresis window in

the cellular system for the particular donor cell sites that are under

consideration.

Signal levels should be measured using a spectrum analyzer or FM

service monitor. RF attenuators should be used on stronger signals

to bring them within ± 1 dB of weaker signals.

If MDUs are installed at cell sites adjacent to the EAC-2000, the RF

path between the EAC-2000 M2 antenna and the "Booster Link

Antenna" of the MDUs must be such that the MDU units can receive

at least a -100 dBm signal when the booster transmits using PA 6

(the hand-off PA).

When installing antennas, ensure that this requirement is met.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 8-3

The multi-donor activation threshold defaults to DISABLED. In this

condition, it does not allow the transmission of channel relationship

messages to MDUs. Therefore, you will need to set the multi-donor

activation threshold in order to operate with MDUs. Usually, a

threshold halfway between the hand-in threshold and the hand-back

threshold will give good performance without generating excessive

transmissions to the MDUs.

To set the threshold, complete the following steps:

1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to display

the Thresholds and Power Control Menu.

A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ................ -60 dBm

B Hand-in Threshold ................................. -90 dBm

D Hand-back Threshold ...............................-100 dBm

E Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................ 0

F Hand-back Mobile Power Step .............................. 0

G RSSI Averaging Speed ..............................MEDIUM

H Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ......................... 5 sec

I Station Power Class Selective Boosting . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSES

2. Type to access the Multi-Donor Activation Threshold

parameter.

3. Enter the chosen threshold, followed by .

For additional hints on achieving successful multi-donor

operation and on troubleshooting, refer to the Multi-Donor Unit

technical manual.

Page 8-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

A booster link channel must be assigned. Choose a channel that

meets the following requirements:

• May be any channel in the band (control or voice), including

the extended band voice channels.

• Must be different from any donor or boosted channel in the

same EAC-2000.

• Should meet the same separation considerations as for a voice

channel.

One way of meeting these requirements is to assign one of the

unused voice channels in the same 23-channel separation sequence as

the link channel.

To enter the booster link channel, open the Control Channels Menu

after setting the thresholds.

If both Multi-hop configuration and Multi-Donor Units are used, the

single booster link channel will be used for both types of signaling.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 8-5

6HFWLRQ 5HVHUYHGIRU)XWXUH8VH

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 9-1

6HFWLRQ &RPELQHG2SHUDWLRQ

0XOWL&DELQHW0XOWL+RS0XOWL'RQRU

10.1 Introduction

EAC-2000 installations may be set up to combine Multi-cabinet operation,

Multi-hop operation and multi-donor units (MDUs). Figure 10-1 shows an

example of a complex configuration of donor cell sites, EAC-2000

cabinets, and MDUs.

Figure 10-1. Combined Configuration Example

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 10-1

10.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for Combined Operation

When installing the EAC-2000 for combined operation, the

following requirements must be met:

• A unique booster link channel must be set for each

cabinet.

• Any listening MDUs must include the booster link

channels of all cabinets in nearby EAC-2000s in their lists.

• The boosted voice channels of the EAC-2000 sites must

be at least three channels (90 kHz) away from any

possible donor channel.

• The Booster Link Channel–Previous EAC parameters must

be set to the booster link channel of the previous EAC-

2000 cabinet that is boosting the control channel (for

Mode 3 or Mode 4 EAC-2000s).

• Donor voice channels must be listed in the

in the following situation:

- EAC 2 is not adjacent to the primary donor cell.

- A previous booster in the chain (EAC 1) has more

than one possible donor (donors 1 and 2).

- EAC 1 could boost calls from either donor to

EAC 2.

- The donor voice channels for EAC 1 must be listed

in the multiple SAT list for EAC 2.

Figure 10-2 shows a set of channel assignments (given the

donor control channels) that meets these requirements for the

configuration shown in Figure 10-1. Other valid choices are

also possible. In this figure, notice that:

• In EAC 2A, the donor voice channels in the multiple SAT

list include all of the boosted voice channels from EAC

1A (4,25,46,67) and EAC 1B (109,130,151,172,193).

• Minimum separation of three channels is maintained

between donor and boosted channels.

Page 10-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)

Figure 10-2. Channel Assignment Example

Cell/Unit Channel Type Channels

Donor 1 Control channel ................ 316 (SAT 5970)

Voice channels ................. 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148,169 ...295

Donor 2 Control channel ................ 325 (SAT 6000)

Voice channels ................. 10,31,52,73,94,115,136,157,178 ... 304

MDU 1 Booster link channel list .......... 88,214

MDU 2 Booster link channel list .......... 88,214

EAC 1A Boosted control channel ........... 319

Donor control channel ............ 316

Boosted voice channels ........... 4,25,46,67

Donor voice channels (SAT = 5970) . . 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148...295

Booster link channel ............. 88

Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)

EAC 1B Boosted control channel ........... (Not used)

Donor control channel ............ (Not used)

Boosted voice channels ........... 109,130,151,172,193

Donor voice channels (SAT = 6000) . . 10,31,52,73,94,115,136,157...304

Booster link channel ............. 214

Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)

EAC 2A Boosted control channel ........... 322

Donor control channel ............ 319

Boosted voice channels ........... 7,28,49,70

Donor voice channels (SAT = Multiple) 4,25,46,67,109,130,151,172,193

Booster link channel ............. 91

Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)

EAC 2B Boosted control channel ........... (Not used)

Donor control channel ............ (Not used)

Boosted voice channels ........... 112,133,154,175,196

Donor voice channels ............ (empty)

Booster link channel ............. 217

Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 10-3

9ROXPH

2SHUDWLQJ3URFHGXUHV

27-7656-2

Issue 12/95

Field Support

If you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact

at one of the following telephone numbers:

Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)

or (216) 349-8413

Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413

&RQWHQWV

............................................. vi

.......................................... 1-1

1.1 About This Volume ................................ 1-1

1.2 Overview of EAC-2000 Operation ....................... 1-2

1.2.1 Establishing the Local Link ....................... 1-2

1.2.2 Establishing the Remote Link ...................... 1-4

1.3 Entering Commands ................................ 1-6

1.3.1 Syntax ...................................... 1-6

1.3.2 Command Entry ............................... 1-7

1.3.3 Moving Through SET Menus ...................... 1-7

1.3.4 Escaping from Continuous Cycles ................... 1-8

1.3.5 Ending a Session............................... 1-8

1.4 Overview of Commands.............................. 1-9

....................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction ...................................... 2-1

2.1.1 SET Menu Map ............................... 2-1

2.1.2 Parameter Summaries ........................... 2-1

2.2 Main Menu...................................... 2-12

2.3 RF Boards Menu .................................. 2-12

2.3.1 RF Board Position Menus ....................... 2-13

• Status ................................... 2-13

• Diversity ................................. 2-14

2.4 Power Amplifiers Menu ............................. 2-14

• Forward PA Power Step - Voice................. 2-15

• Forward PA Power Step - Control ............... 2-15

• Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off .............. 2-15

• Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice ....... 2-16

• Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control ...... 2-16

• Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off ..... 2-17

• Reverse PA Power Set - Voice.................. 2-18

• Reverse PA Power Set - Control................. 2-18

• Key Forward PA ........................... 2-18

• Key Reverse PA............................ 2-19

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page iii

Contents

(Continued)

2.5 System Parameters Menu ............................ 2-19

2.5.1 Site ID Menu ................................ 2-20

• Site Identification ........................... 2-20

• Multi-Hop Feature .......................... 2-20

2.5.2 Control Channels Menu ......................... 2-21

• Donor Control Channel ....................... 2-21

• Boosted Control Channel ...................... 2-22

• RF Board to Use for Control Channel ............. 2-22

• Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy" . . . 2-23

• Directed Retry Channels ...................... 2-24

• Back-up Control Channel Option ................ 2-24

• Revertive Control Channel Option................ 2-25

• Substitute Control Channel ..................... 2-25

• Booster Link Channel ........................ 2-26

• Booster Link Channel—Previous EAC ............ 2-26

2.5.3 Voice Channels Menu .......................... 2-27

• Donor Voice Channel Lists (5970–6030 Hz SAT) .... 2-28

• Donor Voice Channels List (Multiple SAT) ......... 2-29

• Boosted Voice Channel Positions 2–5 and 7-11 ...... 2-29

2.5.4 Modem Control Menu .......................... 2-30

• Master Password............................ 2-30

• Restricted Password ......................... 2-31

• Console Time-out ........................... 2-31

• Auto-Dial Enable ........................... 2-31

• Dial-up Phone Numbers (1 and 2) ............... 2-32

• Auto-Dial Trials Max ........................ 2-33

• Delay Between Auto-Dial Retries ................ 2-34

• Max Auto-Dial Trial Period .................... 2-34

• Modem Setup.............................. 2-35

• Init String ................................ 2-35

• Dial Prefix String ........................... 2-37

• Hang Up String ............................ 2-37

• Local Port Baud Rate ........................ 2-38

• Local Port Comm Params ..................... 2-28

• Remote Port Baud Rate ....................... 2-39

• Remote Port Comm Params .................... 2-40

• Remote Port Handshake....................... 2-40

• Modem Mobile MIN ......................... 2-41

• Modem Mobile Power Step .................... 2-41

Page iv AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Contents

(Continued)

2.5.5 Thresholds and Power Control Menu................ 2-42

• Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ......... 2-42

• Hand-in Threshold .......................... 2-43

• Multi-Donor Activation Threshold ............... 2-44

• Hand-back Threshold ........................ 2-45

• Hand-in Mobile Power Step .................... 2-45

• Hand-back Mobile Power Step .................. 2-45

• RSSI Averaging Speed ....................... 2-46

• Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ................ 2-47

• Station Power Class Selective Boosting ............ 2-47

2.5.6 Disconnect Control Menu ........................ 2-48

• Donor RSSI ............................... 2-48

• SAT Fade Time-out ......................... 2-49

• Max Num of Hand-back Attempts Per Call ......... 2-49

• Minimum Delay between Hand-back Attempts ....... 2-50

2.5.7 Call Processing Parameters Menu .................. 2-50

• Mobile RSSI>Threshold Parameters .............. 2-51

• Hand-back/Grab-back Control................... 2-51

2.6 Alarms Menu .................................... 2-52

2.6.1 Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point ............. 2-51

2.6.2 PA to Antenna Loss - High Alarm Point ............. 2-53

2.6.3 PA Temperature - High Alarm Point ................ 2-52

2.6.4 PA Temperature - Fan Activation Point .............. 2-53

2.6.5 PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point................ 2-54

2.6.6 Mobile Power Control Causes PA Power Cutback ....... 2-55

2.6.7 +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point ........... 2-55

2.6.8 +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ................ 2-56

2.6.9 +12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ................ 2-56

2.6.10 +6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ................ 2-56

2.6.11 External Analog Inputs Menu .................... 2-57

2.6.12 External Digital Inputs Menu ..................... 2-58

2.6.13 External Digital Outputs Menu ................... 2-59

2.6.14 Critical Alarms Menu .......................... 2-60

2.6.15 RSSI - Alarm Points Menu ...................... 2-61

• Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ..... 2-61

• Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point ..... 2-61

• Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ...... 2-62

2.7 Set Defaults Feature ................................ 2-62

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page v

Contents

............................ 3-1

3.1 Introduction ...................................... 3-1

3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command .................... 3-3

3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command ...................... 3-5

3.4 RSS (RSSI Report) Command.......................... 3-9

3.5 SSR (Scanned RSSI Report) Command .................. 3-10

3.6 PWR (PA Power Display) Command.................... 3-12

3.7 SAT (SAT Report) Command......................... 3-13

3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command ....................... 3-14

3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command .................. 3-20

3.10 DCH (Display Call History) Command .................. 3-27

3.11 TIM (Time Display and Change) Command ............... 3-29

3.12 MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command .................... 3-30

3.13 REV (Show Hardware Revisions) Command .............. 3-32

..................................... 4-1

4.1 Introduction ...................................... 4-1

4.2 Commands ....................................... 4-1

1-1. Commonly Used Commands ............................. 1-9

2-1. SET Command Menu Map............................... 2-2

2-2. RF Board Parameters ................................... 2-3

2-3. Power Amplifier Parameters .............................. 2-3

2-4. System Parameters .................................... 2-4

2-5. Alarm Parameters .................................... 2-10

3-1. Sample SSS Report .................................... 3-2

3-2. Sample SCS Report.................................... 3-5

3-3. Sample List of RSSI Readings ............................ 3-9

3-4. Sample List of Power Readings .......................... 3-12

3-5. Sample List of SAT Readings............................ 3-13

3-6. Sample ALA Report .................................. 3-15

3-7. Sample DCS Report .................................. 3-21

3-8. Sample DCH Report .................................. 3-22

3-9. Sample TIM Screen................................... 3-28

3-10. Sample MIN Screen .................................. 3-30

Page vi AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

6HFWLRQ ,QWURGXFWLRQ

1.1 About This Volume

This is the second of three volumes pertaining to the AMPS EAC-2000™

booster. Extensive monitor software is included with the EAC-2000 system,

which allows the installer or service provider to control and monitor the system’s

performance. This manual is intended to assist the installer or service provider

in using the provided software to ensure optimum performance of the EAC-

2000.

This volume describes the terminal interface to the EAC-2000, which is used to

set parameters, monitor call activity and call statistics, and report and diagnose

problems. It includes procedures for entering commands and setting parameters

and provides information on interpreting the results. The volume is divided into

four sections:

• Provides an overview of EAC-2000 operation

via local and remote serial link, guidelines for command entry, and an

overview of the commands that may be entered.

• Describes all of the submenus that can be

accessed through the SET command and provides guidelines for setting

parameters.

• Describes commands that

can be used to obtain information on EAC-2000 operations, and guidelines

for interpreting the results.

• Describes various higher level

commands used to verify hardware.

For instructions on installing the EAC-2000, setting initial parameters, and

making adjustments to achieve optimum performance, refer to Volume 1,

Installation Procedures. For a more detailed description of the EAC-2000 and

how it works, refer to Volume 3, Technical Information.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-1

1.2 Overview of EAC-2000 Operation

Virtually all of the operating parameters of the EAC-2000 are under software

control. These parameters can be changed and monitored locally, through a

serial link attached to a standard RS232, ASCII terminal or personal computer.

The same control can be exercised remotely via a telephone line, modem, and

the same kind of terminal.

The EAC-2000 communicates with a conventional ASCII, RS232

terminal connected to the 25-pin D-sub connector on the controller

board. To bring up the local link:

1. Connect and power up the terminal.

2. Set the terminal for 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop

bit, full duplex (no local echo). If possible, set the terminal to

all capitals, disable auto XON/XOFF and soft scroll, and

"carriage return only" (not carriage return plus line feed).

3. Power up the EAC-2000 (see Volume 1, Section 4). After

several seconds, the terminal should respond CONSOLE

LOCKED.

4. Press (carriage return or enter). A welcome message

and prompt for password should appear. If the password is not

prompted for, the "password bypass" switch is activated.

If the response is illegible, check the terminal setup. If nothing

comes up, power down and recheck the power hookup, the

terminal hookup, and terminal setup. If you are not sure of the

EAC-2000 terminal setup or password, see note following step

#5.

5. Enter a master password (the default master password is 1234)

or restricted password. A master password gives access to all

system setup and monitor commands. A restricted password

gives access to only certain system monitor commands.

An accepted password should result in a salutation followed by

the command entry level prompt (>).

Page 1-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

If you forget the password or terminal setup. . .

The password and the terminal setup may be changed by the user during a

session. If the settings were forgotten, it would not normally be possible to

bring up the local link. A mechanism is provided to recover from this

situation.

PA interface board 1 is located on PA cage 1, behind a panel. On this board

is a 4-position dip switch. Switch 1 is "password bypass enable."

If you have forgotten the password, but know the terminal setup (i.e., a

carriage return causes the welcome message to appear, but your password is

not accepted), perform the following procedure:

1. Set the password bypass switch to "on."

2. Hit <CR> at the terminal. The password is not required now.

3. Type SET <CR> and examine/change the password.

4. Set the password bypass switch to "off."

If you have forgotten the terminal setup, perform the following procedure:

1. Set the password bypass switch "on."

2. Cycle power on the EAC-2000. The local port will operate at 9600,

7 even, 1 stop (regardless of how it was set).

3. Change the terminal to 9600, 7 even, 1 stop and hit <CR>. The

welcome message should appear and the password will be bypassed.

4. Type SET <CR> and examine/change the modem setup and the

password. Exit SET.

5. Set the password bypass switch to "off."

6. Type LOC <CR>. The local port will operate as SET.

7. Change the terminal setup to match the setup entered with SET.

8. Hit <CR> to open up the local port at the new setup. Record the

setup.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-3

The EAC-2000 utilizes an MNP-10 compatible modem and Motorola

cellular mobile.

This equipment makes it possible to dial up and communicate with

the EAC-2000 using a remote terminal and modem of either type

listed. The EAC-2000 modem automatically determines the type of

modem calling it and adapts to its baud rate. The EAC-2000 can also

be set up to automatically dial a predetermined telephone number if

a major fault occurs.

Once the remote link is established, the interface with the system is

exactly like that on the local link, but at a different baud rate. If both

links are up, characters typed on either terminal are echoed to both,

along with the resulting EAC-2000 output. This makes it possible for

an experienced operator to exercise the system remotely while

someone watches locally, or for the two to exercise the system

together.

For instructions on setting up and testing the cellular mobile and for

answering calls originated by an EAC-2000, refer to Volume 1,

Section 5.

Page 1-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

To communicate with the EAC-2000 from a remote location:

1. Hook up a conventional ASCII terminal through a compatible

modem.

2. Set the terminal and modem to 4800, 2400 or 1200, 7 data bits,

even parity, 1 stop bit, full duplex (no local echo). If possible,

set the terminal to all capitals.

3. Dial the phone number of the mobile in the EAC-2000. After

about one ring, the EAC-2000 will answer and try to set up

communications by providing a continuous answer-back tone.

If the modems fail to connect, the EAC-2000 will terminate the

call. If they are successful in establishing a link, the remote

modem will indicate CONNECT.

If you dial the EAC-2000 with a high-speed

(above 1200) modem, the modems may take up to a

minute to negotiate the link.

4. Press and look for the welcome message. From this

point on, communicating over the remote link is similar to

communicating over the local link.

When both links are established, the baud rate on the local

link will slow to match the remote link rate.

The remote link is more prone to transmission errors

because of the noisier link. These errors, while a

nuisance, do not cause major problems because the system

always asks for confirmation of serious changes.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-5

1.3 Entering Commands

The system responds to commands that consist of three letters

followed by up to three data fields, as follows:

In this syntax—

• COM is the particular three-letter command.

• FIELD 1 consists of up to four hex characters followed by a

hyphen (-).

• FIELD 2 consists of up to four hex characters followed by an

equals (=) sign.

• FIELD 3 consists of up to four hex characters.

• Each command ends with a carriage return (<CR>).

After the COMmand has been entered, the system usually prompts

for data it needs. If a certain field is not required, any data entered

in that field will be ignored.

Page 1-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

When entering commands—

• Spaces may be added to separate the fields, after the first three

letters have been entered.

• Leading zeros may be omitted.

• Use DELETE or BACKSPACE to correct mistakes.

• End the command with .

Command Entry Symbols

>Command entry level prompt. Indicates that the

system is ready to accept commands.

<CR> Carriage return or enter.

<CTRL> Control. The control key is used in combination

with other keys. For example, <CTRL> Z means

to hold down the control key while pressing the

Z key.

ESC Escape. A single key marked ESC on most

keyboards.

The SET command gives access to a progression of menus used to

set EAC-2000 parameters (see Section 2). Use the keystrokes

described below to move forward and backward through these menus.

• Moving Forward. Each command brings up a menu of items

from which to choose, with a character in front of each item.

To select an item, type the character and . The next

menu (or the parameter to be changed) will be displayed.

• To move backward along a path, type

, or just . The previous menu will be displayed.

Repeat until you are back at the SET Main Menu.

• Type at any menu level. Or, type

while at the Main Menu level.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-7

Some commands cause a continuous process to begin. To escape this

mode and return to the > prompt, hit or type .

Entering or from the > prompt will

cause the characters entered on the line to be erased.

A session can be ended using LOC, RES, or the inactivity timeout.

• Should be used if the session involves only

system monitoring or minor parameter changes. Ensures

security but lets alarms and call statistics continue to

accumulate. Will terminate remote link.

• Should be used if extensive parameter

changes have been made during a session. Ensures that all

parameter changes take effect, since all hardware is initialized

after a reset. Ensures security because the password must be re-

entered to get back to the command level. Initializes all alarm

condition counters to 0. Will terminate remote link.

• Inactivity timer (default 5 minutes) will

terminate any currently running command, and simulates LOC,

if a keyboard entry is not detected within the designated period.

Avoid leaving the EAC-2000 in an insecure state if the remote

link is lost before the session is properly ended. This will

terminate the remote link.

Page 1-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

1.4 Overview of Commands

Figure 1-1 presents a summary of the most commonly used commands.

Figure 1-1. Commonly Used Commands

HELp Lists syntax and function for system commands. (If session

was begun with restricted password, gives abbreviated list.)

SETup Invokes a menu-driven entry mode used to inspect or change all

EAC-2000 operating parameters. (To exit this command, type

and answer .)

Show System Lists current EAC-2000 parameter settings and conditions of

Status monitored input parameters.

† Show Call Shows current status of each board pair. Updates listing if

Status status changes (e.g., if a call is set up or taken down) and gives

reason for the change.

† RSSI Report Gives continuously updated reading of the received signal

strength on all RF boards.

†Show Scanned Shows average RSSIs of 18 channels being scanned.

RSSI

†PoWeR Repeatedly lists power readings on the 7 PAs.

display

†SAT report Repeatedly lists SAT readings on all boards.

ALArm report Reports number of times various alarm conditions occurred

since last system reset. ( zeroes alarm counts.)

Display Call Displays various call statistics per board pair. (

Statistics zeroes statistics.)

Display Call Displays hourly totals of certain call statistics for the

History last running week. ( zeroes some of these.)

TIMe Displays/changes current clock time.

RESet Resets EAC-2000, preserves parameters in effect when

command is issued.

LOCk Forces password entry before accepting other commands.

†Mobile ID Nbr. Lists the last five access attempts by mobiles.

REVision Displays hardware revisions within the EAC-2000.

† To exit this command, hit or .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-9

6HFWLRQ 6(7&RPPDQG

2.1 Introduction

From the command entry level prompt (>), the SET command invokes the setup

utility which displays a progression of menus. The menus provide a guided path

to each EAC-2000 parameter.

Figure 2-1 illustrates the paths to follow through the SET menus to reach

each available parameter.

Figures 2-2 through 2-5 summarize the RF board, power amplifier,

system, and alarm parameters that can be programmed using the SET

command. Following the parameter summaries, each SET menu and its

associated parameters are described in detail.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-1

Figure 2-1. SET Command Menu Map

Page 2-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 2-2. RF Board Parameters

STATUS Disabled

Enabled

None

Enabled Defines how the board is to be

activated.

DIVERSITY Diversity ON

Antenna M1 selected

Antenna M2 selected

Varies according to

board

Defines antenna to use for reverse

receiver.

Figure 2-3. Power Amplifier Parameters

FORWARD PA POWER STEP -

VOICE

0–3 0 Sets the output power electronically to one of

four levels. Each step is about -4 dB.

FORWARD PA POWER STEP -

CONTROL

FORWARD PA POWER STEP -

HAND-OFF

FORWARD PA POWER LOW

ALARM POINT - VOICE

0, 30–50 +40 dBm Sets low power alarm threshold for forward PAs.

Should be 5 to 6 dB below power read using

"key forward."

FORWARD PA POWER LOW

ALARM POINT - CONTROL

FORWARD PA POWER LOW

ALARM POINT - HAND-OFF

REVERSE PA POWER SET

VOICE

5–20 dBm +20 dBm Sets reverse output power level (referenced at D1

antenna).

REVERSE PA POWER SET

CONTROL

REVERSE PA POWER LOW

ALARM POINT - VOICE

0, 1–23 +15 dBm Sets low power alarm threshold for reverse PAs.

Should be 5 dB below power read using "key

reverse."

REVERSE PA POWER LOW

ALARM POINT - CONTROL

KEY FORWARD PA PAs 1–11 Keys PAs for power adjust and combiner tuning.

KEY REVERSE PA Keys reverse PA for reverse power monitoring.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-3

Figure 2-4. System Parameters

SITE ID Up to 20 characters Not assigned Identifies the site for remote mode

operation.

MULTI-HOP

FEATURE

(0) Disabled

(1) Enabled - Mode 1

(2) Enabled - Mode 2

(3) Enabled - Mode 3

(4) Enabled - Mode 4

Disabled Turns Multi-hop operation on or off.

DONOR CONTROL

CHANNEL

1–799, 991–1023 337 Channel used as the input for

frequency translation. Should be set

to donor site control channel.

BOOSTED CONTROL

CHANNEL 1–799, 991–1023 340 Channel to which donor control

channel is translated. Should be

separated from donor control channel

and any possible donor voice channel

by at least three channels (90 kHz).

RF BOARD TO USE

FOR CONTROL

CHANNEL

1–5 and 7–11

1Sets equipment to be used to boost

the control channel.

CONTROL

CHANNEL STATE

DURING "ALL

CHANNELS BUSY"

(0) Off

(1) Deny accesses

(2) Deny accesses, but count

(3) Boost accesses

(4) Directed retry

Directed retry State of boosted control channel when

all boosted voice channels are

occupied. (For description of each

option, see section 2.5.2.)

DIRECTED RETRY

CHANNELS

Disabled

Any valid channel

All disabled Control channels of nearby cell sites.

BACK-UP CONTROL

CHANNEL OPTION

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled Board 6 may be used to boost the

control channel if board 1 is disabled.

REVERTIVE

CONTROL

CHANNEL OPTION

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled Controls using board 1 to boost the

last call.

SUBSTITUTE

CONTROL

CHANNEL

Disabled

1–799, 991–1023 Disabled Keeps mobiles not in a call from

roaming when control channel boards

are being used to boost a voice call.

BOOSTER LINK

CHANNEL

1–799, 991–1023 550 If Multi-Donor feature is enabled,

assigns channel used to transmit call

setup information.

Continued . . .

Page 2-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)

BOOSTER LINK

CHANNEL -

PREVIOUS EAC

1–799, 991–1023 571 If Multi-hop feature is enabled,

assigns channel used to receive call

setup information from previous EAC

in a Multi-hop configuration.

DONOR VOICE

CHANNEL LIST

Any valid channel and

SAT, up to 105 total

None assigned Voice channels to be scanned for

mobile candidates to be boosted. A

list of channels may be entered for

each of the three SAT frequencies.

BOOSTED VOICE

CHANNELS

1–799, 991–1023 See chart

below*Channels to which the donor voice

channels are translated when a mobile

is being boosted. Should be

consistent with the frequency plan of

the cellular system.

MASTER

PASSWORD

Up to 12 alphanumeric

characters

1234 Used to gain access to system

monitoring and setup commands.

RESTRICTED

PASSWORD

Up to 12 alphanumeric

characters

5678 Used to gain access to system

monitor commands.

CONSOLE TIME-

OUT

10-2500 seconds 300 seconds Maximum time console will wait

before locking during periods of no

keyboard activity.

AUTO-DIAL

ENABLE Armed

Disarmed Disarmed Used to arm/disarm modem's ability

to automatically dial a designated

phone number when critical alarms

exist.

340 361 382 403 424 445 466 487 508 529

Continued . . .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-5

Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)

DIAL-UP PHONE

NUMBER 1 0 (none)

Up to 48

characters

12163498684 Assigns the number to be dialed by the

EAC-2000 when a critical alarm exists.

DIAL-UP PHONE

NUMBER 2

0 (none)

Up to 48

characters

None A second number to be dialed when a

critical alarm exists.

AUTO-DIAL TRIALS

MAX

0-10 10 Maximum number of auto-dial trials the

modem will conduct if there are critical

alarms to be reported and a connection

cannot be made.

DELAY BETWEEN

AUTO-DIAL RETRIES

0-2500 seconds 60 seconds Period the modem will wait after an

unsuccessful auto-dial trial before trying

again.

MAX AUTO-DIAL

TRIAL PERIOD 0-2500 seconds 90 seconds Maximum time modem will wait before

terminating an auto-dial trial if

connection cannot be made.

MODEM MOBILE MIN 10 digits 1234567890 Mobile Identification Number of cellular

mobile booster. Used to identify calls to

and from the remote link; these calls are

not boosted and therefore, do not occupy

a boosted voice channel.

MODEM MOBILE

POWER STEP 0–7 7 Mobile attenuation code (VMAC) for

cellular mobile used to establish remote

link. Power step 0 = full power (3

watts); each additional step = a 4 dB

decrease in power (i.e., step 7 = 28 dB

below full power).

INIT STRING 48 characters AT!~AT!~AT&F

X0E0\D2S0=1

S10=20

)M1:E0*H1!

String of characters sent to modem on

power up and LOC.

DIAL COMMAND 16 characters ATDT String of characters sent to modem prior

to dialing out phone number.

HANGUP STRING 16 characters ~~~+++~~~ATH0!

Continued . . .

Page 2-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)

(Continued)

LOCAL PORT BAUD

RATE

1) 150

2) 300

3) 600

4) 1200

5) 2400

6) 4800

7) 9600

8) 19200

9600 Defines characteristics of ASCII link to

local port.

LOCAL PORT COMM

PARAMETERS

See chart below*7 data, EVEN tx

parity, IGNORE rx

parity, 1 stop

REMOTE PORT BAUD

RATE See list for

LOCAL PORT

BAUD RATE

9600 (Microcomm

modem)

2400 (Millidyne

modem)

Defines characteristics of ASCII link to

modem in EAC-2000. If using a

Microcomm modem, you may access

remote link at any defined speed less

than the setting.

REMOTE PORT COMM

PARAMETERS See chart below*7 data, EVEN tx

parity, CHECK rx

parity, 1 stop

REMOTE PORT

HANDSHAKE

1) None or

XON/XOFF

2) CTS/RTS

CTS/RTS

*Possible Selections for Local and Remote Port Comm Parameters

7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, ODD tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, SPACE tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, MARK tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, ODD tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, SPACE tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop

7 data, MARK tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop

8 data, NO parity, 1 stop

7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, ODD tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, SPACE tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, MARK tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, ODD tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, SPACE tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop

7 data, MARK tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop

8 data, NO parity, 2 stop

Continued . . .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-7

Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)

MOBILE DYNAMIC

POWER CONTROL

THRESHOLD

(0) Disabled

-120 to -20 dBm

-60 dBm Threshold above which the EAC-2000 will

reduce the power of the mobile.

HAND-IN THRESHOLD (0) Disabled

-120 to -20 dBm -90 dBm Signal level threshold at which a mobile on

one of the donor voice channels becomes a

candidate for boosting.

MULTI-DONOR

ACTIVATION THRESHOLD

(0) Disabled

-120 to -20 dBm

(A) Always

Disabled Signal level threshold at which a mobile being

boosted becomes a candidate for hand-off to

an alternate donor cell. (Applicable only if

alternate donor cell has MDU installed.)

HAND-BACK THRESHOLD (0) Disabled

-120 to -20 dBm

-100 dBm Signal level threshold at which a mobile being

boosted becomes a candidate for returning to

original donor voice channel.

HAND-IN MOBILE POWER

STEP

0–7 0 Mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to a

mobile being boosted to establish maximum

mobile power level used in boosted coverage

are. Power step 0 = full power (3 watts);

each additional step = 4 dB decrease in power

(i.e., step 7 = 28 dB below full power).

HAND-BACK MOBILE

POWER STEP 0–7 0 Mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to a

mobile during a hand-back attempt. This

establishes the power level of the mobiles in

the donor coverage area that have driven from

the booster area with calls in progress. (Same

power step equivalents as above.)

RSSI AVERAGING SPEED Slow

Medium

Fast

Medium Averaging speed for determining when

mobiles become candidates for hand-in or

hand-back.

DELAY BETWEEN HAND-

IN ATTEMPTS

0–250 seconds 5 seconds Amount of time between hand-in attempts on

a mobile identified as a candidate for boosting

(signal exceeds hand-in threshold).

STATION POWER CLASS

SELECTIVE BOOSTING Boost all

Boost I–III

Boost I, II

Boost I

Boost all Allows the EAC-2000 to be configured to

boost only lower-power subscriber units (i.e.,

portables).

Continued . . .

Page 2-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)

DONOR RSSI (0) Disabled

-100 to -20 dBm

-80 dBm Threshold below which the EAC-2000 will

disconnect a call.

SAT FADE TIME-OUT 0–250 seconds 5 seconds Time period the system will wait before

terminating an established call when the proper

SAT is not detected from a mobile. (Does not

apply if the mobile sends a release or the

mobile's signal strength falls below the hand-

back threshold.)

MAX NUMBER OF

HAND-BACK

ATTEMPTS PER CALL

0–250 10 Maximum number of hand-back attempts made

on mobiles identified as candidates for hand-

back (signal below hand-back threshold). If

hand-back is not successful before this number

is reached, the booster assumes the mobile is

driving away from the donor cell site and

maintains the call as long as possible.

MINIMUM DELAY

BETWEEN HAND-BACK

ATTEMPTS

0–250 seconds 15 seconds Time between attempts to return the mobile to

the donor channel when it is below the hand-

back threshold.

MOBILE RSSI >

THRESHOLD

PARAMETERS

C1 C1 Conditions for handling mobiles that are above

the hand-in threshold.

HAND-BACK/

GRAB-BACK CONTROL

D1 Conditions under which mobile hand-back

confirmation is treated.

RECOMMENDATIONS On-line recommendations.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-9

Figure 2-5. Alarm Parameters

ANTENNA RETURN LOSS - LOW

ALARM POINT 0 (Disabled)

1–20 6 dB Define antenna return loss alarm

threshold.

PA TO ANTENNA LOSS - HIGH

ALARM POINT

9 dB Define PA to antenna loss

threshold.

PA TEMP - HIGH ALARM POINT 0 (Disabled)

1–100 C 90 C Defines PA temperature alarm

condition.

PA TEMP - FAN ACTIVATION

POINT

60 C Defines PA temperature that

turns heat exchanger fan on.

PA TEMP - PA POWER CUTBACK

POINT 90 C Define parameters for forward

dynamic power control.

MOBILE POWER CONTROL

CAUSES PA POWER CUTBACK

Enabled

Disabled

+28 VOLT SUPPLY - PA POWER

CUTBACK POINT 0 (Disabled)

.1–50.9 Volts 23.0 Volts

+28 VOLT SUPPLY - LOW ALARM

POINT

Alarm thresholds for power

supply voltages

+12 VOLT SUPPLY - LOW ALARM

POINT 0 (Disabled)

.1–14.9 Volts 10.0 Volts

+6 VOLT SUPPLY - LOW ALARM

POINT

0 (Dsiabled)

.1–9.9 Volts

5.4 Volts

EXTERNAL DIGITAL INPUT

ALARM STATE (For each of 8 inputs) (0) Disabled

(1) High

(2) Low

Disabled Defines alarm conditions on the

eight general purpose inputs.

EXTERNAL DIGITAL OUTPUT

CURRENT STATE (For 8 inputs)

(1) High

(2) Low

(3) High if alarm. . .

(4) Low if alarm. . .

Low Defines state of the eight general

purpose outputs.

EXTERNAL ANALOG INPUTS -

ALARM THRESHOLD

0-5 volts 0.0 Vdc Defines alarm condition on the

eight analog inputs.

EXTERNAL ANALOG INPUT -

ALARM STATE

(0) Disabled

(1) Above threshold

(2) Below threshold

Disabled Defines alarm conditions on the

eight analog inputs.

Continued. . .

Page 2-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 2-5. Alarm Parameters (Continued)

CRITICAL ALARMS:

Board Out-of-Service Alarm

Board ROM Alarm

Board Calibration Memory Alarm

Serial Data Link Alarm

Personality Mismatch Alarm

Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm

Reverse PA Power Low Alarm

RSSI Alarm

PA Out-of-Service Alarm

PA Temp - High Alarm

PA Temp - Low Alarm

PA to Antenna High Loss Alarm

Antenna Return Loss Alarm

ROM Alarm

RAM Alarm

NOVRAM Alarm

SAT Detector Alarm

Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm

External Analog Input Alarm

External Digital Input - Alarms

Log only or

Critical Critical

Critical

Log Only

Critical

Log only

Critical

Log Only

"Log only" alarm occurrences

will be logged; total number of

occurrences can be viewed using

the ALA command.

"Critical" alarms will not only be

logged, but also cause the auto-

dial sequence to begin (if

enabled). This sequence

automatically dials a designated

number to report the alarm.

RSSI ALARMS:

Donor Ctrl Chan RSSI Hi Alarm Pt.

Donor Ctrl Chan RSSI Low Alarm Pt.

Donor Voice Chan RSSI Hi Alarm Pt.

(0) Disabled

-100 to -20 dBm Disabled

-80 dBm

Disabled

Establishes alarm levels for these

signals.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-11

2.2 Main Menu

Entry: At the > prompt, type SET.

ARF Boards

B Power Amplifiers

C System Parameters

DAlarms

E Set Defaults

Menu:

Purpose: Gives access to setup menus.

2.3 RF Boards Menu

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒

Menu:

1 Position 1 ............................ ENABLED

2 Position 2 ............................ ENABLED

3 Position 3 ............................ ENABLED

4 Position 4 ............................ ENABLED

5 Position 5 ............................ ENABLED

6 Position 6 ............................ ENABLED

7 Position 7 ............................ ENABLED

8 Position 8 ............................ ENABLED

9 Position 9 ............................ ENABLED

10 Position 10 ........................... ENABLED

11 Position 11 ........................... ENABLED

Purpose: Shows configuration (type and status) of the 11 RF board positions. From this

menu each board can be selected to access the parameters for that board.

Page 2-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

2.3 RF Boards Menu (Continued)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒RF Boards

Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Status ............................... ENABLED

B Diversity ...........OFF - ANTENNA "M1" SELECTED

Purpose: Gives access to status and diversity parameters.

STATUS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒RF Boards

Menu ⇒RF Board

Position ⇒

Purpose: To set up the selected RF board.

Options:

• 0 DISABLED: Board ignored by system; not used for boosting; alarms not

logged.

• 1 ENABLED: Reactivates board if it has been taken out of service due to

an alarm. If alarm condition persists, board will go out of service again

when SET is exited. (Default setting)

• 2 NONE: Same as DISABLED. Used to keep track of slots with no

boards installed.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-13

(Continued)

DIVERSITY

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒RF Boards

Menu ⇒RF Board

Position ⇒

Purpose: To turn diversity function on or off for reverse paths. Diversity enables

the board to select the best signal between two receive antenna ports, to improve

voice channel performance.

Options:

• 1 DIVERSITY ON: Default for boards 2-5 and 7–11. Not allowed for

board 6.

• 2 OFF—ANTENNA M1 ONLY SELECTED: Positions 1 and 6 default.

• 3 OFF—ANTENNA M2 ONLY SELECTED

2.4 Power Amplifiers Menu

Main Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ................... 0

B Forward PA Power Step - Control .................. 0

C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off ................. 0

D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+40 dBm

E Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control....+40 dBm

F Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off . . . +40 dBm

G Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...............+20 dBm

H Reverse PA Power Set - Control ..............+20 dBm

I Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+15 dBm

J Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control ....+15 dBm

K Key Forward PA .... POWER ADJ/COMBINER TUNING

L Key Reverse PA ............POWER MEASUREMENT

Purpose: Shows configuration of the PAs.

Page 2-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

2.4 Power Amplifiers Menu (Continued)

FORWARD PA POWER STEP - VOICE

FORWARD PA POWER STEP - CONTROL

FORWARD PA POWER STEP - HAND-OFF

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Power Amplifiers

Menu ⇒, , or

Purpose: These three parameters are used to select the power step for:

• Voice channel PAs

• Control channel PA

• Hand-off PA

Options:

• Steps: 0–3

–0 is full power (45 watts); each step is a 4 dB decrease in power.

• Default: 0

FORWARD PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - VOICE

FORWARD PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - CONTROL

FORWARD PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - HAND-OFF

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Power Amplifiers

Menu ⇒, , or

Purpose: These three parameters are used to set low power alarm threshold for forward

voice PAs. Should be 5 to 6 dB below power read using "key forward." Voice PA alarms

cause the PA to be taken out of service and hand-off PA alarms to be logged, but the PA

remains in service. If the Backup Control Channel option (see Sec. 2.5.2) is enabled, a low

PA power on the control channel will cause out-of-service for that PA.

Options:

• Range: 0, 30–50

• Default: +40 dBm

REVERSE PA POWER SET - VOICE

REVERSE PA POWER SET - CONTROL

Main Menu ⇒Power Amplifiers

Menu ⇒ or

Purpose: These two parameters are used to select power level for reverse PAs.

Options:

• Range: +5 to +20 dBm

• Default: +20 dBm

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-15

2.4 Power Amplifiers Menu (Continued)

REVERSE PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - VOICE

REVERSE PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - CONTROL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Power Amplifiers

Menu ⇒ or

Purpose: These two parameters are used to set low power alarm threshold for reverse PAs.

Should be 5 dB below power read using "key reverse."

Options:

• Range: 0, 1–23

• Default: +15 dBm

KEY FORWARD PA

Main Menu ⇒Power Amplifiers

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To key forward PA.

Options:

• PAs 1–11; position of PA to key. Keys PA on boosted channel at step as entered in A,

B and C. Displays position channel number and continuously updated PA power reading

at PA output.

KEY REVERSE PA

Main Menu ⇒Power Amplifiers

Menu ⇒

Purpose: Keys reverse PA for reverse power monitoring. Output channel is 10 channels

below boosted channel. Ouput level is as defined in J and K.

Note: Board 6 uses the "CNTL" setting.

Page 2-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

2.5 System Parameters Menu

Main Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Site ID.........Identification Multi-Hop

B Control Channels . Donor Boosted State

C Voice Channels . . . Donor Donor SAT Boosted

D Modem Control . . . Passwords Console Time-out

Auto-dial Control

Dial-up Phone Modem Mobile

E Thresholds ......Hand-in Hand-back Multi-Donor

Mobile Power RSSI Averaging Hand-in Delay

F Disconnect Control Donor RSSI SAT Fade Time-out

Hand-back Delay Hand-back Attempts

G Call Processing . . . Mobile Orig Mobile Answer

RSSI > Thresh Hand-back / Grab-back

Purpose: Displays parameters associated with overall system.

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒System

Parameters Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Site Identification......................Not Assigned

B Multi-hop Feature ......................DISABLED

Purpose: Gives access to parameters associated with site ID.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-17

(Continued)

SITE IDENTIFICATION

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Site ID Menu ⇒

Purpose: To assign/modify a name that uniquely identifies the site. Name appears

on console when the remote/local link is established to identify the site with which

the user is communicating.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 20 characters

• Default: Not assigned

MULTI-HOP FEATURE

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Site ID Menu ⇒

Purpose: To turn the Multi-hop feature on or off.

Options:

• 0= DISABLED: Default setting; causes conventional stand-alone operation.

• 1= ENABLED - MODE 1 - ADJACENT TO DONOR

• 2= ENABLED - MODE 2 - ADJACENT TO AN EAC-2000

• 3= ENABLED - MODE 3 - ADJACENT TO AN EAC-IV (NO PRIOR

EAC-2000 IN CHAIN)

• 4= ENABLED - MODE 4 - ADJACENT TO AN EAC-IV (WITH PRIOR

EAC-2000 IN CHAIN)

NOTE: The EAC-2000 may be used in a Multi-hop configuration with other

EAC-2000s and/or Extend-A-Cell® IVs. The type of units between the EAC-

2000 and the donor will determine how this option should be set.

Page 2-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒System

Parameters Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Donor Control Channel ............................... 337

B Boosted Control Channel ............................. 340

C RF Board to Use for Control Channel ...................... 1

D Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy DIRECTED RETRY

E Directed Retry Channels ............................. LIST

F Back-up Control Channel Option ...................DISABLED

G Revertive Control Channel Option ..................DISABLED

H Substitute Control Channel .......................DISABLED

I Booster Link Channel................................ 550

J Booster Link Channel - Previous EAC .................... 571

Selection H appears only if Selection F or G is set to ENABLED.

Selection I appears only if the Multi-Donor Threshold is not DISABLED.

Selection J appears only if the Multi-hop Feature is set to Mode 3 or Mode 4.

Purpose: Gives access to donor and boosted control channels, for entering

channel numbers.

DONOR CONTROL CHANNEL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: To establish the donor control channel number.

Options:

• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023

• Default: 337

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-19

(Continued)

BOOSTED CONTROL CHANNEL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: To establish the boosted control channel number. This is the channel

to which combiner port 1 is tuned. Any changes to this parameter will

necessitate retuning the combiner.

Options:

• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023

• Default: 340

RF BOARD TO USE FOR CONTROL CHANNEL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: To assign one of the RF boards to boost the control channel.

Options:

• 0 VOICE CHANNELS ONLY: All channels will operate as voice

channels only. Appropriate only in a multi-cabinet configuration

of EAC-2000s for the units not boosting the control channel.

(Presumably, another EAC-2000 would be set up to boost the

control channel.)

• 1–11 CORRESPONDING RF BOARD POSITION: Allows assignment

of one of the RF boards (except board 6) to boost the control

channel. The associated combiner port should be tuned to the

Boosted Control Channel.

• Default: 1

Page 2-20 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

CONTROL CHANNEL STATE DURING "ALL CHANNELS BUSY"

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: To establish the state of the boosted control channel when all boosted

voice channels are occupied.

Options:

• OFF: The best option for installations where there is no competing

service. Boosted control channel will be taken down during periods when

no voice channels are available for processing new calls. When the EAC-

2000 becomes busy, mobiles that are in the boosted coverage area (but

not on a call) will rescan and lock onto another control channel (possibly

a competitor's).

• BOOST ACCESSES: Use only if there is good coverage from the donor

cell in the booster coverage area. The boosted control channel will stay

up when all boosted voice channels are busy. Mobiles in the coverage

area will remain locked to the boosted control channel. If a call is

attempted while the EAC-2000 is busy, the call setup transmissions on the

control channel will be boosted. However, the EAC-2000 will not boost

the call on the voice channel, and the mobile will be left on the original-

donor-assigned voice channel. Thus the call will be set up but, if the

mobile is unable to communicate with the donor directly, the call will

drop.

• DENY ACCESSES: Forward boosted control channel will stay up, but

the reverse control boost path will be disabled. Therefore mobiles in the

booster coverage area will remain locked to the boosted control channel,

but if they try to place or answer a call they will be unable to signal back

to the donor on the reverse control channel. Mobiles' attempted call will

result in "fast busy" (reorder) at the mobile within about 1 second. Calls

to a mobile in a busy EAC-2000 coverage area will result in a "mobile

not in service area" message to the calling party.

• DENY ACCESSES, BUT COUNT: This is similar to "Deny Access";

the mobile is allowed to access the EAC-2000, but the access is not

repeated. This allows the call attempt to be logged. Mobile calls will

result in fast busy after about 5 seconds.

• DIRECTED RETRY: Default setting. Probably the best option for

installations where a competitive system exists. When the EAC-2000 is

busy, the boosted channel stays on the air. If more accesses or page

responses come in, the EAC-2000 sends the mobile a special "directed

retry" message. This message gives the mobile a list of up to six other

control channels on which to attempt the access. These directed retry

channels can be set by the user.

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-21

(Continued)

DIRECTED RETRY CHANNELS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: If the control channel state is set to this mode, this list of six

channels will be sent to the mobile in the directed retry message. The mobile

will scan this set of channels and will try its access on the strongest of the six

channels. The donor control channel and the control channel of cells adjacent

to the boosted coverage should be entered.

NOTE: The boosted control channel must not be in this list.

Options:

• Any valid channel

• Default: All disabled

BACK-UP CONTROL CHANNEL OPTION

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: If enabled, board 6 will be used to boost the control channel if the

normal control channel board is disabled, either by the user or by an alarm.

Boosted channel will be the "Substitute Control Channel."

Options:

• Enabled

• Disabled (default)

Page 2-22 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

REVERTIVE CONTROL CHANNEL OPTION

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: If enabled, board 1, or whichever board is assigned to boost the

control channel, will be used to boost the last call.

Options:

• Enabled

• Disabled (default)

SUBSTITUTE CONTROL CHANNEL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: To assign a control channel for use by board 6 when the control

channel equipment is disabled or is being used to boost the last voice call

Options:

• DISABLED: Default setting.

• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023

Use board 6 to boost the control channel onto the channel chosen in the

following situations:

• if the revertive control channel feature is enabled and the control channel

equipment is used to boost the last call; or

• if the backup control channel feature is enabled and the control channel

equipment is disabled (i.e., due to low PA power).

The substitute control channel number must be from the set of dedicated control

channels. The substitute control channel must be separated from the donor

control channel by at least three channels (90 kHz). If the revertive control

channel option is enabled, the substitute control channel must also be separated

from the boosted control channel by at least three channels (90 kHz).

If the revertive control channel option is disabled and the back-up control

channel option is enabled, the substitute control channel may be the same as the

boosted control channel. Since board 6 is used to transmit the substitute control

channel and since its output is not combined, the combiner tuning is not affected

by this channel choice.

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-23

(Continued)

NOTE: Interaction of Revertive Control Channel Option, Substitute Control

Channel, and Boosted Control Channel State When All Channels Busy:

If the Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled, then "All Channels Busy"

occurs when the control channel board is boosting the last call. Therefore, the

"Boosted Cntl Channel State When All Channels Busy" actually applies to board

6 when it is acting as the substitute cntl channel.

For example, if "State" is set to Disabled, then board 6 will not be brought up as

a substitute cntl channel even though it might otherwise be enabled. If "State" is

set to Directed Retry, board 6 will be used to send those messages.

BOOSTER LINK CHANNEL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: To identify the dedicated link channel used to signal between an

EAC-2000 and any listening EAC-2000s or EAC-IVs in a Multi-hop

configuration.

Options:

• Must be selected if:

- Multi-hop Feature is enabled.

• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023

BOOSTER LINK CHANNEL—PREVIOUS EAC

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Control

Channels Menu ⇒

Purpose: Identifies the dedicated link channel used to receive call setup

information from the previous EAC-IV in a Multi-hop configuration (only

appears if Multi-hop feature is set to Mode 3 or 4).

Options:

• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023

• Set parameter to channel assigned as booster link channel in the previous

EAC-IV in a Multi-hop chain.

Page 2-24 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

Main Menu ⇒System Parameters Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Donor Voice Channels (5970 Hz SAT) .............List

B Donor Voice Channels (6000 Hz SAT) .............List

C Donor Voice Channels (6030 Hz SAT) .............List

M Donor Voice Channels (Multiple SAT) ..............List

2 Boosted Voice Channel Position 2 .................361

3 Boosted Voice Channel Position 3 .................382

4 Boosted Voice Channel Position 4 .................403

5 Boosted Voice Channel Position 5 .................424

7 Boosted Voice Channel Position 7 .................445

8 Boosted Voice Channel Position 8 .................466

9 Boosted Voice Channel Position 9 .................487

10 Boosted Voice Channel Position 10 ................508

11 Boosted Voice Channel Position 11 ................529

Selection 1, Boosted Voice Channel 1, is displayed only

if the "Voice Channels Only" state is selected for "RF Board to Use

for Control Channel" on Control Channel Menu..

Purpose: Gives access to donor voice channel lists and boosted voice channels.

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-25

(Continued)

DONOR VOICE CHANNEL LISTS (5970–6030 Hz SAT)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Voice Channels

Menu ⇒, , or

Purpose: To display/change the list of donor voice channels, for the

corresponding SAT, which are scanned for mobile candidates to boost. When

scanned, a candidate is verified as having the correct SAT before being boosted.

Once the call is set up, the appropriate SAT is monitored.

Allowable Range:

• 1–799, 991–1023

Making Entries:

• Enter a given channel in only one list.

• Entering channels in lists:

- To add a channel: enter A [channel number] <CR>.

- To add 15 channels spaced 48 channels apart, precede channel

number with +. Remove unwanted channels.

- To remove a channel, enter R [channel number] <CR>.

- To add/remove multiple channels: enter A (add) or R (remove)

[multiple channel numbers separated by commas or spaces] <CR>.

• To change the SAT of a given channel, remove the channel from the old

SAT list, then add the channel to the new SAT list.

Page 2-26 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

DONOR VOICE CHANNELS LIST (Multiple SAT)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Voice Channels

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To display and/or change the list of donor voice channels for use in

a Multi-hop. This parameter is needed when a call may be boosted on various

boosted channels (with different SATs) of the previous EAC-2000, depending

on which donor originally set up the call.

Enter channels in this list ONLY when—

• The EAC-2000 is one of the Multi-hop units (not adjacent to primary

donor cell).

• One of the previous EAC-2000s in the chain has multiple possible donors.

BOOSTED VOICE CHANNEL POSITIONS 2–5, 7–11

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Voice Channels

Menu ⇒,

Purpose: To assign boosted voice channels.

Options:

• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023

NOTE:

• "Boosted voice channel 1" appears if RF board to use for control channel

is set to 0.

• When boosted voice channels 2–5 and 7–11 are entered, the associated

combiners must be retuned.

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-27

Main Menu ⇒System Parameters

Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Master Password ............................1234

B Restricted Password ..........................5678

C Console Time-out..................... 30 (x 10 Sec)

D Auto-dial Enable ...................... DISARMED

E Dial-up Phone Number 1 ................12163498684

F Dial-up Phone Number 2 .................... NONE

G Auto-dial Trials Max .......................... 10

H Delay Between Auto-dial Retries ........... 6 (x 10 Sec)

I Max Auto-dial Trial Period ............... 9 (x 10 Sec)

J Modem Setup ...................... PARAMETERS

K Modem Mobile MIN ....................1234567890

L Modem Mobile Power Step....................... 7

Purpose: Gives access to parameters associated with EAC-2000’s remote link

modem.

MASTER PASSWORD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To assign a master password unique to the site. When entered in

response to a password prompt, it unlocks the console unconditionally and

allows access to all system setup and monitor commands.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 12 characters

• Default: 1234

Page 2-28 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

RESTRICTED PASSWORD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To assign a unique restricted password for the site. When entered

in response to a password prompt, it unlocks the console but only allows the

user access to the following system monitoring commands: ALA, HEL, LOC,

RSS, SSS, DCH, DCS, SSR, and SCS.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 12 characters

• Default: 5678

CONSOLE TIME-OUT

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the maximum time the console will wait before locking during

periods of no keyboard activity.

Options:

• Displayed in multiples of 10 seconds

• Allowable range: 1–250 (10–2500 seconds)

• Default: 30 (300 seconds, or 5 minutes)

AUTO-DIAL ENABLE

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To arm/disarm the modem's ability to automatically dial a designated

telephone number when critical alarms exist.

Options:

•ARMED

• DISARMED (default)

NOTE: This function automatically disarms after a successful auto-dial (to

prevent duplicate alarm reporting) or after the designated maximum number of

auto-dial trials have been made without a successful connection.

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-29

(Continued)

DIAL-UP PHONE NUMBERS (1 AND 2)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To assign numbers to be dialed by the EAC-2000 when a critical

alarm condition occurs. The second dial-up phone number is typically used to

alert a different location.

NOTE: If both numbers are entered, the EAC-2000 will alternately dial

both until a successful connection is made and a report is transmitted.

The EAC-2000 will continue dialing until a successful connection is made

and a report is transmitted to both numbers.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 48 characters. The following

special entries allow user to specify non-displayable characters and EAC

delays in string:

^@-^_

^1-^9

causes EAC to delay .5 seconds

causes EAC to send an ASCII 0D hex (carriage return)

causes EAC to send non-displayable control characters

causes EAC to delay 1–9 seconds

causes EAC to send an ASCII 7E hex ("~" character)

causes EAC to send an ASCII 21 hex ("!" character)

causes EAC to send an ASCII 5E hex ("^" character)

NOTE: This allows any ASCII character 1–7E to be specified.

• Default:

–Dial-Up Phone #1: 12163498684 (Allen Telecom Systems, Systems

Engineering Department)

–Dial-Up Phone #2: None

Page 2-30 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

DIAL-UP PHONE NUMBERS (1 AND 2) (Continued)

EAC delays (specified by ~ and ^1 – ^9) cause the EAC to delay the specified

time before sending more characters (no characters are sent to the modem

during the delay time). This is not to be confused with "modem" delay

characters, which are actually sent to the modem, where the delay occurs.

Hayes compatible uses "," to specify a "pause" delay, which defaults to 2

seconds.

For example—

• Use ~ to give the modem time to process a command string; i.e., the ~ in

"~~~+++~~~ATH0!", the default hang-up string, specifies the 1.5 second delay

before and after the "+++" needed to guarantee a modem will enter

"command" mode.

• Use "," to specify dialing delays; i.e., in a dial string, "5493857,,,,1234"

specifies that the modem should dial 5493857, delay 8 seconds, then dial

1234. This might be used to dial a number, wait for an answer, then

overdial more digits (for example, a paging service).

AUTO-DIAL TRIALS MAX

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the maximum number of auto-dial trials the modem will

attempt if there are critical alarms to be reported and a connection cannot be

made.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–10 attempts

• Default: 10 attempts

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-31

(Continued)

DELAY BETWEEN AUTO-DIAL RETRIES

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the length of time the modem will wait after an unanswered

auto-dial call (critical alarm report) before trying again.

Options:

• Displayed in multiples of 10 seconds

• Allowable range: 0–250 (0–2500 seconds)

• Default: 6 (60 seconds)

MAX AUTO-DIAL TRIAL PERIOD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the maximum length of time the modem will wait before

disconnecting an unanswered auto-dial call.

Options:

• Displayed in multiples of 10 seconds

• Allowable range: 0–250 (0–2500 seconds)

• Default: 6 (60 seconds)

Page 2-32 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

MODEM SETUP

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Init String ............. AT!~AT!~AT&FX0E0\D2S0=1S10=20)M1:E0*H1!

B Dial Prefix String........................................ ATDT

C Hangup String ..................................~~~+++~~~ATH0!

D Local Port Baud Rate ...................................... 9600

E Local Port Comm Params . . . 7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop

F Remote Port Baud Rate .................................... 9600

G Remote Port Comm Params . . 7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop

H Remote Port Handshake ................................. CTS/RTS

Purpose: Gives access to parameters associated with setting up the modem.

INIT STRING

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the string used to initialize the modem. This string is sent

at power-up and after LOC or console timeout; changes will be effective for the

next session.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 48 characters.

• The following special entries allow the user to specify nondisplayable

characters and EAC delays in a string:

^@ to ^_

^1 to ^9

causes EAC to delay .5 seconds

causes EAC to send and ASCII 0D hex (carriage return)

causes EAC to send non-displayable control characters

causes EAC to delay 1–9 seconds

causes EAC to send an ASCII 7E hex ("~" character)

causes EAC to send an ASCII 21 hex ("!" character)

causes EAC to send an ASCII 5E hex ("^" character)

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-33

(Continued)

INIT STRING (Continued)

• Default string: AT!~AT!~AT&FX0E0\D2S0=1S10=20)M1:E0*H1!

Descriptions of default string elements:

AT!~AT!~ Sends "AT" carriage return, delays .5 seconds, then

sends it again. This allows modem two chances to

auto baud.

AT&F Causes modem to set factory defaults.

X0E0 Causes modem to use standard result codes, no echo

in command mode, both required by EAC-2000

interface software.

\D2 Causes modem CTS to be inactive when no carrier is

detected; CTS is used as handshake during connection.

S0=1 Causes modem to auto-answer after one ring.

S10=20 Causes modem carrier timeout to be 2 seconds.

Default timeout of 6 seconds falses with modem

mobile supplied dial tone.

)M1:E0*H1! This is the setup string recommended by Microcomm

for modems connected to cellular mobile, with these

exceptions:

- /N3 not specified (so still can dial with an older

modem)

- @M18 not specified (because modem mobile

works better at default level)

DIAL PREFIX STRING

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the string sent to the modem before the dial strings.

Allows modem to be set up differently for answer than for originate.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 16 characters.

• Special entries to specify EAC delays and nondisplayable characters are

the same as listed under INIT STRING.

• Default: ATDT

Page 2-34 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

HANG UP STRING

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒C

<CR>

Purpose: To specify the string sent to the modem after LOC or console

timeout to cause the connection to end.

Options:

• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 16 characters.

• Special entries to specify EAC delays and nondisplayable characters are

the same as listed under INIT STRING.

• Default: ~~~+++~~~ATHO!

(Hayes compatible modems enter command mode if they receive +++

without receiving any other characters 1.5 seconds before or after the

plusses. ATHO! causes the modem to hang up.)

LOCAL PORT BAUD RATE

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the baud rate used for the local port. This rate should be

kept higher than or equal to the remote baud rate. The EAC-2000 software

maximum transmit rate is about 1 character per millisecond, so effective

throughput does not increase beyond 9600. Changes for this parameter will take

effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the next session).

Options:

• Allowable entries: 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

• Default: 9600

NOTE:

• If the password bypass switch (see Volume 2, Section 1.2.1) is enabled

when the EAC-2000 is LOCed or reset, the local port operates at the

default baud rate.

• For some older revision controller boards, 2400 is the maximum baud rate

supported. If this is the case, the displayed options list will not include

4800, 9600, or 19200, and the default will be 2400. (The software

automatically determines the controller board revision.)

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-35

(Continued)

LOCAL PORT COMM PARAMS

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify parameters for the local communications port, including

number of data bits, parity, and number of stop bits. The two most commonly

used combinations are 7 even 1 stop and 8 no 1 stop. Changes for this

parameter will take effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the next session).

Options:

• Allowable entries:

- Data bits: 7 or 8

- Parity: Even, odd, mark, space, no transmit;

check or ignore receive parity

- Stop bits: 1 or 2

• Default: 7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop

NOTE: If the password bypass switch (see Volume 2, Section 1.2.1) is enabled

when the EAC-2000 is LOCed or reset, the local port operates with the default

comm parameters.

REMOTE PORT BAUD RATE

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the baud rate used for the connection to the modem.

Changes for this parameter will take effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the

next session).

This rate represents a maximum for the actual modem-to-modem link rate. For

example, with the remote port baud rate set to 9600, the Microcom modem can

connect at any standard rate less than or equal to 9600. The actual connection

rate is automatically determined by the modems according to capabilities of

each and the quality of the connection.

This parameter provides an easy way to force the modem to use a lower baud

rate (e.g., 2400 or 4800). If the EAC-2000 is dialed up with another high speed

modem, the modems tend to be optimistic in their initial determination of rate

and, if possible, connect at 7200 or even 9600. However, the cellular link may

not support these speeds very well, and the modems spend most of their time

retransmitting messages due to link errors.

Page 2-36 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

In these cases, higher throughput may be achieved if the remote port baud rate

is set to 4800 or 2400. Another way to limit the connection rate is to dial (or

answer) the modem with ah high speed modem whose serial rate is set to 4800

or 2400.

Options:

• Allowable entries: 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

• Default: 9600

NOTE: For some older revision controller boards, the maximum baud rate

supported is 2400. If this is the case, the displayed options list will not include

4800, 9600, or 19200, and the default will be 2400. (The software

automatically determines the controller board revision.)

REMOTE PORT COMM PARAMS

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify parameters for the local communications port, including

number of data bits, parity, and number of stop bits. The two most commonly

used combinations are 7 even 1 stop and 8 no 1 stop. Changes for this

parameter will take effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the next session).

Options:

• Allowable entries:

- Data bits: 7 or 8

- Parity: Even, odd, mark, space, no transmit;

check or ignore receive parity

- Stop bits: 1 or 2

• Default: 7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-37

(Continued)

REMOTE PORT HANDSHAKE

Entry:

Main

Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem

Control Menu ⇒Modem

Setup Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the mechanism for handshaking on the remote port.

Handshaking (i.e., the mechanism the modem uses to stop and start character

flow from the EAC-2000) is required in two situations:

(1) For "reliable" connections, the modem may have to stop character flow

when link errors occur. For reliable links, the modem automatically retransmits

character blocks until the receiving modem indicates the data was received with

no error.

(2) Often the connection rate is lower than the modem port rate. In fact, it is

desirable to set the modem port rate as high as the highest desired connection

rate, so that the modem port is not the limiting link.

Changes to this parameter will take effect after a loc or reset (i.e., during the

next session).

Options:

• Allowable entries: None, Xon/Xoff, CTS/RTS

• Default: CTS/RTS

NOTE: The default init strings for the modems include commands that cause

them to operate with CTS/RTS handshaking.

MODEM MOBILE MIN

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To enter the Mobile Identification Number (MIN) of the cellular

mobile used to establish the remote control link in the booster. The booster

uses the MIN to trap calls to and from the modem mobile and forces them to

stay on the donor voice channel and not occupy a boosted voice channel.

Options:

• Allowable entries: String of any 10 digits

• Default: 1234567890

Page 2-38 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

MODEM MOBILE POWER STEP

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Modem Control

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the mobile attenuation code (VMAC) for the mobile used to

establish the remote link. Modem mobile power should be kept as low as

possible to minimize front-end overload in the booster receivers.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–7

- 0 = full power (3 watts)

- Each step corresponds to a 4 dB decrease in power (7 = 28 dB

below full power)

• Default: 7

EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-39

Main Menu ⇒System Parameters Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold .................. -60 dBm

B Hand-in Threshold ................................... -90 dBm

C Multi-Donor Activation Threshold ......................DISABLED

D Hand-back Threshold ................................ -100 dBm

E Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................. 0

F Hand-back Mobile Power Step ............................... 0

G RSSI Averaging Speed ............................... MEDIUM

H Delay Between Hand-in Attempts .......................... 5 Sec

I Station Power Class Selective Boosting . . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSES

Purpose: Gives access to the parameters associated with the hand-off algorithm

used by the EAC-2000.

NOTE: The thresholds chosen for Selections A–D should be in

descending order (i.e., A should always be higher than B, etc.), as

illustrated above.

MOBILE DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL THRESHOLD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which the EAC-2000 will reduce

the power of the mobile.

Options:

• Allowable range: -120 dBm to -20 dBm

• Default: -60 dBm

• To disable: 0

NOTE: The EAC-2000 receivers have state-of-the-art intermod performance.

Nevertheless, signal strengths above -60 dBm (which may occur if mobiles

drive close to the booster location) may cause intermodulation interference to

weak mobiles on the other booster channels. To handle this possibility, the

EAC-2000 monitors the RSSIs on the reverse voice channels (i.e., from the

boosted mobiles). If the RSSI exceeds the Mobile Dynamic Power Control

Threshold, a power control message is sent to the mobile, causing it to lower

its power output by 3 VMAC steps (12 dBm) from the current setting. This is

triggered each time the threshold is exceeded.

Page 2-40 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

MOBILE DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL THRESHOLD (Continued)

For example, if a mobile running full power (VMAC = 0) comes close to the

booster, the power will be cut back to VMAC = 3. If the mobile still exceeds

the threshold, the power will be lowered to VMAC = 6, then finally to VMAC

= 7 (the minimum power setting). If the RSSI from the mobile with VMAC =

7 exceeds the threshold, a Reverse Channel High RSSI Alarm will be logged.

Mobiles that have been powered down by the EAC-2000 will be powered up

when the mobile RSSI decreases to -90 dBm unless the hand-back threshold is

>-90 dBm In this case, the power up message will be sent when the mobile

RSSI reaches the hand-back threshold.

HAND-IN THRESHOLD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which a mobile on one of the

donor voice channels becomes a candidate for boosting.

Options:

• Allowable range: -120 dBm to -20 dBm

• Default: -90 dBm

• To disable: 0

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-41

(Continued)

MULTI-DONOR ACTIVATION THRESHOLD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which a mobile being boosted will

trigger transmission of a boosted/donor channel relationship message to any

listening Multi-Donor Units (MDUs). (To enable operation with MDUs, this

threshold must be set at a level that will trigger data transmission—and the

subsequent untranslate action at the MDU—before the mobile gets too weak to

handle at the EAC-2000. Once sent, the relationship stays in effect at the MDU

for an ample time period. The strength of the mobile at the adjacent cell site

will determine when translation occurs, if at all.)

Options:

• -120 to -20 dBm

• 0 DISABLED: Default (appropriate if no MDUs are installed in

adjacent cell sites)

• A ALWAYS (sent whenever call setup does not depend on signal

level)

Setting the Level:

• If set too high, unnecessary transmissions to the MDUs will occur.

• If set higher than the hand-in threshold, a mobile may be handed from the

boosting EAC-2000 back to one cell site, then to another cell site, and

then picked up again by the EAC-2000.

• Reasonable setting: Half-way between hand-in threshold and hand-back

threshold.

NOTE: This parameter does not affect EAC-2000 hand-ins (controlled by

donor voice channel lists and hand-in threshold) or EAC-2000 hand-backs

(controlled by hand-back threshold). It only controls boosted/donor channel

relationship message transmission, which in turn affects cellular system-

generated hand-offs aided by the MDUs.

Page 2-42 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

HAND-BACK THRESHOLD

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which a mobile being boosted

becomes a candidate for returning to the original donor site voice channel.

Options:

• Allowable range: -120 dBm to -20 dBm

• Default: -100 dBm

• To disable: 0

HAND-IN MOBILE POWER STEP

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to mobiles being

boosted to establish the power step.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–7

- 0 = full power (3 watts)

- Each step corresponds to a 4 dB decrease in power (7 = 28 dB

below full power)

• Default: 0

HAND-BACK MOBILE POWER STEP

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to mobiles during

hand-back attempts, which establishes the power level of mobiles handed back

to donor cell.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–7

- 0 = full power (3 watts)

- Each step corresponds to a 4 dB decrease in power (7 = 28 dB

below full power)

• Default: 0

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-43

(Continued)

RSSI AVERAGING SPEED

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To select the algorithm used to average the RSSI readings taken on

the channels in the Donor Voice Channel Lists.

Mobiles operating on these channels are operating directly with the donor. The

channels are continuously scanned, and the readings are averaged and compared

to the hand-in threshold in order to identify mobiles that need boosting as they

drive into the boosted coverage area with a call already in progress.

Options:

• 1 SLOW:

- Causes the average RSSI to reflect the last 10–20 readings.

- Provides for an average that is extremely immune to

fluctuations in the signals but will require 10–20 seconds to

identify a hand-in candidate.

- Appropriate for reducing unsuccessful hand-in attempts for

installations that have relatively few (< 20) donor voice

channels and in which the terrain is relatively flat, such that

the EAC-2000 can "see" the mobiles for a long time before

they reach the hand-in threshold.

• 2 MEDIUM:

- Causes the average RSSI to reflect the last 4–8 readings.

- Provides for a compromise between immunity to signal

fluctuations and fast identification of hand-in candidates.

- DEFAULT setting.

• 3 FAST:

- Causes the average RSSI to reflect the last 2–5 readings.

- Provides for the least immunity to fluctuations but the fastest

possible identification of hand-in candidates.

- Appropriate for installations with a large number (> 60) of

donor voice channels or for installations with rugged terrain

where mobiles may suddenly "appear" to the EAC-2000 and

need boosting quickly.

Page 2-44 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

DELAY BETWEEN HAND-IN ATTEMPTS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the amount of time between hand-in attempts on a mobile

identified as a candidate for boosting (i.e., when signal exceeds hand-in

threshold).

When a hand-in candidate is identified, a hand-in is attempted. The attempt will

be unsuccessful if the signal at the mobile is stronger from the donor than from

the EAC-2000. After an unsuccessful attempt, the EAC-2000 waits the period

set in the "Delay Between Hand-in Attempts" parameter before it resumes

scanning of that channel. This prevents repeated back-to-back hand-in attempts

on the candidate.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–250 seconds

• Default: 5 seconds

NOTE: The total delay between repeated hand-in attempts on the same channel

will be equal to the SAT Fade Time-out (the time it takes to perform an

unsuccessful attempt), plus the Delay Between Hand-in Attempts, plus the time

it takes for the RSSI averaging to come back up (2–4 seconds for the MEDIUM

setting).

STATION POWER CLASS SELECTIVE BOOSTING

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Thresholds and Power

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: Allows EAC-2000 to be configured to boost only lower-power units.

This would be useful in situations where the EAC-2000 is deployed primarily

to enhance portable coverage, but where it might also capture mobiles that do

not need boosting (i.e., a convention center or mall close to a major highway).

Options:

• BOOST ALL CLASSES

• BOOST I-III ONLY

• BOOST I-II ONLY

• BOOST I ONLY

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-45

Main Menu ⇒System Parameters

Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Donor RSSI ............................ -80 dBm

B SAT Fade Time-out ......................... 5 Sec

C Max Num of Hand-Back Attempts per Call .......... 10

D Minimum Delay Between Hand-back Attempts ..... 15 Sec

Purpose: Gives access to parameters associated with the call disconnect

function.

DONOR RSSI

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Disconnect

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To establish a minimum RF signal level the booster should expect

from the donor cell during a call. If the signal on the Donor Voice Channel in

use falls below this level, the booster will end the call.

Options:

• Allowable range: -100 dBm to -20 dBm

• Default: -80 dBm

• To disable: 0

Page 2-46 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

SAT FADE TIME-OUT

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Disconnect

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the time period the system will wait before terminating an

established call when proper SAT is not detected from a mobile.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–250 seconds

• Default: 5 seconds

Setting the Time Period:

• A setting of > 15 seconds may cause calls to continue to be boosted when

no mobile is on the channel.

• A setting of > 5 seconds will affect the distribution of reasons for call

terminations reported by the DCS command.

•Do not set to > minimum delay between hand-back attempts (except for

system testing). Hand-back attempts are performed at that interval, and

after a hand-back attempt, the mobile gets a fresh SAT fade timeout

interval.

MAX NUM OF HAND-BACK ATTEMPTS PER CALL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Disconnect

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the maximum number of hand-back attempts made on mobiles

identified as candidates for hand-back (i.e., signal below hand-back threshold).

If the hand-back is not successful before this maximum number is reached, the

booster assumes that the mobile is driving away from donor cell site and

maintains the call as long as possible.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–250 attempts

• Default: 10

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-47

(Continued)

MINIMUM DELAY BETWEEN HAND-BACK ATTEMPTS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Disconnect

Control Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the time delay between hand-back attempts. This time delay,

along with the Hand-back Threshold and the Max Num of Hand-back Attempts

per Call, controls the hand-off of calls being boosted back to the donor cell.

The signal level from mobiles being boosted is constantly monitored. If it falls

below the Hand-back Threshold, a hand-back attempt is performed. If the call

is not successfully handed back to the donor (i.e., if the EAC-2000 still provides

a better signal than the donor), the EAC-2000 waits the time period set in the

Minimum Delay Between Hand-back Attempts parameter before again

monitoring the mobile signal. This spaces out hand-back attempts on a mobile

that has fallen below the hand-back threshold but cannot yet be handed back.

(This is important because the hand-back attempt causes a minimal audio

interruption.)

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–250 seconds

• Default: 15 seconds

NOTE: Do not set lower than SAT fade timeout (see note under SAT

fade timeout).

Main Menu ⇒System Parameters

Menu ⇒

Menu:

C Mobile RSSI > THRESHOLD Parameters ........... C1

D Hand-back/Grab-back Control .................... D1

E Recommendations

Purpose: To provide a mechanism for tailoring EAC-2000 operation for

specific switch manufacturers. The specific timings and algorithms being

controlled are too detailed to describe, and virtually impossible to set,

independently. Instead, combinations that have proven successful or desirable

are grouped together and referred to as "Options." In the future, as other useful

combinations are identified, more options will be added.

Page 2-48 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

(Continued)

MOBILE RSSI > THRESHOLD PARAMETERS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Call Processing

Parameters Menu ⇒

Options:

• (1) Option C1 - Standard Call Processing

HAND-BACK/GRAB-BACK CONTROL

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.

Menu ⇒Call Processing

Parameters Menu ⇒

Purpose:

Options:

• (1) Option D1 - Standard Call Processing

• (2) Option D2 - Dont Mute Reverse Carrier

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-49

2.6 Alarms Menu

Main Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point ...........6 dB

B PA to Antenna High Loss Alarm Point.............9 dB

C PA Temp - High Alarm Point ............... 90 Deg C

D PA Temp - Fan Activation Point ............. 60 Deg C

E PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point ......... 90 Deg C

F Mobile Power Control Causes PA Power Cutback DISABLED

G +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point ..... 23.0 Volts

H +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 23.0 Volts

I +12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 10.0 Volts

J +6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ............5.4 Volts

K External Analog Inputs .............. ALARM POINTS

L External Digital Inputs .............. ALARM STATES

M External Digital Outputs .................... STATES

N Critical Alarms ................ALARMS REPORTED

O RSSI - Alarms .................... ALARM POINTS

Purpose: Gives access to parameters associated with generating alarm conditions

(conditions, such as temperature extremes or low battery voltage, that cause EAC-2000 to

maintain a log of the alarms that occur) or "critical" (the EAC-2000 will automatically dial

a telephone number to report the alarm).

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the alarm threshold for the return loss on the M1 antenna

port. When sufficient power is transmitted, the M1 antenna forward power

reading is compared to the reverse power reading. If forward minus reverse

power is equal or less than the Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point

parameter, an alarm is generated. This is useful for detecting faulty antenna or

cable conditions.

With laboratory quality 50 ohm loads attached, the sensor will indicate 16 to 18

dB return loss. The default setting of 6 dB corresponds to a VSWR of 2. That

is, with the alarm point set to 6 dB, an alarm will be generated if the VSWR

is higher than 2.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), 1 to 20 dB

• Default: 6 dB

Page 2-50 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the threshold for the PA to antenna high loss alarm. At

power-on, and once per hour during operation, a test is conducted. Because the

test requires that one PA at a time be keyed, the test is conducted only when no

calls are up. (If a new call is detecting during the test, the test is aborted.)

Each nondisabled board/PA is individually keyed, and the PA power reading is

compared to the M2 (for board 6) or M1 (for all other boards) forward power

reading.

If the PA power minus the antenna power is equal to or greater than the

threshold, an alarm is generated. This indicates problems with the combiner,

duplexer, or cabling. A mistuned combiner will cause these alarms to occur.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED—TEST IS NOT CONDUCTED), 1 to

20 dB

• Default: 9 dB

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To define the upper PA temperature limit. Temperatures above this

limit cause an alarm to be logged.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–100°C

• Default: 90°C

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To identify the temperature that will cause the heat exchanger fan to

be activated. The temperature must drop at least 8oC below the fan activation

point before the fan will turn off.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0–100°C

• Default: 60°C

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-51

DYNAMIC FORWARD POWER CONTROL ALGORITHM:

The next three parameters control the dynamic forward power control algorithm.

This algorithm dynamically adjusts the forward PA output power step according to:

• PA temperature

• Mobile VMAC power level

• +28 volt supply voltage

Each of the three controlling parameters can be individually disabled and adjusted.

The algorithm is not cumulative—for example, if the PA temperature is too high,

and the +28 volt supply is too low, the PAs will be reduced by only one step, not

two. Also, the PA low power alarm threshold is effectively reduced when the

algorithm has caused PA step reduction. That is, a FORWARD PA POWER LOW

ALARM WILL not be caused by this algorithm (unless the power measured at a

particular step is lower than it should be at that step).

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify one of the three parameters that control the Dynamic

Forward Power Control algorithm.

If the temperature on a forward PA reaches the PA temp - PA Power Cutback

Point, that PA's power step will be lowered one step below the user-specified

Forward PA Power Step. Normally, this will result in significant cooling.

When that PA's temperature drops 8oC below the cutback temperature, the

normal operating power step will be restored (unless one of the other

mechanisms has imposed a power cutback).

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), 1–100oC

• Default: 90oC

Page 2-52 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the second of the three parameters that control the

Dynamic Forward Power Control algorithm. If enabled, this causes the forward

PA power step to be reduced in conjunction with the mobile power reduction

(which, in turn, is controlled by the Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold).

If enabled, for each two-step reduction in mobile power, the forward PA power

is reduced one step. This mechanism is commonly employed to reduce the total

amount of RF power in the system to the minimum, which statistically lowers

the carrier to interference ratio.

Options:

• ENABLED

• DISABLED (Default)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the third of the three parameters that control the Dynamic

Forward Power Control algorithm.

If the +28 volt supply voltage as measured at the controller board is equal to or

lower than the +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point parameter, all

forward PA power steps will be lowered one step below the user specified

Forward PA Power Step parameter. This will result in significantly less current

drain. When the voltage goes back up by 1 volt, the normal operating power

step will be restored (unless one of the other mechanisms has imposed a power

cutback).

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), .1 TO 50.9 VOLTS

• Default: 23.0 VOLTS

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-53

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the +28 volt supply voltage alarm threshold. An alarm

is generated if the +28 volt reading is equal to or lower than this voltage. The

+28 volt is maintained by the system power supply and, optionally, by backup

batteries. The EAC-2000 will continue to function down to about 19 volts.

Normally, this alarm is used to signal loss of ac power. If set close to +28

volts, an alarm will be generated very quickly after the ac is lost. The voltage

may be lowered to cause alarms to generate after some amount of battery

discharge.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), .1 TO 50.9 VOLTS

• Default: 23.0 VOLTS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the +12 volt supply voltage alarm threshold. An alarm

is generated if the +12 volt reading is equal or lower than this voltage. This

alarm indicates a problem with the +28 to +12 volt dc-dc converter, harness

wiring, or connectors.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), .1 TO 14.9 VOLTS

• Default: 10.0 VOLTS

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Purpose: To specify the +6 volt supply voltage alarm threshold. An alarm is

generated if the +6 volt reading is equal to or lower than this voltage. This

alarm indicates a problem with the +28 to +6 volt dc-dc converter, harness

wiring, or connectors.

Options:

• Allowable range: 0 (disabled), .1 to 9.9 volts

• Default: 5.4 volts

Page 2-54 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Menu:

PA 1–6 Cage:

1 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

2 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

3 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

4 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

PA 7–11 Cage:

5 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

6 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

7 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

8 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V

Purpose: Allows setting of the alarm conditions for the external analog inputs

available on a connector at the back of each PA cage. Up to four analog inputs

per PA cage may be connected.

Options:

• Allowable entries:

(0) DISABLED

(1) ABOVE

(2) BELOW

• The input alarm points are individually controllable; if above or below is

selected, a threshold between .1 and 5.0 volts may be specified.

• Default: (0) Disabled

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-55

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Menu:

PA 1–6 Cage:

1 Ext. Digital Input 1 - Alarm State . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

2 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

3 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

4 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

PA 7–11 Cage:

5 Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

6 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

7 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

8 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW

Purpose: Allows setting of the alarm conditions for the external digital inputs

available on a connector at the back of each PA cage. Up to four digital inputs

per PA cage may be connected.

Options:

• Allowable entries:

(0) DISABLED

(1) HIGH

(2) LOW

• Default: (0) DISABLED

Page 2-56 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Menu:

PA 1–6 Cage:

1 Ext. Digital Output 1 State ............. LOW

2 Ext. Digital Output 2 State ............. LOW

3 Ext. Digital Output 3 State ............. LOW

4 Ext. Digital Output 4 State ............. LOW

PA 7–11 Cage:

5 Ext. Digital Output 1 State ............. LOW

6 Ext. Digital Output 2 State ............. LOW

7 Ext. Digital Output 3 State ............. LOW

8 Ext. Digital Output 4 State ............. LOW

Purpose: Allows setting of the state for the external digital outputs available

on a connector at the back of each PA cage. Up to four digital outputs per PA

cage may be connected. The outputs may be used to control external equipment

via the EAC-2000 remote link. Also, options (1) and (2) support using external

monitoring equipment to be connected to the EAC-2000.

Options:

• Allowable entries:

(0) LOW

(1) LOW IF CRITICAL ALARM EXISTS

(2) HIGH IF CRITICAL ALARM EXISTS

(3) HIGH

• Default: (0) LOW

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-57

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Menu:

A BOARD OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM ........ CRITICAL

B Board ROM Alarm...................... CRITICAL

C Board Calibration Memory Alarm ........... CRITICAL

D Serial Data Link Alarm................... CRITICAL

E Personality Mismatch Alarm ............... CRITICAL

F Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm ............... CRITICAL

G RVS PA Pwr Low Alarm ................. CRITICAL

H RSSI Alarm.......................... LOG ONLY

I PA Out-of-Service Alarm ................. CRITICAL

J PA Temp - High Alarm ................. LOG ONLY

K PA Power - Low Alarm .................. CRITICAL

L PA to Antenna High Loss Alarm ............ CRITICAL

M Antenna Ret Loss Alarm.................. CRITICAL

N ROM Alarm .......................... CRITICAL

O RAM Alarm .......................... CRITICAL

P NOVRAM Alarm ....................... CRITICAL

Q SAT Detector Alarm .................... CRITICAL

R Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm ......... CRITICAL

S External Analog Input Alarm .............. LOG ONLY

T External Digital Input - Alarms ............ LOG ONLY

Purpose: Displays the alarms of which the EAC-2000 maintains a log. Any

of the alarms can be set to "Log Only" (the EAC-2000 enters the alarm in its

log) or "Critical" (the EAC-2000 logs the alarm and also automatically dials a

designated telephone number to report the alarm). To set an alarm, select the

letter in front of the alarm and select the state. (See Volume 2, Section 3.8 for

alarm descriptions.)

Page 2-58 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒

Menu:

A Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point DISABLED

B Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point . . -80 dBm

C Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point . DISABLED

Purpose: Displays the RSSI signal levels that generate alarms.

DONOR CONTROL CHANNEL RSSI - HIGH ALARM POINT

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms

Menu ⇒RSSI Alarms

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the upper level for RSSI reading on the forward control

channel. If the signal exceeds this level, an alarm is logged.

Options:

• Allowable range: -100 to -20 dBm

• Default: Disabled

DONOR CONTROL CHANNEL RSSI - LOW ALARM POINT

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms

Menu ⇒RSSI Alarms

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the lower level for RSSI reading on the forward control

channel. If the signal falls below this level, an alarm is logged.

Options:

• Allowable range: -100 to -20 dBm

• Default: -80 dBm

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-59

(Continued)

DONOR VOICE CHANNEL RSSI - HIGH ALARM POINT

Entry:

Main Menu ⇒Alarms

Menu ⇒RSSI Alarms

Menu ⇒

Purpose: To set the upper level for RSSI reading on the forward voice

channel. If the signal exceeds this level, an alarm is logged.

Options:

• Allowable range: -100 to -20 dBm

• Default: Disabled

2.7 Set Defaults

Main Menu ⇒

Purpose: To return all parameters to default settings.

CAUTION! Using selection E, Set Defaults, will default all

parameters, including channels. Be sure to record ALL data before

invoking this selection so that parameters may be reentered.

Page 2-60 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

6HFWLRQ 6\VWHP0RQLWRULQJ&RPPDQGV

3.1 Introduction

The EAC-2000 software allows the operator to obtain information on the status and

performance of the system through a variety of simple commands. Each command is

entered from the command entry level prompt (>). The following commands are described

in this section of the manual:

• SSS (Show System Status) Command

• SCS (Show Call Status) Command

• RSS (RSSI Report) Command

• SSR (Scanned RSSI Report) Command

• PWR (PA Power Display) Command

• SAT (SAT Report) Command

• ALA (Alarm Report) Command

• DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command

• DCH (Display Call History) Command

• TIM (Time Display and Change) Command

• MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command

• REV (Show Hardware Revisions) Command

3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter SSS <CR>.

Purpose: Lists a one-page report of selected EAC-2000 operating parameters, along with

the conditions of inputs that are monitored, then returns to the command entry level. Figure

3-1 shows a sample SSS report. Items listed in the report are described on the following

pages.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-1

3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command (Continued)

Figure 3-1. Sample SSS Report

>SSS

BOARD/PA 12345678 91011

BD MODE CNTL VOICE STBY STBY STBY SCAN STBY STBY DSABL DSABL DSABL

BD TYPE AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS NONE NONE NONE

DON. CHAN 333 84 63 105 84 329 105 84

BOOST CHAN 319 112 133 154 175 105 196 217

DON. RSSI -64 -650 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100

MOB. RSSI <-120 -87 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120

MOB.VMAC 00000000 000

ANT. SEL M1 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2

RVS PA SET +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20

RVS PA PWR <0 +21 <0 <0 <0 <0 <0 <0

FWD PA MODE KEYED KEYED OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

FWD PA STEP 0 0 0 0 0000 000

FWD PA PWR +46 +46 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0

FWD PA TEMP 46 42 40 34 34 34 36 38 0 0 0

M1 ANT PWR FWD: +44 REFL: +0

Press RETURN when ready for more. . .

SUPPLY VOLTAGES +28V +12V +6V

AT PA1-6 CAGE: 27.1 12.0 6.0

AT PA7-11 CAGE: 27.1 12.0 6.0

AT CNTLR BOARD: 12.1 6.0

EXT.ANALOG VOLTAGES: XAD1 XAD2 XAD3 XAD4

AT PA1-6 CAGE: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

AT PA7-11 CAGE: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

EXT. DIGITAL INPUTS: XIN1 XIN2 XIN3 XIN4

AT PA1-6 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOW

AT PA7-11 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOW

EXT. DIGITAL OUTPUTS XOUT1 XOUT2 XOUT3 XOUT4

AT PA1-6 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOW

AT PA7-11 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOW

EAC SERIAL NUMBER: SOFTWARE VERSION 20.03

Page 3-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command (Continued)

Reported Items:

• BD MODE: Operating mode of each IF board (Standby, Control, Voice, Scan, or

Disabled).

Status Indicates

CNTL

VOICE

STBY

SCAN

DSABL

Control

Voice

Standby

Scan (Scanning donor voice channels)

Disabled (Board disabled by user, or alarm

has occurred on board)

( If a board or PA is disabled, the matching element will

not be used by the system. If a forward PA is out of service due

to an alarm, the associated forward board will be Standby.)

• BD TYPE: RF board type as read from the actual hardware. The installed RF boards

have a built-in personality identifier which is read and reported.

– Possible board types: JTACS, AMPS or ETACS

– NONE=No board is detected, or there is a hardware communication problem

between the RF board and the controller. (The channel display for that board

will be blank.)

• DONOR CHAN: Forward transmit / reverse receive.

• BOOST CHAN: Forward transmit / reverse receive (blank if no board is installed).

• DONOR RSSI: Current RSSI from donor.

• MOBILE RSSI: Current RSSI from mobile.

• MOBILE VMAC: Current power level of mobile. 0 = Max power, 1 = 4 dB down,

etc.

• ANTENNA SEL: Antenna selected via the SET command.

• RVS PA SET: Power level setting of the reverse PA.

• RVS PA PWR: Power reading of the reverse PA.

• FWD PA MODE: "KEYED," "OFF," or "DSABL."

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-3

3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command (Continued)

• FWD PA STEP: Power level step (0=maximum power; 1=down 4 dB, etc.).

• FWD PA PWR: Power output reading of the forward PA output (ahead of combiner).

• FWD PA TEMP: Temperature reading of the PA associated with the board. A

hyphen (-) indicates the PA has no temperature sensor.

• M1 ANT PWR: Forward and reflected power readings at the M1 antenna sensor.

Represents PA 1–5, 7–11 forward powers after combiner and duplexer loss.

• SUPPLY VOLTAGES: +28, +12, and +6 volt supply voltage readings at various

monitoring points.

• EXT. ANALOG VOLTAGES: Voltages at the external alarm/control connector on

each PA cage. Range 0 to 5 volts.

• EXT. DIGITAL INPUTS: The state (LOW or HIGH) of the digital inputs on the

external alarm/control connector. LOW = nothing connected, or less than 2 volts.

• EXT. DIGITAL OUTPUTS: State of the digital outputs on the external alarm/control

connector. LOW = pulled to ground; HIGH = open collector off.

Page 3-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter SCS <CR>.

Purpose: Displays a short report of the current status of the RF boards. The system then

pauses but continues to monitor the status. If the status of a board pair changes, a new

report will be displayed. This command is especially useful in monitoring call activity in

the boosted coverage area. Figure 3-2 shows a sample SCS report.

Figure 3-2. Sample SCS Report

>scs

BD STATUS DONOR BOOST MOBILE REASON

CHAN CHAN VMAC

1 CONTROL 333 319 - VOICE CHANNEL AVAILABLE

2 VOICE 84 112 0 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL MIN=1231231234

3 STANDBY - - - MOBILE RELEASE DETECTED

4 STANDBY - - - MOBILE RSSI < THRESHOLD

5 STANDBY - - - MOBILE SAT FADED

6 SCAN - - - SYSTEM SETUP

7 STANDBY - - - UNSUCCESSFUL SETUP

8 STANDBY - - - SYSTEM SETUP

9 DISABLED - - - SYSTEM SETUP

10 DISABLED - - - SYSTEM SETUP

11 DISABLED - - - SYSTEM SETUP

Commands to Use During SCS:

Command Action

R or rDisplay the board RSSIs.

P or pDisplay PA power readings.

S or sDisplay board SAT readings.

H or hHold screen update (to be used if heavy call activity is

causing information to go by too quickly). Use any

keystroke to resume normal screen updating.

T or tTurn time stamp on or off.

A or aLists number of handback attempts that have occurred

since call began or, if board is STANDBY, the total

number for the least call on that board.

Space or <CR> Update screen (even if no status change has occurred).

<ESC> or

<CTRL> Z Exit the SCS command and return to the > prompt.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-5

3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command (Continued)

Items Listed for Each Board Pair:

• STATUS: Current usage of the board: Standby, Control, Voice, or Disabled.

- Board 1 is normally used to boost the control channel.

- Boards 2-5 and 7-11 are used to boost the voice channels (on

standby when no call is up).

- Board 6 is used to scan (sometimes as CNTL).

-Disabled means the board or the associated forward PA has been

disabled by the user or because of an alarm.

-Pre-voice occurs briefly at the beginning of mobile-originated or

mobile-answered calls. This status occurs after the initial mobile

access or page response on the reverse control channel and lasts

until the voice channel assignment on the forward control channel.

• MOBILE VMAC: Current mobile power setting. Dynamic power control

actions can be monitored by watching this column.

- 0 = Maximum power

- 7 = Minimum power (-28 dB)

• DONOR CHAN: Donor channel: control or voice. This is the input channel

of the forward board and the output channel of the reverse board.

• BOOST CHAN: Boosted channel: control or voice. This is the output

channel of the forward board and the input channel of the reverse board.

• REASON: Reason for the Status shown. Possible reasons are explained in

the following chart.

Page 3-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command (Continued)

Reason Given For ... Indicates . . .

SYSTEM SETUP Status Board status was set at power up, after restore-to-service, or as

result of SET command.

MOBILE ORIGINATED

CALL

Voice System detected a mobile-originated call.

MOBILE ANSWERED

CALL

Voice System detected a land-originated call.

MOBILE RSSI >

THRESHOLD

Voice Mobile RSSI exceeded the hand-in threshold.

MOBILE RELEASE

DETECTED

Standby (when

formerly Voice)

Mobile release (1.8 seconds of signaling tone) was detected.

MOBILE SAT FADED Standby (when

formerly Voice)

Mobile SAT was invalid for the SAT Fade Timeout period.

MOBILE RSSI <

THRESHOLD

Standby (when

formerly Voice)

Mobile RSSI receiver fell below the hand-back threshold.

DONOR RSSI <

THRESHOLD

Standby (when

formerly Voice)

Signal received from donor by forward receiver fell below donor

RSSI threshold.

UNSUCCESSFUL SETUP

(for RSSI candidates)

Standby (when

formerly Voice) EAC-2000 unable to send mobile to boosted voice channel. (After

a call setup is attempted, a boost path is set up and SAT from the

mobile is monitored. If SAT does not verify within SAT Fade

Timeout, call is ended. This means the mobile did not take hand-off

message from booster, but remained on donor voice channel. This

indicates that even though the mobile was identified as a candidate

for boosting, the mobile was still in good contact with its donor cell

site.)

SETUP ABORTED Standby (when

formerly Voice)

Setup attempt aborted before any hand-off messages were sent to

the mobile. (Occurs occasionally on RSSI > Threshold calls if a

mobile-originated or -answered call candidate is detected during

setup process. In this case, the EAC-2000 will abort the RSSI call

to handle the mobile-originated or -answered call, which is higher

priority. Normally the RSSI candidate will be reidentified and

handled shortly after the other call is completed.)

ALARM DETECTED Disabled Either a board or the associated PA is disabled because of an

alarm. (More information about a disabled board can be obtained

from the ALA command.)

VOICE CHANNELS

LOADED; VOICE

CHANNEL AVAILABLE

Standby; Control For the CNTL board only, indicates if EAC-2000 channels

available. (The cntl board switches to Standby when all voice

channels are loaded only if the Control Channel State During All

Channels Busy parameter is set to OFF. For all other settings of

the Control Channel State parameter, the CNTL board remains

active when all voice channels are loaded.)

Continued . . .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-7

3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command (Continued)

Reason Given For ... Indicates . . .

NO SERVICE ON

DONOR CONTROL

CHANNEL

Standby; Control System data receiver listening to the forward control channel data

stream from the donor cell site cannot obtain or maintain word

synchronization. (The CNTL board switches to Standby when there

is No Service on Donor Control Channel only if the Control Channel

State During All Channels Busy parameter is set to OFF. For all

other settings of the Control Channel State parameter, the CNTL

board remains active even if no donor control channel is received.)

DEDICATED CONTROL

BACKUP Standby (CNTL

board only) Sometimes listed for a short duration after reset, automatic restore-

to-service attempt, or switchover from board 6 boosting the control

channel.

CALL TRANSFERRED Standby (CNTL

board only)

Voice call being boosted by the CNTL board was transferred to a

voice board. (The EAC-2000 CNTL channel always goes through

this state on a call transfer, but SCS may not show it every time

because the board switches to CNTL very quickly.)

PAGE RESPONSE

DETECTED

Pre-Voice Mobile-answered call was detected (by monitoring the reverse

control channel data stream).

MOBILE ACCESS

DETECTED

Pre-Voice Mobile-originated call was detected (by monitoring the reverse

control channel data stream).

FALSE PRELIMINARY

SETUP

Standby (when

just previously

Pre-Voice)

Although a mobile access or page response was detected, the system

did not assign a voice channel within 5 seconds. (Could be caused

by a busy system. Some false accesses will also be decoded from

noise. Occasional False Preliminary Setups are no cause for

concern. For more information about why the false preliminary

setup occurred, escape out of SCS and type MIN; the exact reason

will be given here.)

UNSUCCESSFUL

PRELIMINARY SETUP

(Multi-Hop systems only)

Standby (when

just previously

Pre-Voice)

EAC-2000 unable to identify boosted channel chosen by the

previous EAC-2000 in the chain. (Could be caused by incorrect

channels entered for the Booster Link Channels on this or the

previous EAC-2000, by interference on the booster link channel, or

by the previous EAC-2000 having no voice channels available at the

time of the call or incorrect Multi-Hop Mode parameter setting.)

Page 3-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.4 RSS (RSSI Report) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter RSS.

Purpose: Repeatedly lists the mobile RSSI readings on the installed boards (a header

followed by a continuously updated display of the RSSI readings). To stop the display and

return to the > prompt, hit ESC or <CTRL> Z. Figure 3-3 shows a sample list of RSSI

readings. To display the donor RSSI readings, enter RSS D at the > prompt.

Figure 3-3. Sample List of RSSI Readings

>rss

BOARD/PA 1 2 3 4567891011

MOBILE RSSI <-120 -87 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120

>rss d

BOARD/PA 1 2 3 4567891011

DONOR RSSI -64 -65 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100

Mobile RSSI reflects the signal strength being received from the mobile at the M1 or M2

antenna connector; report range is -120 to -20 dBm.

• Mobile RSSI for the board boosting the control channel (defaults to board 1) will most

often indicate <-120, since mobile transmissions on the reverse control channel are

very brief (about 100 milliseconds).

• Mobile RSSI for boards involved in a call will vary according to the subscriber

location.

• Mobile RSSI for board 6 will vary as the board is used to scan channels.

• Mobile RSSI for standby or disabled boards will indicate <-120.

• Mobile RSSI for positions with no board installed will be blank.

Donor RSSI reflects the signal strength being received from the donor as measured at the

D1 antenna connector; report range is -100 to -20 dBm.

• Donor RSSI for the board boosting the control channel (defaults to board 1) should

be steady and greater than -75 dBm (minimum signal level required from the donor).

• Donor RSSI for boards involved in a call should be steady and within a few dB of the

donor RSSI on the control channel. Sometime during the last 5 seconds of a call, the

signal level will drop to <-100. Donor RSSI for board should show <-100, unless

board 6 is boosting the control channel.

• Donor RSSI for standby or disabled boards will indicate <-100.

• Donor RSSI for positions with no board installed will be blank.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-9

3.5 SSR (Show Scanned Report) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter SSR <CR>, or SSR followed by a channel number.

Purpose: Repeatedly lists the averaged reverse RSSI readings on the donor voice channels

as measured at the M1 or M2 antenna using board 6. Readings for 15 channels are shown;

if no channel number is entered with the SSR command, then the 15 lowest channels in the

list are displayed. If a channel is specified with SSR, then the 15 channels in the list equal

to or greater than that are displayed. (It is not required that a channel in the list be entered

to cause display of higher channels.)

Most often, the RSSI displayed is from mobiles in the donor area. Strong signals indicate

mobiles that are approaching the EAC-2000.

In certain cases, the RSSI on a channel may be strong, but the EAC-2000 does not attempt

to hand the candidate in. SSR precedes the RSSI with * or L to indicate channels that are

not currently being considered for hand-in:

•A

* that shows steady for 10 seconds, then disappears briefly, then is steady for

another 10 seconds, and so on, indicates that the signal on the channel has RSSI above

the Hand-in Threshold, but incorrect SAT.

• A steady * indicates the channel is one of the donor channels being boosted. In this

case, SSR continues to display the RSSI being received on the channel, but the signal

is coming from the EAC-2000 board boosting the call, not the mobile. (The mobile

has been switched to the boosted voice channel.)

• If a channel has good RSSI and good SAT, but the mobile does not take the hand-in

message (i.e., the EAC-2000 does repeated unsuccessful setups on the channel), then

the SSR display will show no * briefly. When the * appears, it is because hand-in has

been attempted. Typically, the RSSI will increase also, since there will be a board

actively trying to boost the channel. After SAT Fade Timeout, the board will drop the

boost, and the SSR displayed RSSI for the channel will drop, but the * will continue

to display for the Delay Between Hand-in Attempts duration, after which the whole

cycle will repeat.

• If SSR displays the RSSI with L preceding it, the channel is currently occupied by the

modem mobile. In this case, the displayed RSSI is from the modem mobile as

transmitted at the mobile antenna and received at the M1 or M2 antenna. Since the

mobile transmit power is known, the isolation can be computed. Example:

Suppose the Modem Mobile Power Step is set to 4, and SSR shows -35 dBm on

the designated channel. Then, the mobile to M1 or M2 antenna isolation

would be +34 (max Power) - 16 (step 4 => 16 dB down) + 35 = 53 dB.

Page 3-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.5 SSR (Show Scanned Report) Command (Continued)

VERY IMPORTANT: The SSR reported for a channel that is currently being

boosted by the EAC-2000 can be used to compute the isolation from the donor

antenna to the antenna being used for board 6 (M1 or M2 as chosen in SET) in the

mobile transmit band. Example:

(1) The Reverse PA Power Set is +20 dBm (the default).

(2) The Diversity parameter for board 6 is set to M1 (the default).

(3) SCS shows a call up with donor channel 300.

(4) SSR indicates -55 for channel 300.

In this case, the EAC-2000 would be transmitting channel 300 with +20 dBm

on the D1 antenna. Board 6 would continue to scan the channel and receive -

55 dBm at the M1 antenna.

The isolation on channel 300 would simply be the difference between +20 dBm

and -55 dBm, or 75 db. Not that this shows the isolation on a single channel

in the mobile transmit band only. A adequate reading is no guarantee that the

isolation meets the specified minimum across the band and in the mobile receive

band.

Use the following chart as a guide to see the strongest RSSI reading that should be

displayed by SSR for channels being boosted. If stronger (i.e., lower) RSSIs occur,

then the isolation is less than 75 db.

Reverse PA

Power Set Max SSR Displayed RSSI During Call

for Isolation > 75 dB

+20 dBm

+15 dBm

+10 dBm

+5 dBm

-55

-60

-65

-70

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-11

3.6 PWR (PA Power Display) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter PWR <CR>, or PWR X <CR> where X is 1–6 indicating

the display option desired.

Purpose: Mainly, PWR allows the user to continuously monitor the forward PA power.

Also, PWR allows continuous monitoring of other PA parameters by choosing options 2–6.

Each of the PWR options causes a selected SSS display line to be displayed on a

continuously updated basis. The information has the same meaning as with SSS. Figure 3-4

shows a sample list of power readings.

Figure 3-4. Sample List of Power Readings

>pwr

OPTIONS: 1-FWD PA PWR; 2-FWD TEMP; 3-FWD MODE; 4-FWD STEP

5-RVS PA PWR; 6-MOBILE VMAC... ENTER CHOICE: (1-6): 1

BOARD/PA 1 234567891011

FWD PA PWR +46 +46 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0

NOTE: PWR can be used to see the forward dynamic power control algorithm in action.

The controlled parameter (FWD PA STEP), and two of the three controlling inputs (FWD

PA TEMP and MOBILE VMAC) can be viewed. The third controlling input is the +28 Volt

Supply Voltage reading.

Page 3-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.7 SAT (SAT Report) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter SAT <CR>.

Purpose: Repeatedly lists the SAT readings on the boards (displays a header followed by

a continuously updated display of the SAT readings for all boards). Figure 3-5 shows a

sample list of SAT readings.

Figure 3-5. Sample List of SAT Readings

>sat

BOARD/PA 1234567891011

DONOR SAT XXXX 6000 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

MOBILE SAT XXXX 6000 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

• Displayed values:

- 5970, 6000, or 6030 = Valid SAT tone detected.

- XXXX = Valid SAT tone not detected. (May indicate the board is being used

for control channel boost or that a call is not currently up on the board.

• To stop the display and return to the > prompt, hit ESC or <CTRL> Z.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-13

3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter ALA <CR>.

Purpose: Displays a one-page report of the number of times various alarm conditions have

occurred since the last system reset, then returns to the > prompt. Figure 3-6 shows a

sample ALA report. Reported alarms are described on the following pages.

• Counts stop at 255.

• All counts are zeroed after a power reset or a RES command. Counts may be zeroed

by entering ALA =0.

•Alarm log rate: Some alarms are checked as often as five times a second. to

prevent a single alarm condition from running up the count, a given alarm is logged

at most one time in 10 minutes. The alarm counts may be interpreted as the number

of 10-minute intervals in which the alarm occurred.

There are two exceptions to this: the board and PA Out of Service alarms, which are

really not logs at all, but reflect the current condition of the board or PA.

•Automatic Restore to Service: If an alarm condition causes a board or PA to be

taken out of service, the system will continue to process calls using available boards

and PAs until no calls are up. At that time, the controller will attempt to restore out-

of-service boards to service by resetting the boards.

After the boards reset, the controller power-on diagnostics are run on all boards and

PAs. These diagnostics check for all alarms that may cause a board or PA to be out

of service, and if an alarm of that type occurs, the board or PA remains out of service.

If a board or PA fails to come back in service, the controller repeatedly tries to restore

boards or PAs to service (during times when no calls are up) up to 10 times, the last

7 of which are spaced apart at least 1 hour. Note that regardless of whether the board

or PA comes back in service, the original alarm that caused the problem is still

maintained in the log. Except for the Out of Service alarms, the only way alarms will

be zeroed is with ALA=0 or a system reset.

Page 3-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 3-6. Sample ALA Report

>ala

RF BOARD ALARMS RECORDED. . .

BOARD #: 1234567891011

BOARD OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM 00000000000

BOARD ROM ALARM 00000000000

BOARD CALIBRATION MEMORY ALARM 00000000000

SERIAL DATA LINK ALARM 00000000000

PERSONALITY MISMATCH ALARM 00000000000

SYNTHESIZER UNLOCK ALARM 00000000000

RVS PA PWR LOW ALARM 00000000000

DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - CNTL CHAN 0

DONOR RSSI LOW ALARM - CNTL CHAN 0

DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHAN 00000000000

MOBILE RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHAN 00000000000

PA ALARMS RECORDED. . .

PA #: 1234567891011

PA OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM 00000000000

PA TEMP HIGH ALARM 00000000000

PA POWER LOW ALARM 00000000000

PA TO ANTENNA HIGH LOSS ALARM 00000000000

Press RETURN when ready for more...

M1 ANTENNA RET LOSS ALARM ................0

CNTLR BOARD ALARMS RECORDED...

ROM ALARM.................................0

RAM ALARM.................................0

NOVRAM ALARM..............................0

SAT DETECTOR #1 ALARM.....................0

SAT DETECTOR #2 ALARM.....................0

SUPPLY VOLTAGE ALARMS: +28V +12V +6V

AT PA1–6 CAGE: 0 0 0

AT PA7–11 CAGE: 0 0 0

AT CNTLR BOARD: 0 0

EXT. ANALOG ALARMS: XAD1 XAD2 XAD3 XAD4

AT PA1–6 CAGE: 0 0 0 0

AT PA7–11 CAGE: 0 0 0 0

EXT. DIGITAL ALARMS: XIN1 XIN2 XIN3 XIN4

AT PA1–6 CAGE: 0 0 0 0

AT PA7–11 CAGE: 0 0 0 0

Alarms Reported for Each Board:

• BOARD OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM: Board currently out of service due to a Board

ROM alarm, Board Calibration Memory alarm, Synthesizer Unlock alarm, or RVS PA

Pwr Low alarm. A call being boosted with that board will be dropped; however, other

calls will continue. The system will continue to set up and boost calls using available

boards until no calls are up, at which time the controller will attempt to restore the

out-of-service board by resetting all boards. Boards that have been returned to service

will not show a Board Out-of-Service alarm.

• BOARD ROM ALARM: Problem in the RF board read only memory. Checked for

at power-up or restore-to-service by the RF board controller by computing a checksum

and comparing to a store checksum. Causes board to be taken out of service.

• BOARD CALIBRATION MEMORY ALARM: Problem with the RF board

nonvolatile memory, which is used to store calibration data for RSSI reporting, reverse

PA power level set and reporting, etc. Checking is performed by the RF board

controller by computing a checksum and comparing to stored checksum. Checked for

at power-up or restore-to-service attempts. Causes board to be taken out of service.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-15

3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)

• SERIAL DATA LINK ALARM: Problem in serial link between controller board and

RF board(s). This alarm is checked on each message received from the RF boards.

If all installed boards have pegged counts, a problem on the controller board or the

back plane is likely. If only one board has alarms, that board alone is suspect. If this

alarm occurs, the board is taken out of service.

• PERSONALITY MISMATCH ALARM: Wrong type of board installed in a slot (e.g.,

a JTACS board in an AMPS EAC-2000). Checked for at power-up and restore-to-

service attempts. Causes board to be taken out of service.

• SYNTHESIZER UNLOCKED ALARM: Unlocked synthesizer. Synthesizer lock is

monitored continuously. Causes board to be taken out of service.

• RVS PWR LOW ALARM: The RVS PA Power reading reached or fell below the

Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point (- Voice or - Control, as appropriate).

- For voice boards, checked at power-up, restore-to-service attempts, and once per

minute when a call is up. Mobile RSSI must be at least -100 dBm and the

alarm condition must persist for at least 1 second for this alarm to log on a

voice board. Always causes voice board to be taken out of service.

- For the cntl board (and also for board 6 when it is active as cntl), checked at

power-up, restore-to-service attempts, and once every 10 minutes during

operation during the next reverse control channel transmission.

Causes the cntl board to be taken out of service if the Backup Control Channel

option is enabled; otherwise, the cntl board is left active and the alarm is just

logged.

• DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - CNTL CHAN: RSSI on CNTL board above the

Donor Cntl Chan RSSI High Alarm Point parameter.

• DONOR RSSI LOW ALARM CNTL CHAN: RSSI on CNTL board below the Donor

Cntl Chan RSSI Low Alarm Point parameter.

• DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHANNEL: Donor RSSI on board above

the Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point during a call. The alarm

condition must persist for 1 second before an alarm is logged.

• MOBILE RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHANNEL: RSSI from mobile above the

Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold even after mobile has been powered back

to step 7 (i.e., minimum power). Indicates mobiles were operating very close to EAC-

2000. The alarm condition must persist for 1 second before an alarm is logged.

Page 3-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)

Alarms Reported for Each Power Amplifier:

• PA OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM: PA currently out of service due to PA Power Low

alarm.

• PA TEMP HIGH ALARM: PA temperature above the PA Temperature High Alarm

Point parameter. The alarm condition must persist for 5 seconds before an alarm is

logged.

• PA POWER LOW ALARM: PA output power equal to or below the PA Power Low

Alarm Point parameter.

- For CNTL PA and for PA 6 when it is active as CNTL, checked at power-up,

restore-to-service attempts, and once per minute thereafter. The alarm condition

must persist for at least 3 seconds before an alarm is logged. Causes the CNTL

PA to be taken out of service if the Backup Control Channel option is enabled;

otherwise, the CNTL PA is left active and the alarm is just logged.

- For Voice PAs, the alarm is checked continuously during a call but will only

log if the signal being received from the donor exceeds -80 dBm. The low

power condition must persist for 3 seconds for an alarm to be logged. A logged

alarm will cause the PA to be taken out of service.

- For PA 6, the alarm is checked during the brief interval the PA is used to set

up a call.

A PA POWER LOW ALARM may be accompanied by or caused by a tripped PA dc

breaker. Refer to Appendix A, Section A.15.4, before resetting a tripped PA dc

breaker.

• PA TO ANTENNA HIGH LOSS ALARM: Loss from forward PA to M2 (for PA

6) or M1 (for all others) was measured to be equal or greater than the PA to Antenna

High Loss Alarm Point.

This indicates a problem with the combiner, duplexer, or cabling. A mistuned

combiner cavity will cause these alarms. Note: Check the connectors in the PA cage;

sometimes, if not properly aligned, plugging in PAs will push the RF connector out

of the housing.

This alarm is checked for at power-on, restore-to-service attempts, and once per hour

during operation. The alarm condition must persist for 2 seconds before an alarm is

logged. Because the test requires that one PA at a time be keyed, the test is only

conducted when no calls are up. If a new call is detected, the test is aborted. Each

nondisabled board/PA is individually keyed, and the PA power reading is compared

to the M2 (for board 6) or M1 (for all others) forward power reading.

If the PA power minus the antenna power is equal or greater than the threshold, an

alarm is logged. This alarm does not cause out-of-service on board or PA.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-17

3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)

System Alarm Conditions Reported:

• ROM ALARM: Problem in Read Only Memory. (Checked at power-up by

computing a ROM checksum and comparing it with a stored checksum.)

• RAM ALARM: Problem in Random Access Memory. (Checked at power-up by

writing distinguishable patterns to the entire external RAM and then checking for

them. The ability to write all bits (both high and low) and non-shorted address lines

is checked.)

• NOVRAM ALARM: Problem in Nonvolatile Memory. (Checked at power-up by

looking for several "signature bytes" which indicate if data have ever been written and

if gross memory loss has occurred. If a signature cannot be found, the system tries

to write the defaults and the signature to the NOVRAM.)

Alarm readings:

0 = No problems.

1 = Signature not found, but system was able to write it successfully. (All

operating parameters will revert to their default values.) Software

upgrades usually result in this reading, since different versions employ

different signatures. Repeated occurrence indicates an intermittent

NOVRAM.

2 = Signature not found; system could not write the signature. Indicates

faulty NOVRAM circuitry.

• SAT DETECTOR #1 AND #2 ALARMS: Problem with the SAT detection circuitry

on the controller board, specifically, that the SAT PLL free running frequency cannot

be adjusted to the desired point. SAT detector #1 is used for boards 1–6; #2 is used

for boards 7–11. Most likely, this will cause calls on the associated boards to be

dropped due to SAT Fade or Unsuccessful Setup. The direct symptoms can be

temporarily bypassed by setting the SAT Fade Time-out to 250 seconds, which would

allow a call to be boosted at least that long.

• SUPPLY VOLTAGE ALARMS: The +28, +12, or +6 Volt supply went below the

associated Low Alarm Point. The voltages are monitored at the controller board, at

PA 1–6 cage, and at PA 7–11 cage (if installed). A monitored supply voltage point

must be in the alarm condition for at least 5 seconds before an alarm is logged.

Shorter duration dips below the alarm points are ignored.

- The +12 and +6 Volt alarms indicate problems with the associated dc-dc

converter in the regulator module (which plugs into the back of the card cage)

if they occur at all monitoring points, and/or problem with the power

distribution wires or connectors if they occur at a single monitoring point.

Page 3-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)

- The +28 Volt alarm may indicate several things, depending upon how the +28

Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point is set. The +28 volts is supplied by the large

switching power supplies in the bottom of the cabinet. If external batteries are

connected, they are parallel with the outputs of the switching supplies. If ac

power is lost, the reading indicates the battery voltage, which drops according

to battery capacity and EAC-2000 call activity.

The +28V alarm point may be set close to +28 volts; in this case, a +28 volt

alarm will be logged very quickly after c power is lost. The alarm point may

be set lower, depending upon the particular battery voltage to remaining

capacity relationship. In this case, the alarm will not be logged for short

duration ac power outages, but will be logged when battery discharge is

imminent. If the +28 Volt alarm point is set equal to the +28 Volt Supply - PA

Power Cutback Point, the +28 Volt alarm will also indicate that the PAs were

powered back due to low supply voltage.

• EXT. ANALOG ALARMS: Indicates the number of times the voltage on the general

purpose analog input has gone above or below the threshold specified in the Ext.

Analog Input Alarm State parameter. An external analog input alarm condition must

persist for at least 1 second before an alarm is logged. Shorter durations are ignored.

• EXT. DIGITAL ALARMS: Indicates the number of times the input has been different

from the Ext. Digital Input Alarm State parameter if enabled. An external digital

input alarm condition must persist for at least 1 second before an alarm is logged.

Shorter durations are ignored.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-19

3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter DCS <CR>.

Purpose: Lists the total number and duration of calls handled per board.

• Separate totals are given according to reasons for call setup or termination.

• Statistics continue to accumulate indefinitely unless zeroed. (Statistics may be zeroed

by entering DCS=0.

Figure 3-7 shows a sample DCS report. Listed statistics are described below.

Statistics Listed:

• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED - MOBILE ORIGINATED: Number of calls

handled by the EAC-2000 that were set up because a mobile in the boosted coverage

area placed a call. (These calls are processed through the boosted control channel; the

booster identifies the mobile as a candidate for boosting by monitoring the data

streams.)

• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED - MOBILE ANSWERED: Number of calls

handled by the EAC-2000 that were set up because a mobile in the boosted coverage

area answered a call. (These calls are processed through the boosted control channel;

the booster identifies the mobile as a candidate for boosting by monitoring data

streams.)

• NUMBER OF CALLS INITIATED - MOBILE RSSI > THRESH: Number of calls

handled by the EAC-2000 that were set up because a mobile with a call up directly

with the donor drove into the boosted coverage area. (The EAC-2000 identifies the

mobile as a candidate for boosting because the RSSI on one of the channels in the

donor voice channels lists goes above the hand-in threshold.)

• CALL TIME - MOBILE ORIGINATED: Total duration of all calls handled that were

originated by a mobile in the booster coverage area. (In minutes, accurate to 1

minute.)

• CALL TIME - MOBILE ANSWERED: Total duration of all calls handled that were

answered by a mobile in the booster coverage area. (In minutes, accurate to 1

minute.)

• CALL TIME - MOBILE RSSI > THRESH: Total duration of all calls handled that

were answered by a mobile in the booster coverage area. (In minutes, accurate to 1

minute.)

Page 3-20 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

Figure 3-7. Sample DCS Report

>dcs

EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 1

NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED

MOBILE MOBILE MOBILE TOTAL

ORIG ANSWER RSSI>THRESH

BD 1 0 0 0 0

BD 2 3 5 1 9

BD 3 0 0 0 0

BD 4 0 0 0 0

BD 5 0 0 0 0

BD 7 0 0 0 0

BD 8 0 0 0 0

BD 9 0 0 0 0

BD 10 0 0 0 0

BD 11 0 0 0 0

TOTAL 3 5 1 9

Press RETURN when ready for more. .

EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 2

CALL TIME (MINUTES)

MOBILE MOBILE MOBILE TOTAL AVERAGE

ORIG ANSWER RSSI>THRESH

BD 1 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 2 2 3 4 10 1.1

BD 3 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 4 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 5 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 7 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 8 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 9 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 10 0 0 0 0 0.0

BD 11 0 0 0 0 0.0

TOTAL 2 3 4 10 1.1

AVERAGE 0.9 0.6 4.3 1.1

Press RETURN when ready for more . .

EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 3

NUMBER OF CALL TERMINATED

MOBILE MOBILE MOBILE DONOR TOTAL

RELEASE SAT FADE RSSI<THRESH RSSI<THRESH

BD 1 0 0 0 0 0

BD 2 6 0 2 1 9

BD 3 0 0 0 0 0

BD 4 0 0 0 0 0

BD 5 0 0 0 0 0

BD 7 0 0 0 0 0

BD 8 0 0 0 0 0

BD 9 0 0 0 0 0

BD 10 0 0 0 0 0

BD 11 0 0 0 0 0

TOTAL 6 0 2 1 9

Press RETURN when ready for more . .

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-21

Figure 3-7. Sample DCS Report (Continued)

EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 4

NUMBER OF CALLS

-- UNSUCCESSFUL SETUP -- SHORT

ORIG+ANSW RSSI>THRESH DURATION

BD 1 1 0 0

BD 2 2 2 0

BD 3 0 0 0

BD 4 0 0 0

BD 5 0 0 0

BD 7 0 0 0

BD 8 0 0 0

BD 9 0 0 0

BD 10 0 0 0

BD 11 0 0 0

TOTAL 3 2 0

Press RETURN when ready for more . .

EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 5

NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL ACCESS ATTEMPTS:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

EAC MULTI-HOP SIGNALING FAILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

DONOR DENIED ACCESS TO CONTROL CHANNEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

DONOR ISSUED NO RESPONSE MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

DONOR ISSUED DIRECTED RETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

DONOR ISSUED REORDER OR INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

DONOR ISSUED RELEASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE BUSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

NUMBER OF TIMES ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

TIME ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY (MINUTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

NUMBER OF CALLS TRANSFERRED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

NUMBER OF HANDBACK GRABBACK ATTEMPTS THAT CONTINUED ON EAC . . . . . . . .19

NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER DECREASES) . . . . . . . .12

NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER INCREASES). . . . . . . . . 1

LAST EAC RESET THU 10-28-93 16:53:33

• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - MOBILE RELEASE DETECTED: Number

of calls terminated because mobile release was detected by the EAC-2000. Mobile

release occurs if the mobile or land user hangs up. (Most calls should end because

of mobile release, but some releases will be missed, especially in weak signal

conditions. If release is missed or ignored, one of the other termination mechanisms

should end the call.)

• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - MOBILE SAT FADED: Number of calls

terminated because the SAT received by the EAC-2000 from the mobile was incorrect

for the SAT Fade Timeout period. (Usually indicates that the mobile drove out of

range of the booster and could not be handed back to the donor cell. Excessive

terminations of this type will occur if mobile release is consistently missed.)

• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - MOBILE RSSI < THRESH: Number of

calls terminated because the RSSI from the mobile fell below the hand-back threshold,

and the EAC-2000 was able to hand the mobile back to the donor.

Page 3-22 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)

• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - DONOR RSSI < THRESH: Number of

calls terminated because the signal being received from the donor fell below the donor

RSSI threshold for 2 seconds.

• NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL SETUPS - ORIG+ANSW: Indicates that the

mobile never arrives on the assigned voice channel. High numbers of these, along

with high numbers of SAT fades, indicate a problem with the mobile-to-booster path

or the board.

• NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL SETUPS - RSSI>THRESH: Number of times the

EAC-2000 tried to set up a mobile that was detected as having strong RSSI, but the

mobile did not take the hand-off message. (This does not mean that the call ended,

but merely that the donor cell continued to handle the call.)

• Too many of this type for all boards may indicate one of the following:

- Hand-in threshold too low.

- Antennas facing the boosted coverage area also cover a significant portion

of the donor cell coverage area. (This will cause the booster to falsely

identify mobiles as candidates for boosting when they are in good contact

with the donor cell.)

- Intermod signal (with correct SAT) of sufficient strength on one of the

channels in the donor voice channel list.

• Too many for one board, and not others, indicates a problem with that board.

• NUMBER OF CALLS OF SHORT DURATION: Number of calls that lasted less

than 10 seconds. A large number for all boards may indicate a coverage area overlap.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-23

3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)

• NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL ACCESS ATTEMPTS: Number of call setups that

were unsuccessful because the donor cell site did not assign a voice channel to the

candidate.

– EAC MULTI-HOP SIGNALING FAILED: Only applies when Modes 3 and

4 are selected in Multi-Hop Feature.

– DONOR DENIED ACCESS TO CONTROL CHANNEL: Donor does not

properly manipulate B/I bit.

– DONOR ISSUED NO RESPONSE MESSAGE: Access was successful, but

donor ignored.

– DONOR ISSUED DIRECTED RETRY: Usually indicates that the donor is

busy.

– DONOR ISSUED REORDER OR INTERCEPT: Usually indicates that the

donor is busy.

– DONOR ISSUED RELEASE: Possible indication that the mobile is denied

service due to authentication failure, but varies from system to system.

• NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE BUSY: The number of accesses that were

attempted in the EAC-2000 coverage area while all channels were busy. This statistic

can only be logged if the Control Channel State During All Channels Busy parameter

is set to BOOST ACCESSES, DENY ACCESSES BUT COUNT, or DIRECTED

RETRY. If set to OFF or DENY ACCESSES, accesses will not occur during all busy

(so they cannot be counted).

• NUMBER OF TIMES ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY: Number of times that the last

available board was used to set up a call, causing the EAC-2000 to be fully loaded.

(See note on next page.)

• TIME ALL CHANNELS BUSY (MINUTES): Total time that all available boards

were being used to boost calls. (See note on next page.)

• NUMBER OF CALLS TRANSFERRED (Revertive Control Channel Option only):

Number of calls initially handled by the control channel equipment and subsequently

transferred to voice channel equipment.

Page 3-24 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)

If this option is enabled, some calls will be handled by the control

channel equipment initially. Calls that are transferred to (normal) voice

channel boards will be logged completely on that board (i.e., the

statistics will log as if the call were initially handled on the voice pair).

If a call is handled initially on the control channel and ends without

being transferred, the statistics are logged on the control channel board.

If the Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled—

• NUMBER OF TIMES ALL CHANNELS BUSY: Number of

calls initially handled by the control channel equipment. ("All

busy" in this case is defined as "all available voice channels busy"

+ "control channel boosting a voice call.")

• TIME ALL CHANNELS BUSY: Time the control channel

equipment was being used to boost a voice call.

• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED by the control channel board,

the NUMBER OF CALLS TRANSFERRED, and the NUMBER

OF TIMES ALL CHANNELS BUSY will not add up as might be

expected because some calls handled on the control channel

equipment may be detected as UNSUCCESSFUL SETUPS.

• NUMBER OF HANDBACK GRABBACK ATTEMPTS THAT CONTINUED ON

EAC: During a call, if a mobile's RSSI falls below the Handback Threshold, a

handback/grabback will be performed. The mobile is handed back to the donor voice

channel, then another handback message is sent in competition with the signal from

the donor. This second handback message is referred to as the grabback. If the donor

signal is stronger, the mobile will remain on the donor channel; the call will end on

the EAC-2000 and be logged in the MOBILE RSSI < THRESHOLD call terminate

category. Of the EAC-2000 signal is stronger, the mobile will take the grabback; the

call will continue on the EAC-2000 and a statistic will be logged here. A single call

may result in several occurrences of this statistic.

High numbers of this statistic (i.e., 2 to 3 times the total number of calls) indicates

that the EAC-2000 is doing more handback/grabbacks than is needed. This can be

reduced by decreasing the Handback Threshold, decreasing the Maximum Number of

Handback Attempts Per Call, or increasing the Minimum Delay Between Handback

Attempts.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-25

3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)

• NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER DECREASES):

Number of times a mobile's power level was decreased because it was too close to the

booster. (Too many decreases could indicate that the Mobile Dynamic Power Control

parameter is set too low.)

• NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER INCREASES):

Number of times a mobile's power level was increased after previously having been

decreased. (Too many power increases and decreases may indicate that there is not

enough difference between the Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold and the

threshold that triggers power increase (hand-back threshold).

• LAST EAC RESET: Date and time of last reset. (If ALA=0 has not been entered,

this indicates how long the alarm counts reported in ALA have been accumulating.)

NOTE: A new EAC-2000 will show some amount of call activity in the DCS and

DCH reports. This represents the results of factory burn-in testing. Enter DCS=0/

and DCH=0/ to clear these out.

Page 3-26 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.10 DCH (Display Call History) Command

Entry: At the > prompt, enter DCH <CR>.

Purpose: To display incremental totals of certain call statistics. Figure 3-8 shows a sample

DCH report.

• Totals are computed each hour and maintained in a week-long record. For the call

history to be correct, the time must be accurate.

NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED listed for MON 5 is the total

number of calls initiated for one hour on Monday, between 5:00 a.m. and 5:59

a.m. The entry for MON 22-4 includes calls between Monday 10:00 p.m. and

Tuesday 4:59 a.m.

• DCH statistics are maintained in nonvolatile memory (i.e., a temporary power outage

or a RES command will not destroy the week's history).

• To zero the statistics (all except the totals, which accumulate indefinitely), enter

DCH=0.

NOTE: A new EAC-2000 will show some amount of call activity in the DCS and

DCH reports. This represents the results of factory burn-in testing. Enter DCS=0/

and DCH=0/ to clear these out.

Statistics Displayed:

• TOTAL SYSTEM RUN TIME (HOURS): Number of hours the system (or at least

the controller board) has been running. After being zeroed at the factory, this statistic

accumulates indefinitely.

• TOTAL NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED BY SYSTEM: Number of calls handled

by the system (accumulates indefinitely).

• TOTAL CALL TIME HANDLED BY THE SYSTEM (MINUTES): Number of call

minutes boosted by the system (accumulates indefinitely).

• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED: Number of calls initiated during the hour for all

board pairs for all reasons.

• CALL TIME: Number of call minutes handled by the booster during the hour. (If

nine boards are available for boosting, the total available call minutes during an hour

is 9 x 60 = 540.)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-27

Figure 3-8. Sample DCH Report

>dch

TOTAL EAC RUN TIME (HOURS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

TOTAL NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED BY EAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

TOTAL CALL TIME HANDLED BY EAC (MINUTES). . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Press RETURN when ready for more . .

EXTEND-A-CELL HOURLY CALL HISTORY

NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED BY EAC

5678910111213141516171819202122-4

MON000000000000000000

TUE000000000000000000

WED000000000000000000

THU000000000000000000

FRI000000000000000000

SAT000000000000000000

SUN000000000000000000

CALL TIME HANDLED BY EAC (MINUTES)

5678910111213141516171819202122-4

MON000000000000000000

TUE000000000000000000

WED000000000000000000

THU000000000000000000

FRI000000000000000000

SAT000000000000000000

SUN000000000000000000

Press RETURN when ready for more . .

NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE ALL CHANNELS BUSY

5678910111213141516171819202122-4

MON000000000000000000

TUE000000000000000000

WED000000000000000000

THU000000000000000000

FRI000000000000000000

SAT000000000000000000

SUN000000000000000000

TIME ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY (MINUTES)

5678910111213141516171819202122-4

MON000000000000000000

TUE000000000000000000

WED000000000000000000

THU000000000000000000

FRI000000000000000000

SAT000000000000000000

SUN000000000000000000

• NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE BUSY: The number of accesses that were

detected in the EAC-2000 coverage area while all channels were busy. The hourly

record is shown for this if the Control Channel State During All Channels Busy

parameter is set to BOOST ACCESSES, DENY ACCESSES BUT COUNT, or

DIRECTED RETRY.

• NUMBER OF TIMES ALL CHANNELS BUSY: (Displayed if the Control Channel

State During All Channels Busy is set to OFF or DENY ACCESS, because for those

settings, accesses do not occur.) Indicates the number of times that the last available

board was used to set up a call during the hour, causing the EAC-2000 to be fully

loaded.

• TIME ALL CHANNELS BUSY: Total time (in minutes) that all available boards were

being used to boost a call during the hour.

Page 3-28 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.11 TIM (Time Display and Change) Command

Entry: From the > prompt, enter TIM <CR>.

Purpose: To display and change the time and date on the EAC-2000 clock. The EAC-2000

uses this clock to determine (1) when to update the incremental statistics kept for the DCH

command and (2) which records to update.

The clock circuitry is located on the controller board. The clock has lithium battery backup

with 10 years minimum battery life. Accuracy is ±1 minute at 25oC. The unit properly

maintains the date, even during leap years.

Figure 3-9 shows a sample TIM screen.

Figure 3-9. Sample TIM Screen

>tim

Currently WED 08-02-94 10:13:04

Enter new time (HH:MM) : 10:25

Enter new date (MM_DD_YY) : 8-2-94

Enter number for new day (1=MON, 2=TUE ... 7=SUN) : 3

Currently WED 08-02-94 10:25:33

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-29

3.12 MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command

Entry: From the > prompt, enter MIN <CR>.

Purpose: To display a listing of the last five mobile-answered or mobile-originated access

attempts by mobiles.

The EAC-2000 decodes both mobile and cell site control channel data upon call origination

or answer. It then keeps track of channel assignments by the mobile telephone number

(MIN) which is part of every data transmission. The MIN received from the mobile and the

donor channel assignment sent by the cell site is available as a troubleshooting aid through

the MIN command.

Like the SCS display, the MIN display is a refreshed listing of the last five access attempts.

Each listing includes the 10-digit MIN, type of access (mobile-originated or mobile-

answered), and activity.

Figure 3-10 shows a sample MIN screen.

Figure 3-10. Sample MIN Screen

A>min

MIN ACTIVITY

8015606385 MOBILE ANSWERED CALL DONOR CHAN = 245

8015601407 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL DONOR CHAN = 308

8015609843 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL DONOR CHAN = 56

8015605627 MOBILE ANSWERED CALL DONOR CHAN = 98

8015609843 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL DONOR CHAN = 203

The chart on the next page explains the Activities that may occur.

Page 3-30 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

3.12 MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command (Continued)

Activity Meaning

DONOR CHAN = XXX Most often displayed; indicates that the access

was repeated, and the donor assigned a channel.

NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED RELEASE

NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED REORDER

NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED INTERCEPT

NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED DIRECTED RETRY

These indicate that the access was repeated and

received by the donor, but that the donor

responded with the indicated message. These

messages from the donor are used in various

ways by different system manufacturers, but

most often indicate that the cell site was busy,

that there was a problem with the dialed

number, or that the subscriber was not

validated.

NOT BOOSTED - DONOR DENIED ACCESS In this case, a valid access or page response

was received by the EAC-2000, but when the

EAC-2000 tried to access the donor, the donor

denied the access (i.e., did not flip the B/I bit

properly). This could be because the donor is

busy or could indicate a problem in the EAC-

2000 to donor reverse control channel path or

equipment.

NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED NO RESPONSE In this case, a valid access or page response

was received by the EAC-2000, and repeated to

the donor, but the donor failed to respond

within the maximum allowable time (5

seconds). This could indicate a busy cell site,

or could also indicate EAC-2000 to donor

reverse control channel problems.

NOT BOOSTED - STATION POWER CLASS = 1 Indicates that the EAC-2000 did not boost the

mobile because of the mobile’s power class,

which is also displayed. This action is

controlled by the Station Power Class Selective

Boosting parameter.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-31

3.13 REV (Show Hardware Revisions) Command

Entry: From the > prompt, enter REV <CR>.

Purpose: To display a listing of hardware revisions of the various assemblies in the EAC-

2000. Also shows the RF board software revision, date code, and serial number.

Page 3-32 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

6HFWLRQ 6SHFLDO&RPPDQGV

4.1 Introduction

In addition to the commands for system setup and monitoring (described in

Sections 2 and 3), there are special commands intended for hardware

verification. These lower-level commands are less "user friendly" than the

commonly used commands; their use requires detailed knowledge of the

hardware and software. However, they are more flexible and therefore more

powerful.

WARNING!! It is not recommended that these commands be used

in the field. Contact Allen Telecom Systems, Systems Engineering

Department, before using them.

4.2 Commands

A summary of these commands is given below. In the command syntax

shown—

• Each command is entered at the > prompt.

• A, B, and C represent hex data to be entered.

• Brackets [ ] enclose optional entries.

Entry Purpose

RFC Invokes a mode (signified by a # prompt) which allows

communication with the RF boards directly. The protocol

used is beyond the scope of this document. This command

must be used with caution because it could destroy

personality and calibration data stored on the RF boards.

Exit this command using ESC.

RUN AAAA Causes program execution to begin at location AAAA in

EPROM.

CBY AAA[-BBBB] Displays Code BYte[s] (i.e., in EPROM) from location

AAAA [to BBBB] in hex.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 4-1

4.2 Commands (Continued)

Entry Purpose

DBY AA[-BB][=CC] Displays Data BYte[s] in internal RAM from hex location

AA [to location BB], or if =CC is included, changes the

bytes in the range to CC in hex.

XBY AAAA[-BBBB][=CC] Displays/changes eXternal memory BYtes or memory

mapped i/o in the range from AAAA [to BBBB].

CHK Computes and displays the CHecKsum of program memory

(i.e., uses the move instruction) and also displays the stored

checksum.

WRP AAAA[=BB] Creates a continuous WRite Pulse to external memory

location AAAA; data written is 55 hex or BB hex if

included. Exit this command by pressing ESC.

RDP AAAA[-BBBB] Creates a continuous ReaD Pulse to external memory

locations in the range AAAA [to BBBB], and displays the

values read on the screen (max of 15 locations displayed).

Exit by pressing ESC.

WAT Causes pulsing of the WATchdog timer to be suspended,

thus allowing it to expire. A power-on reset should follow

shortly.

Page 4-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)

9ROXPH

7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ

27-7657-2

Issue 7/95

Field Support

If you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact

at one of the following telephone numbers:

Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)

or (216) 349-8413

Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413

&RQWHQWV

...................................v

.......................................... 1-1

1.1 About This Volume ................................ 1-1

1.2 Introduction to Cellular Boosters ........................ 1-2

1.2.1 Use of Cellular Boosters ....................... 1-2

1.2.2 Frequency Allocation Plan ...................... 1-4

................................. 2-1

2.1 Introduction ....................................... 2-1

2.2 EAC-2000 Concept ................................. 2-1

2.2.1 Control Channel Amplifiers ..................... 2-1

2.2.2 Voice Channel Amplifiers ...................... 2-2

2.3 EAC-2000 Operation ................................ 2-3

2.3.1 Antennas .................................. 2-3

2.3.2 Forward Path Operation ........................ 2-4

2.3.3 Reverse Path Operation ........................ 2-4

2.3.4 Hand-off Messages ........................... 2-5

2.4 System Board Functions .............................. 2-6

2.4.1 RF Boards ................................. 2-6

2.4.2 Backplane Board ............................ 2-7

2.4.3 Forward Preamp............................. 2-8

2.4.4 Reverse Preamp ............................. 2-8

2.4.5 Reverse Combiner ........................... 2-8

2.4.6 45-Watt PA ................................ 2-8

2.4.7 PA Interface Board ........................... 2-9

2.4.8 Mobile Shelf ............................... 2-9

2.4.9 Power Supply ............................... 2-9

2.5 How Calls Are Processed ............................ 2-10

2.5.1 Calls Placed/Answered from Within

Booster Coverage Area ....................... 2-10

2.5.2 In-Progress Calls Entering the Booster Coverage Area . 2-11

2.5.3 Hand-backs ............................... 2-12

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page iii

(Continued)

2.6 Multi-Hop Operation ............................... 2-14

2.6.1 Control Channel Response or Access ............. 2-14

2.6.2 Repeating the Response or Access ............... 2-15

2.7 Local/Remote Link ................................. 2-16

2.7.1 Local Link ................................ 2-16

2.7.2 Remote Link .............................. 2-16

2.8 Programmable Parameters ............................ 2-16

2.9 Alarms ......................................... 2-16

.............................. 3-1

3.1 Specifications ..................................... 3-1

3.2 Equipment Characteristics ............................. 3-5

3.2.1 Accessories ................................ 3-5

3.2.2 Interchangeability ............................ 3-5

3.2.3 Compliance with Standards ..................... 3-5

3.2.4 Reliability ................................. 3-7

3.2.5 Service Skills Required for the EAC-2000 ........... 3-7

3.3 EAC-2000 Illustrations ............................... 3-8

3.4 EAC-2000 Diagrams ................................ 3-8

Page iv AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

1-1. Cellular Booster Operation ................................. 1-3

1-2. Channel Assignment and Frequency Allocation ................... 1-4

2-1. EAC-2000 Concept ...................................... 2-2

2-2.RF Board Block Diagram.................................. 2-7

3-1. Specifications . . . . ..................................... 3-1

3-2. EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed) ...................... 3-12

3-3. EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed) ...................... 3-13

3-4. Regulator Module Wiring Diagram .......................... 3-15

3-5. AMPS Power Supply Shelf Wiring Diagram ................... 3-17

In addition, the following foldout diagrams are included in this section:

• Block Diagram

• Main Harness Wiring Diagrams

• Card Cage Wiring Diagram

• Backplane Wiring Diagram

• PA Cage Wiring Diagram

• Mobile Shelf Wiring Diagram

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page v

6HFWLRQ ,QWURGXFWLRQ

1.1 About This Volume

This volume is the third of three volumes pertaining to the AMPS EAC-2000™

booster. It contains descriptions, specifications, and drawings for the EAC-2000.

Volume 1 includes installation procedures, and Volume 2 contains operating

procedures. A set of appendices, a glossary, an index and a parts and

accessories order information section accompany the three volumes.

This volume has been divided into three sections, described below.

• Outlines the contents of this volume, defines

key terms, and provides an overview of cellular boosters.

• Describes EAC-2000 operation,

including the operational concept, functions of each of the system boards,

and how calls are processed.

• Provides specifications for

power, environment, mechanical, interface, RF, and alarm/control

connections. Describes equipment characteristics, and provides illustrations

and diagrams.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 1-1

1.2 Introduction to Cellular Boosters

Cellular telephone systems transmit signals in two directions between

cell sites and mobile telephones within the signal coverage area. The

signal path from the cell site to the mobile is called the path,

and the path from mobile to cell site is the path.

Weak signal transmissions may occur within the coverage area

because of indoor applications, terrain obstructions, or distance from

the transmitter. For example—

• Within a large building, signals may be marginal because of

signal attenuation by the building or because subscribers are on

lower floors.

• Steep terrain may shield a portion of the coverage area, causing

unsatisfactory signal levels.

• Coverage of a rural highway may be unsatisfactory because of

its distance from the cell-site transmitter.

One solution in these situations is to add more cell sites. However,

in low-traffic areas, a signal booster may be a much less expensive

way to extend the transmission range. As shown in Figure 1-1, the

booster has an amplifier in each cell-site/mobile path, which receives

the signal, amplifies it, and reradiates it.

The range is extended by the of the receiving and transmitting

antennas and of the booster amplifier itself. Also, the path from the

cell site to the booster is typically line-of-sight and therefore has very

low propagation loss when compared to the typical path to a mobile.

Figure 1-1. Cellular Booster Operation

Page 1-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

Cellular frequencies for AMPS-compatible systems are allocated as

shown in Figure 1-2. Frequencies 824–849 MHz are used for reverse

path transmissions, and 869–894 MHz are used for forward path

transmissions. These bands of frequencies are divided into 666 full-

duplex channel pairs, each 30 kHz wide. The channels are divided

between two independent systems (A and B), each system receiving

333 channels. Of the 333 channels, 21 are control channels and 312

are voice channels. The control channels for the A and B systems

are next to each other in the center of the band.

The expanded band segments (A', A", and B") provide an additional

2.5 MHz of bandwidth to each licensee. The nonwireline Band A

expansion is provided in two segments: a 1.5 MHz segment (A')

above the B band and a 1 MHz segment ((A") below the A band.

The entire 2.5 MHz wireline band B expansion is above the A'

segment. The formulas for calculating AMOS frequencies from

channel numbers are provided in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2. Channel Assignment and Frequency Allocation

Band Designation Channel

Numbers Mobile Transmit

Frequency Land Transmit

Frequency

Band A" 991 1023 824.040 825.000 869.040 870.000

Band A Voice 1 312 825.030 834.360 870.030 879.360

Band A Control 313 333 834.390 834.990 879.390 879.990

Band B Control 334 354 835.020 835.620 880.020 880.620

Band B Voice 355 666 835.650 844.980 880.650 889.980

Band A’ 667 716 845.010 846.480 890.010 891.480

Band B’ 717 799 846.510 848.970 891.510 893.970

For a given channel, the frequencies may be computed as follows:

Channel Number Center Frequency, MHz

1 ≤ N ≤ 7998 0.03N + 870.000 MHz

991 ≤ N ≤ 1023 0.03 (N-1023) + 870 MHz

1 ≤ N ≤ 799 0.03N + 825.000 MHz

991 ≤ N ≤ 1023 0.03 (N-1023) + 825 MHz

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 1-3

6HFWLRQ ($& 'HVFULSWLRQ

2.1 Introduction

This section of the manual describes and illustrates the EAC-2000 design

concept and operation and provides descriptions of the various system boards.

2.2 EAC-2000 Concept

The EAC-2000 booster uses 21 separate narrowband amplifiers. The simplified

diagram in Figure 2-1, shows 4 narrowband amplifiers: 2 (forward and reverse)

for the control channel and 2 (forward and reverse) for the voice channel.

A forward amplifier boosts and translates the frequency of the control

channel transmitted from the donor cell site to the mobiles. A

reverse amplifier boosts and translates the frequency of the control

channel transmitted from the mobiles to the donor cell site.

The narrowband amplifiers are a single channel (30 kHz) wide and

have dual synthesizers that control input and output channels

independently. For example, if the cell site, the EAC-2000, and the

mobiles in the primary coverage area communicate on control

channel 340, the EAC-2000 could be set up to receive control

channel 340, amplify it, and reradiate it on channel 335. The mobiles

in the booster coverage area that are unable to receive channel 340

would lock onto channel 335 and communicate with the cell site

through the EAC-2000. The translated control channel is referred to

as the .

This concept of control channel translation is possible because the

mobiles lock onto the strongest control channel. This is significant

because the mobiles will receive only one signal, even if on the

fringe of the weak coverage area. Therefore, there is no interfering

signal.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-1

Figure 2-1. EAC-2000 Concept

The EAC-2000 also contains narrowband forward and reverse

amplifiers for boosting voice channels. These amplifiers, which are

keyed as needed when voice channel activity is detected in the

boosted coverage area, translate the frequency of the boosted signal.

When a mobile is detected in the coverage area, a voice channel

booster is set up, and a hand-off message is sent to the mobile,

causing it to switch to the boosted voice channel.

Page 2-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

2.3 EAC-2000 Operation

Several aspects of EAC-2000 operation are described in this section:

• Antennas

• Forward path operation

• Reverse path operation

• Hand-off messages

Refer to the block diagram at the end of Section 3 in conjunction with the

written descriptions.

The EAC-2000 uses four antennas:

• (lower right corner of block diagram): Primary

antenna facing donor cell site(s), used for:

- Reception of control and voice channel signals from donor

cell site(s).

- Transmission of control and voice signals back to cell

site(s).

• (lower left corner of block diagram): Primary

antenna facing mobiles in the booster coverage area, used for:

- Transmission of boosted control channel and boosted voice

channels to mobiles.

- Diversity reception from mobiles.

• (center bottom of block diagram): Second antenna

facing mobiles in the booster coverage area, used for:

- Sending hand-off messages to mobiles.

- Diversity reception from mobiles.

- Sending control data to Multi-Donor Units, when installed

• (not shown): Antenna for the installed

cellular mobile, facing the donor cell site.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-3

RF signals transmitted by the cell site (on both control and voice

channels) are received at the D1 antenna and passed through the

duplexer to the forward preamplifier. The forward preamp amplifies

the signal and provides RF output to the narrowband forward receiver

of the RF boards.

The signals coming out of the forward transmitter of each RF board

are fed to a 45-watt power amplifier (PA). The PA outputs are

combined in a transmit combiner. Note that the output channels for

the forward direction are fixed by this combiner. The output of the

combiner is fed to another duplexer, which is coupled to the M1

antenna facing the desired coverage area.

The reverse path through the system, starting with signals transmitted

by the mobiles and received at the M1 antenna, is similar to the

forward path. The reverse preamp has an additional RF input from

the M2 antenna. Each RF board attached to the preamp can

individually select the M1 or the M2 input as part of a diversity

algorithm.

An important difference between the two paths is in the output power

capability. The forward path employs separate 45-watt PAs, which

are combined through a conventional transmit combiner. PAs 1–5

and 7-11 must operate on the fixed channel to which their associated

combiner cavity is tuned. By contrast, the reverse path signals are

amplified on each board and passively combined in a reverse

combiner assembly, allowing the reverse transmitted signals to

operate on any channel.

The reverse signals operate at a much lower power level, however,

because the link between the cell site and the EAC-2000 is fixed (and

probably line-of-sight), whereas the link between the EAC-2000 and

mobiles is not as reliable. A balanced system (that is, a system with

similar forward and reverse gains) requires higher power PAs in the

forward direction. In addition, since the signal from the mobiles may

be weak, diversity is employed by the reverse path receivers on each

RF board.

Page 2-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

The sixth RF board is used for scanning and sending handoff

messages.

• The reverse path portion is used to scan the donor voice

channels for mobiles that may enter the booster coverage area.

• The forward path portion of this board is connected

to a 45-watt PA 6, which is connected to the M2 antenna

duplexer. Since this path is not combined, the hand-off/locating

board can transmit with high power level on any channel. This

capability is used to send hand-off messages to mobiles, causing

the mobile to tune to one of the fixed forward channels

associated with boards 1–5 and 7–11.

• Board 6 is also used as a backup control channel booster.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-5

2.4 System Board Functions

The EAC-2000 system includes the following boards:

• RF boards

• Backplane board

• Controller board

• Forward pre amp

• Reverse pre amp

• Reverse combiner

• 45-watt power amplifier

• DC-DC converter shelf

• PA interface

• Mobile shelf

Figure 2-3 shows a more detailed block diagram of one RF path on

the RF boards. Forward and reverse paths differ only in tuning.

In the forward direction, one of the signal paths from the preamp

board is fed to a mixer/synthesizer on the narrowband forward path.

The signal is translated down to the 45 MHz intermediate frequency

(IF), where it is further filtered and amplified. The IF filter is one

channel (30 kHz) wide, allowing only the selected channel to be

amplified. After passing through the IF filter, the signal is translated

back up by another mixer/synthesizer. Since the two synthesizers are

not tied together, the receive and transmit channels can be set

independently.

A on the narrowband boards controls all outputs

(input channel, output channel, gain, and antenna select output),

monitors inputs (RSSI and synthesizer lock), runs the diversity

algorithm and detects signaling tone.

Page 2-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

Figure 2-3. RF Board Block Diagram

The controller board contains—

• Controller microprocessor

• 128 kilobytes of EPROM

• 32 kilobytes of nonvolatile RAM

• Watchdog timer

• RS-232 interface

• Reference oscillator

Because all system parameters (e.g., channel numbers, gains) are

stored in non-volatile RAM, the system will resume operation after

a power outage in the same state as before the outage. The RS-232

interface connects a serial port to a local terminal. Monitor software

allows system parameter entry and system monitoring.

The RF boards and the controller board plug into the backplane

board. Connectors on the backplane connect dc and RF with the rest

of the system.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-7

The forward preamp board receives input from the D1 antenna via

the D1 duplexer. The board amplifies then splits the signal,

providing output to each of the 11 RF boards. The board has net loss

of 7 dB typical. The amplifier section is designed for high intercept

point.

The reverse preamp board receives input from the M1 and M2

antennas via duplexers. The board amplifies and splits both signals.

Each RF board has a control line connecting to the reverse preamp

that controls which signal is used (M1 or M2). The reverse preamp

is designed for good sensitivity and provides about 11 dB gain

typical.

The reverse combiner is entirely passive and broadband. Signals

from the reverse transmitter of the RF boards are fed in at about +33

dBm. The signals are passively combined to a single output with net

loss about 12 dB.

The 45-watt PA is a standard base station design with added front

end gain. The unit has a pot on the front which allows the power

output to be manually adjusted downward 7 to 10 dB. The PA also

has three digital inputs (only two are used) which allow digital setting

of the power output to one of four steps:

• Step 0/ = full power

• Step 1 = 4 dB down

• Step 2 = 8 dB down

• Step 3 = 12 dB down

The PA has forward power sense and temperature sense outputs.

Page 2-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

Each PA cage may contain up to six 45-watt PAs and will contain

one PA interface board. The purpose of this board is to condense the

numerous control and sense leads required for the PAs to a relatively

low number of wires, which are connected to the controller board via

the cabinet harnessing. This board can be viewed as an "I/O

Expander" which is fully controlled by the controller board.

The PA interface board has power control outputs to each PA, a

temperature sense, and forward power sense coming from each PA.

The PA interface board also contains some undedicated outputs and

inputs which are routed to the external alarms/controls connector at

the back of the PA cage.

The mobile shelf contains—

• Interface to cellular mobile

• External dialer modem

This setup allows remote control of the system via the mobile. The

system can be set up to initiate a call over this link when an alarm

condition occurs.

The power supply system consists of—

• Dual switching 28 volt supplies (supply power for the PAs and

for dc-dc converters)

• 28-to-12 volt dc-dc converter (supplies power for the RF

portions of the boards)

• 28-to-6 volt dc-dc converter (supplies power for the logic

portions of the system)

The dc-dc converters are contained in the regulator module.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-9

2.5 How Calls Are Processed

The EAC-2000 is capable of boosting up to 10 channels at once, while the donor

cell may employ 15 or more channels. The EAC-2000’s call processing

algorithms dynamically allocate the RF boards to service only mobiles in the

booster coverage area.

The EAC-2000 identifies mobiles in the booster coverage area by two methods:

one for identifying mobiles that place or answer calls from within the booster

coverage area and another for identifying mobiles that enter the area with a call

in progress.

To identify calls placed or answered from within the booster coverage

area, the EAC-2000 monitors the data streams on the boosted control

channel, both forward and reverse. When a mobile that is not

engaged on a call drives into the booster coverage area, it normally

rescans and locks onto the strongest control channel (the boosted

control channel). If, once inside the booster coverage area, that

mobile places or answers a call, the following sequence occurs:

1. The mobile accesses the reverse boosted control channel. The

EAC-2000 receives the access, then accesses the reverse donor

control channel.

• The EAC-2000 waits for the corresponding voice channel

designation message on the forward channel.

• The EAC-2000 modifies the voice channel designation

message by substituting one of its boosted voice channels

for the donor voice channel, thus sending the mobile to

one of the boosted voice channels.

2. A boost path is set up between the mobile and the primary

donor cell site, with the mobile operating on the boosted voice

channel, the donor operating on the donor voice channel, and

the EAC-2000 translating and boosting between the two.

The is defined as the cell site whose control

channel the EAC-2000 is boosting. All mobiles that originate or

answer calls through the EAC-2000's boosted control channel will be

Page 2-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

To identify mobiles that may

drive into the boosted coverage area with a call in progress (i.e.,

already on a voice channel), the EAC-2000 scans the donor voice

channel in the mobile transmit band and maintains an RSSI average

for each channel. If the average RSSI exceeds a preset

, and the SAT on the channel is correct, the mobile on that

channel is considered a candidate.

Once a candidate is identified, the EAC-2000 forces

the mobile to one of the boosted voice channels. To do this, the

transmit portion of the hand-off/locating board (board 6) and PA 6 is

used to send a hand-off message to the mobile. A boost path is set

up for that channel in the same fashion as if the candidate had been

identified by decoding the data streams.

To provide for situations in which in-

progress calls may be linked to various neighboring cell sites, the

monitoring system allows for entry of three separate

, one for each possible SAT frequency.

• If the booster is adjacent to a single cell site, the control

channel of that cell site is the . The

voice channels used in that cell site may be entered into the

donor voice channel list with the SAT of that cell site to handle

mobiles that drive between the donor and booster with a call up.

• If the booster is adjacent to several cell sites, the voice channels

of all the neighboring cells are entered into the scan list with the

SAT of the neighboring cells. The control channel of one of

the cell sites is chosen as the donor control channel, and this

cell is then referred to as the .

As noted earlier, calls placed or answered from

within the booster coverage area (and identified by decoding data

streams) are boosted back to the primary donor cell. By contrast, in-

progress calls identified by the channel scanning process are

. That is,

if a mobile drives in with a call-up to a neighboring cell, the EAC-

2000 will boost the call back to that neighbor. This means that the

RF path between the EAC-2000 and any possible donor must support

booster operation.

Note that if multiple donors are used, the D1 antenna system at the

EAC-2000 must be specially designed for this operation.

Specifically, signal strength at the D1 antenna must be close to

identical (within ±2 dB) from all possible donor cell sites.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-11

Once a booster pair has been set up, the EAC-2000 monitors for one

of the following conditions to determine when to hand back the

mobile (that is, take down the booster on that channel):

•SAT fade

• Mobile release (1.8 seconds of signaling tone on the reverse

voice channel)

• Weak mobile RSSI (RSSI received from the boosted mobile

goes below a preset )

• Weak donor RSSI

Weak mobile RSSI identifies the mobile as a hand-back candidate.

Once a hand-back candidate is identified, the EAC-2000 sends the

mobile a hand-off message directing it back to the original donor

voice channel. This allows the mobile to be covered as it drives out

of the booster coverage area back into the donor cell site coverage

area.

Sometimes a mobile

leaving the booster area will drive out of cellular coverage. In this

situation, handing the mobile back to the original donor cell would

result in a weaker or nonexistent signal.

To handle this situation, the EAC-2000 uses the .

Shortly after sending the hand-off message, the EAC-2000 tries to

hand the mobile back to the booster by sending it a second hand-off

message (called a ) directing the mobile to come

back to the boosted voice channel. When the grab-back message is

sent, however, the mobile (because of the first hand-off message) is

on the donor voice channel and possibly is receiving signal from the

donor cell site.

• If the signal from the donor is stronger than the signal from the

EAC-2000, the mobile will ignore the grab-back message and

remain on the donor voice channel. The EAC-2000 will then

free up the equipment it was using to boost the call, since the

mobile is now being handled directly by the donor.

• If the EAC-2000 signal is stronger during the grab-back

message (as would be the case if the mobile were driving away

from the EAC-2000 but not toward the donor cell that was

handling the call), the mobile will come back to the booster

voice channel, and the EAC-2000 will continue to boost the

mobile.

Page 2-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

(Continued)

The entire hand-back/grab-back process takes only about 500

milliseconds. Once a mobile comes back to the booster after a hand-

back/grab-back, that mobile will not be considered a hand-back

candidate again for several seconds (a programmable parameter),

regardless of its signal level. The EAC-2000 will periodically send

hand-back/grab-backs but continue to handle the mobile until the

signal level is unusable.

If a mobile being boosted back to one

donor cell drives toward another donor cell, a dilemma occurs. The

serving cellular system thinks the mobile is on one voice channel,

while the booster actually has it translated to another channel.

The signal level from the booster to the donor is set such that it is

below the donor’s hand-off candidate threshold. The donor will thus

always identify the boosted mobile as a candidate for hand-off, and

the cellular system will try to find the mobile in the cell sites adjacent

to the donor. Since the mobile is actually on the booster’s translated

voice channel, it will not be seen in any cell site, so a system hand-

off will not occur.

A solution is to provide a means for the adjacent cell sites to see the

mobile on the voice channel that the cellular system thinks it is on.

Once this is accomplished, the cellular system can determine which

adjacent cell the mobile is driving into, assign a voice channel in that

cell, and then send a hand-off message for the mobile to go to that

channel.

This can be achieved by placing a reverse-translating

(Allen Telecom Systems) at each of the cell sites adjacent to

the booster. The unit is connected to the cell-site receive antennas to

scan for boosted mobiles and then translate those mobiles back to the

donor’s voice channel for presentation to the cell-site locating

receiver.

The Multi-Donor Units must know the relationships in effect between

boosted and donor channels for calls being handled by the EAC-2000

booster(s). This is accomplished by data signaling between the EAC-

2000 and any adjacent Multi-Donor Units on a booster link channel.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-13

(Continued)

The EAC-2000 looks for the boosted mobile signal level to fall below

a settable . If this happens, the

booster encodes and transmits the channel relationships to any Multi-

Donor Units that may be listening. However, this does not mean the

mobile will necessarily be handed off. Transmission of this

information merely allows the Multi-Donor Unit to know (if it is able

to see the mobile signal at sufficient level) to which channel it should

"untranslate" the mobile.

2.6 Multi-Hop Operation

Multi-hop operation (illustrated below) involves setting up two or more EAC-

2000 units (or EAC-2000 units and EAC-IV units) to operate together in a

line—for example, along a major corridor leading into a metropolitan area.

Donor

Cell ⇔Booster

#1 ⇔Booster

#2 ⇔Booster

The boosters are set up so that there is a two-way RF path between the donor

and booster #1 and between each pair of adjacent boosters. This arrangement

can be used to handle situations in which a mobile—

• Places or answers a call while in the coverage area of any of the boosters.

• Drives across the coverage boundary:

- Donor-to-booster

- Booster-to-booster (away from donor)

- Booster-to-booster (toward donor)

- Booster-to-donor

When a mobile places or answers a call, the first exchange of

information occurs on the reverse control channel (from mobile to

donor). If the call is a mobile-answered call, the exchange is a page

response. If it is a mobile-originated call, the mobile does an access.

There is little difference in the way EAC-2000 boosters handle these

two. Since the mobiles self-locate, the control channel chosen for the

access determines in which booster's coverage area (if any) the

mobile is located.

Page 2-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

All boosters between the terminating booster and the donor cell

repeat the access or page response and decode it. From the decoding

they extract the mobile identification number (MIN). Next, the

cellular system assigns a voice channel to that particular mobile by

sending, over the forward control channel, an initial voice channel

designation (IVCD) message consisting of the mobile’s MIN and a

voice channel that will be used by the donor for the call.

The multi-hop boosters are all monitoring the forward control channel

data stream. The boosters that decoded the access or page response

on the reverse control channel also decode the corresponding IVCD

message on the forward channel.

Booster #1 substitutes its chosen boosted channel for the donor voice

channel in the IVCD message and sets up a boost path between the

donor-assigned voice channel and the boosted voice channel of

booster #1. Likewise, booster #2 changes the channel number in the

IVCD message and sets up a boost path between the boosted voice

channels of boosters #1 and #2.

All of the boosters between the terminating EAC-2000, where the call

is placed, and the donor cell will in this fashion identify that

particular mobile as a candidate for repeating and will have decoded

the donor channel assigned.

The mobile will decode the IVCD message from the terminating

EAC-2000 and go to the boosted voice channel assigned by it. All

EAC-2000s between the donor and the terminating one will

simultaneously set up boost paths between the previous EAC-2000

(or donor) and the next EAC-2000. Thus the path from mobile to

donor is complete.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-15

2.7 Local/Remote Link

The operating parameters of the EAC-2000 can be programmed and monitored

locally, through a serial link attached to a standard RS-232, ASCII terminal.

The same control can be exercised remotely via a telephone line, modem, and

the same kind of terminal.

The local link is established by connecting a conventional ASCII, RS-

232 terminal to the 25-way D-sub connector on the EAC-2000

controller board. The terminal should be set for 9600 baud, even

parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, full duplex (no local echo), all capitals,

disable auto XON/XOFF and soft scroll, and "carriage return only."

The EAC-2000 comes equipped with an integral modem attached to

an installed cellular mobile radio.

This equipment makes it possible to dial up and communicate with

the EAC-2000 using a remote terminal and compatible modem. The

EAC-2000 can also be set up to automatically dial a predetermined

telephone number if a major fault occurs.

Once the remote link is established, the interface with the system is

exactly like that on the local link, but at a different baud rate. If both

links are up, characters typed on either terminal are echoed to both,

along with the resulting EAC-2000 output. This makes it possible for

an experienced operator to exercise the system remotely while

someone watches locally, or for the two to exercise the system

together.

2.8 Programmable Parameters

Virtually all of the operating parameters of the EAC-2000 are under software

control. For descriptions of the programmable parameters and the available

options for each, refer to Volume 2, Section 2.

2.9 Alarms

The EAC-2000 constantly monitors and logs a variety of alarm conditions. For

descriptions of these alarm conditions, see Volume 2, Section 3.8.

Page 2-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

6HFWLRQ 6SHFLILFDWLRQVDQG'UDZLQJV

3.1 Specifications

Specifications for power, environment, mechanical, RF, interface, and general

purpose alarm/control connections are given in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1. Specifications

Power

Recommended ac service:

AC power requirements

(for 10 channel operation):

28 Vdc power supply

without battery plant

28 Vdc power supply

with battery plant

System dc power requirements

(supplied by 28 V power supply):

200–240 Vac, single-phase

50/60 Hz

20 amp min.

2900 watts max.

4000 watts max.

19–30 Vdc

100 amps max.

Environment

Operating temperature:

Relative humidity:

Storage temperature:

-30o to +60oC

95% max @ +50oC

-40o to +75oC

Mechanical

Outdoor cabinet dimensions (HxWxD):

Weight:

68 x 24 x 40 in

(169.7 x 62.2 x 101.6 cm)

Approximately 690 lbs (363 kg)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-1

Figure 3-1. Specifications (Continued)

Gain:

Overall reverse path noise figure:

Channel filter bandwidth

Maximum input signal level:

Frequency tracking accuracy

(for channel boost mode):

RSSI range:

Reverse:

Forward:

RF power amplifiers:

PAs 1–10 (forward direction):

PA 6 (hand-off transmitter):

Reverse direction:

> 120 dB

< 12 dB

> 26 kHz @ -6 dB

> 75 kHz @ -60 dB

-40 dBm

±1.5 Hz max per MHz of translation

-120 to -20 dBm

-100 to -20 dBm

45-watt

10 x 2-watt (combined linearly)

Programmable frequency control:

Spacing:

Range:

Channels:

Output frequency accuracy

(for data transmission mode):

30 kHz

824–849 MHz

869–894 MHz

1–799, 991–1023

±1.5 ppm ±0.25 ppm ±0.25 ppm

max. max. max.

Maximum usable power output:

(Measured at antenna connector,

after internal combiner and duplexer

losses)

M1 antenna port (forward

direction):

M2 antenna port (hand-off):

D1 antenna port (reverse

direction):

5-Channel 10-Channel

20 watts/channel 15 watts/channel

100 watts total 150 watts total

20 watts max.

100 milliwatts per channel

1.0 watt total

Page 3-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

Figure 3-1. Specifications (Continued)

Interface

Antenna connectors:

Local diagnostic interface:

Remote diagnostic interface:

Type N

RS232, ASCII

9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop

bit, full duplex

Microcomm TravelPorte™ (high-speed, error

correcting, data compression modem)

General Purpose Alarm/Control

Connections

Digital Inputs (pins 6, 7, 8, 9):

Load:

Low:

High:

Open Collector Outputs

(pins 2, 3, 4, 5):

Analog inputs

(pins 10, 11, 12, 13):

Load:

Range:

+5 Vdc source (pin 1):

> 100 kΩ

< 2 Vdc

> 4 Vdc max. +28 Vdc

Max. +15 Vdc, 20 mA

Impedance 733 Ω

1 MΩ

0–5 Vdc, 20 mV resolution

+5 Vdc ±5%, 100 mA max.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-3

3.2 Equipment Characteristics

EAC-2000 accessories, module interchangeability, compliance, and reliability are

described in this section, along with skills required for servicing the equipment.

The following items are supplied with the EAC-2000:

• EAC-2000 Technical Manual (Volumes 1, 2, and 3), power

supply manual, mobile manual, modem manual

Inside the EAC-2000, the following modules are interchangeable:

• RF boards (positions 1–11)

• 45-watt PAs

The EAC-2000 complies with the applicable agency rules regarding

cellular base stations for AMPS systems.

• The unit is designed to work in

systems that comply with—

- EIA/TIA 553A Cellular System Mobile Station–Land

Station Compatibility Specification

- EIA/TIA IS-20A, Recommended Minimum Standards for

800 MHz Cellular Land Stations

- EIA/TIA IS-19B, Recommended Minimum Standards for

800 MHz Cellular Subscriber Units

- RSS-118, Radio Standards Specification, Canada

• The EIA/TIA IS54A and IS54B

Cellular system Dual-Mode Mobile Station - Base Station

Compatibility Standard specifies both analog and digital modes

of operation. The EAC-2000 is not capable of boosting digital

calls. However, the EAC-2000 can operate with dual mode

systems and dual mode mobiles. The EAC-2000 control

channel always transmits with the "PCI" bit clear. Dual mode

radios operating on the boosted control channel therefore access

using the EIA 553 (i.e., analog) protocol. The donor cell,

whether dual mode or not, will assign an analog channel, and

the EAC-2000 will boost the call.

Page 3-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

(Continued)

• The Motorola NAMPS Air

Interface Specification specifies both a 30 kHz wide channel

operation and a 10 kHz wide channel operation. The EAC-2000

is not capable of boosting calls assigned to narrow channels.

However, the EAC-2000 can operate with both NAMPS radios

and NAMPS systems. The EAC-2000 control channel always

transmits with the "EP" bit clear. NAMPS radios operating on

the boosted control channel therefore access using the EIA 553

protocol. The donor cell, whether NAMPS capable or not, will

assign a wide channel, and the EAC-2000 will boost the call.

• This modem is compatible with the

following modem standards:

Bell 103

Bell 212A

CCITT V.21

CCITT V.22

CCITT V.22 BIS

CCITT V.32

CCITT V.42

CCITT V.42 BIS

MNP Class 5

MNP Class 10

• The cellular radio used for remote mode

operation is a standard unit and complies with applicable

standards.

Careful consideration has been given to the reliability of the unit

during design.

• In most cases, is based on derating component

specifications to 50% or less of guaranteed limits.

•The has transient protection to guard against

lightning and power line surges.

•The circuitry has a low voltage reset and

watchdog timer to provide firmware program reliability.

The microprocessor components and circuitry require service by

personnel skilled in repairing firmware-driven logic assemblies. The

RF circuitry contains surface-mounted components that require

special care when being repaired.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-5

3.3 EAC-2000 Illustrations

Figures 3-2 and 3-3 illustrate front and back views of the AMPS EAC-2000 with

the doors removed.

3.4 EAC-2000 Diagrams

Figure 3-4 shows the regulator module wiring diagram, and Figure 3-5 shows

the power supply shelf wiring diagram. In addition, the following foldout

diagrams are included in this section:

• Block Diagram

• Main Harness Wiring Diagrams

• Card Cage Wiring Diagram

• Backplane Wiring Diagram

• PA Cage Wiring Diagram

• Mobile Shelf Wiring Diagram

Page 3-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

Figure 3-2. AMPS EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-7

Figure 3-3. AMPS EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed)

Page 3-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

Figure 3-4. Regulator Module Wiring Diagram

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-9

Figure 3-5. Power Supply Shelf Wiring Diagram

Page 3-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)

$SSHQGLFHV

27-7658-3

Issue 12/95

Field Support

If you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact

at one of the following telephone numbers:

Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)

or (216) 349-8413

Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413

$SSHQGL[$

7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH

Contents

A.1 Getting Help .........................................A-3

A.2 Basic Troubleshooting Tips ............................... A-3

A.2.1 Illegible Display ...............................A-3

A.2.2 No Display................................... A-3

A.2.3 No Power on Channel ........................... A-4

A.3 Donor-Dropped Calls ...................................A-6

A.3.1 Weak Signals from Donor ........................A-6

A.3.2 Cellular System Hand-offs ........................A-7

A.3.3 Donor RSSI < Threshold Counts (Nominal Number) ...... A-8

A.3.4 Donor RSSI < Threshold Counts (Large Number) ........ A-9

A.4 Calls Not Processed ................................... A-10

A.5 Poor Talk-Back Range (Mobile-to-Booster) ................... A-11

A.6 Dropped Calls Near Edge of Booster Coverage Area ............ A-13

A.7 Excessive Hand-backs/Hand-ins on Voice Channel .............. A-15

A.8 No Hand-in ......................................... A-16

A.9 No Hand-back ....................................... A-16

A.10 Dropped Calls Along Multi-Hop Path ....................... A-17

A.11 Unsuccessful Setups ................................... A-18

A.12 Dropped Calls Due to SAT Fades ......................... A-19

A.13 Cross-Talk.......................................... A-20

A.14 Erratic Operation of Remote Modem ....................... A-22

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-1

Contents (Continued)

A.15 Alarms ............................................ A-23

A.15.1 SYN LOC Alarms ............................ A-23

A.15.2 I2C and EEPROM Alarms ....................... A-23

A.15.3 RF COM Alarms ............................. A-23

A.15.4 Personality Alarms ............................ A-23

A.16 Noise . . ........................................... A-26

A.16.1 Burst Noise at the Mobile ....................... A-26

A.16.2 Transmitter Output Noise, Forward Direction .......... A-28

A.17 Trouble Locking Onto Control Channel...................... A-29

Page A-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.1 Getting Help

The procedures in this appendix may be used in case of trouble. For help

with these or any other problems, feel free to contact Allen Telecom

Systems’, Extend-A-Cell Technical Hotline:

1-800-800-EAC4 (1-800-800-3224)

International: 1-216-349-8413

Office hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. EST, Monday–Friday. Twenty-

four hour emergency paging is available by following the directions on the

Hotline voicemail message. Routine assistance at other times can be

arranged in advance.

A.2 Basic Troubleshooting Tips

Symptom: Illegible display when terminal is turned on.

Solution: Check terminal setup.

Symptom: No display when terminal is turned on.

Solution: Power down. Recheck power hookup, terminal

hookup, and terminal setup.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-3

Symptom: No power on one or more channels.

Check the ALA screen:

Is there an RF board Out-of-Service alarm? If yes—

Is it due to a Personality Mismatch?

Solution: Check to make sure that the right IF board

has been installed and that it is seated correctly on

the back plane connector.

Is it due to Serial Data Link alarms?

Solution: Swap the board with another position in

the card cage. If the Serial Data Link alarm stays

with the slot position, replace the back plane board.

If the Serial Data Link alarm goes with the suspect

RF board, replace that RF board.

Is it due to Synthesizer Unlock alarms?

Solution: Replace the defective RF board.

Are there PA Low Power alarms and a PA Out-of-

Service alarm?

Solution: Continue with the following check items.

If no other cause is found, PAs may need to be

exchanged or replaced.

Page A-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

(Continued)

Are any connections loose? Check, especially, the

"Phoenix" connectors that seat in the PA ’D’

connectors (accessible through the back of the unit).

Solution: Tighten loose connections.

Where is power being lost? (Use normal RF

troubleshooting procedures to determine this.)

• When keyed, the IF board output should

be above -8 dBm, measured at the TNC

connector input to the PA shelf.

• The 45W PA output can be checked at the

N connector on the panel below the TNC

connectors.

Does the power supply current rise by about

5–7A when the PA is keyed?

If so, the PA is receiving drive and putting out

power. This indicates a problem somewhere

between the output connector and the combiner.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-5

A.3 Donor-Dropped Calls

Customers complain that calls are being dropped. SCS and DCS show

that an excessive number of calls are being terminated due to "DONOR

RSSI < THRESHOLD."

(If customer complaints are few, but call statistics indicate a high

percentage of DONOR < RSSI THRESHOLD counts, refer to sections

A.3.3 and A.3.4 below.)

Signals from the donor cell site may be below the default donor

disconnect threshold (-80 dBm). The EAC-2000 equipment will

disconnect the call and record it as a DONOR RSSI <

THRESHOLD if the received donor signal is below this level.

The minimum recommended donor signal level is -75 dBm (-70

dBm for Multi-Hop), although operation to -85 dBm can be

expected with some degradation. If this is acceptable, the donor

minimum disconnect threshold should be changed to -90 dBm.

Under no circumstance should reliable operation be expected

below -85 dBm.

Weak signals from the donor may be a result of—

Improperly engineered donor-repeater RF path.

Improperly oriented donor antenna.

Insufficient gain in the donor antenna.

Excessive loss in the RF cable between the donor antenna

and the EAC-2000.

Nearby obstructions affecting or blocking the donor

antenna.

Lossy or bad RF antenna connectors.

Defective duplexer within the EAC-2000.

Defective forward preamp module.

Defective internal RF cabling within the EAC-2000.

Page A-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

The cellular system hands the EAC-2000-processed mobile to

another cell site.

This will occur if there is another nearby cell site where the

signal from the EAC-2000 is stronger than at the selected donor

cell site, and if the signal from the EAC-2000 to the donor cell

site is below the donor’s hand-off candidate threshold (typically

-85 dBm). This will result in a dropped call if the mobile is out

of range of the other cell site. If this is happens, any one of the

following steps can be used to solve the problem:

• Increase the signal level from the EAC-2000 to above the

desired cell site's hand-off candidate threshold.

• Reduce the hand-off candidate threshold at the desired

donor cell site to below the signal being received from the

EAC-2000.

• Reorient and/or replace the donor antenna at the EAC-

2000 with a more directional antenna to reduce the signal

level at the nearby cell site to less than that at the desired

donor cell site.

• Select the stronger nearby cell site as the donor.

Note that the signal level received at the donor cell site from the

EAC-2000 will nominally be 20 to 25 dB below that received

at the EAC-2000 from the donor cell. That is, a signal of -60

dBm from the donor cell site at the EAC-2000 generally

correspond to a -80 to -85 dBm signal at the donor cell site

from the EAC-2000. This difference in power levels is neces-

sary to prevent the EAC-2000 from interfering with the channel

reuse pattern of the other cell sites within the cellular system.

Thus, in most cases the signal level from the EAC-2000 at the

cell site will be below that cell site's hand-off candidate

threshold.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-7

Calls are processed normally, but DCS statistics indicate that

a small percentage (up to 20%) are recorded as being

terminated at the EAC-2000 due to DONOR RSSI <

THRESHOLD.

This is considered to be a normal condition. The majority of

calls should end due to MOBILE RELEASE DETECTED.

However, there will always be mobiles that drive out of range

of the EAC-2000, away from the cellular system while trying to

maintain the call. These calls will drop due to SAT FADES

either at the EAC-2000 or at the donor cell site. Usually, the

SAT fade timer at the EAC-2000 is synchronized with the timer

at the donor cell site. Thus, if the donor cell site drops the call

due to a SAT fade before the EAC-2000’s SAT timer has

expired, the EAC-2000 will record the call as a DONOR <

THRESHOLD reason for termination (as explained below).

This number can be reduced if the EAC-2000 SAT fade timer

is set to a shorter interval than the cell site’s SAT fade timer.

This is not recommended, however, since it may result in some

marginal calls being dropped that otherwise could continue.

The recommended setting for the SAT fade timer at the EAC-

2000 is the same setting that is used at the cell site (usually 3

to 5 seconds). This setting allows the majority of call

terminations under these weak-signal conditions to be recorded

as SAT FADES, with some nominal number being recorded as

DONOR < THRESHOLD.

Page A-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

Calls are processed normally, but a large DONOR < THRESH-

OLD count, along with a low number of SAT FADE counts,

shows up in DCS statistics as the reason for calls being

terminated.

This situation happens when the SAT fade timer in the EAC-

2000 is set to a period longer than the SAT fade timer at the

donor cell site. That is, weak mobiles that are dropped by the

donor cell site due to SAT fade will show up as a

donor-dropped call at the EAC-2000 because the EAC-2000 is

still looking for the mobile to reappear.

Setting the SAT fade timer at the EAC-2000 to a period longer

than the donor cell site fade timer is not necessary (nor is it

recommended), but it does not cause any harm to system

operation. The SAT fade timer may be set longer than the cell

site if the operator wishes, as long as it is understood that this

will result in an unusually high number of DONOR RSSI <

THRESHOLD counts.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-9

A.4 Calls Not Processed

Mobile-originated calls through the EAC-2000 result in an immediate "fast

busy" in the earpiece. Also, calls placed to mobiles in the EAC-2000

service area receive an OUT-OF-SERVICE message from the cellular

system. Mobiles otherwise lock onto the EAC-2000 control channel.

This condition may occur for one of two reasons:

• This can

occur if the mobile is at the edge of the booster coverage area. The

signal from the EAC-2000 must be above -110 to -105 dBm for

consistently reliable reverse-path control channel operation. Also,

note that many manufacturers' mobiles are capable of locking onto a

weak control channel at signal levels far below that usable for voice

communication.

• Check the

following hardware to confirm that a reverse RF path exists for the

mobile to obtain service with the donor cell:

RF board in slot 1 (switch with another board)

Presence of power to the Reverse Combiner module

Reverse RF preamp module

*Defective duplexers

*Defective mobile M1 or M2 antenna system/cabling

*RF cables for open, short, or intermittent connections

The mobiles may operate satisfactorily for the last three

conditions (marked *) when near the EAC-2000, but will exhibit

these symptoms when operated at any distance from the EAC-2000.

Page A-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.5 Poor Talk-back Range (Mobile-to-Booster)

Talk-out range seems to be significantly better than the talk-back range.

This problem exhibits itself as particularly noisy signals from the mobile

while the mobile is receiving relatively noise-free signals from the EAC-

2000.

This condition may occur for several reasons:

• If the signal from the

EAC-2000 back to the donor cell site exceeds the power reduction

threshold at the cell site, then the cell site will attempt to reduce the

"mobile signal" from the EAC-2000.

Since the output from the EAC-2000 is limited at +20 dBm, the cell

site may reduce the mobile to its minimum power step. One way to

resolve this problem is to work through the SET functions to reduce

the reverse PA power, which is adjustable from +5 to +20 dBm.

In addition, the power cutback threshold at the donor cell may be

increased, if necessary, to maintain the signal from the EAC-2000

below the cutback threshold. At least a 6 dB margin below the

cutback threshold is recommended to prevent the mobiles from

erroneously being powered down.

• If base station antennas that are

optimized for the cellular transmit band are used, then the mobile

receive signals in the cellular receive band (mobile transmit band) at

the EAC-2000 will suffer. Antennas that offer gain over the entire

transmit-receive band should be used. This applies to both the

mobile M1/M2 antennas and the donor D1 antenna.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-11

A.5 Poor Talk-back Range (Mobile-to-Booster) (Continued)

• Poor isolation between the donor (D1) and mobile service

(M1/M2) antennas at the EAC-2000 result in an increased noise floor

(and possibly cross-talk) at the EAC-2000's reverse preamp input.

This will also reduce the effective mobile EAC-2000 range since this

noise floor will mask weak signals.

Note that the antenna connected to the modem mobile within the

EAC-2000 must also have sufficient isolation from the D1 and

M1/M2 antennas. Otherwise, the local mobile may cause preamp

overload within the EAC-2000, and hence noisy operation for other

mobiles that are being repeated.

Normally, vertical separation of 40 feet or more between the D1, the

M1/M2, and the modem mobile antennas will provide adequate

isolation. Appendix D describes how much isolation is needed, how

to achieve it, and how to measure it.

• A defective reverse preamp will also

cause poor talk-back range. First, check to see if the gain through

the preamp is within specification (better than 9 dB for each path,

exclusive of duplexer losses). If gain is less than this value on either

path, then the preamp should be replaced. Ordinarily, diversity will

select the better path if one side of the preamp is bad, but it is

possible that for both paths to be bad, particularly if lightning damage

is involved.

• Defective duplexers and/or cables

with excessive insertion loss (> 2 dB) will also affect talk-back range.

• Since the EAC-2000 (and cell sites)

transmit at higher ERPs than the mobiles, some imbalance between

talk-out and talk-back will exist. Diversity and low-noise preamps

are typically used to minimize this imbalance, but some imbalance

usually remains even with these measures.

Page A-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.6 Dropped Calls Near Edge of Booster Coverage Area

Calls are set up either to or from mobiles when they are relatively close

to the EAC-2000 but are dropped abruptly when they are near the edge of

the EAC-2000 coverage area away from the donor cell.

This situation may occur if the power output from PA 6 (the hand-in PA)

is low. Normal operation is for the forward voice channel (PAs 2–5 and

7-11) to hand the mobile back to its originally assigned channel when that

mobile drops below the hand-back threshold at the EAC-2000. The

hand-in transmitter (PA 6) is used to hand the mobile back to the boosted

channel, assuming that PA 6 again captures the mobile after it has been

sent to its original channel. Thus, low PA 6 power will not hand a mobile

back to the booster, thereby causing that mobile to be abruptly dropped if

it is not within range of the donor cell.

Low power from PA 6 may be caused by one of the following:

• PA 6 power output adjusted too low. The PA 6 power level should

be set to at least as high as the voice channel power output setting.

• Defective PA 6, providing low power output.

• Low RF board 6 output (should be at least -8 dBm).

• Defective M2 antenna, including improper vertical alignment.

• Defective duplexer associated with PA 6.

• Defective RF cabling associated with PA 6.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-13

A.6 Dropped Calls Near Edge of Booster Coverage Area

(Continued)

In addition to the causes just described, calls may be dropped unnecessarily

by the EAC-2000 if the system parameters are improperly set. The

following two conditions should be checked if an abnormal number of

dropped calls are being reported.

• This will place the mobile in

a noisy path situation before attempting the hand-back/grab-back

sequence. A mobile in a noisy path situation will have a higher

probability of missing the subsequent grab-back message after it is

handed back to its original donor channel. If the mobile does not

correctly decode the grab-back message, and if it is out of range of

the donor cell, the call will then be dropped.

•

This would increase the probability of a grab-back

transmission being missed by the mobile, particularly if a low hand-

back threshold is programmed, as in the previous paragraph. The

number of attempts should be reduced to minimize the probability of

a missed hand-in transmission under these circumstances.

Page A-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.7 Excessive Hand-backs/Hand-ins on Voice Channel

The mobile user notices an excessive number of hand-offs when in the

EAC-2000 area.

A certain number of hand-back/hand-in operations are to be expected in

normal system operation. These hand-offs will occur when the mobile is

near the fringe of the EAC-2000 area and away from the donor coverage

area. Excessive hand-offs may occur due to improper selection of

hand-back and hand-in thresholds, as follows:

• A

minimum of 6 dB between these two thresholds is required, and

10 dB is recommended to keep the hand-back attempts to a

minimum.

• The hand-in

threshold should always be higher than the hand-back threshold (for

example, -75 dBm for hand-in and -85 dBm for hand-back).

• This situation will occur if

there is a minimum of overlap between the donor and the EAC-2000.

The EAC-2000 attempts to hand back to the donor, but it is always

stronger than the donor because it attempts the hand-back when the

mobile is still relatively close (and therefore strong) to the EAC-2000.

•After determining that the thresholds are properly set, the time

between the hand-back attempts may be adjusted along with the

maximum number of attempts to minimize the effect of excessive

hand-offs to the user.

• If a

multiple-donor installation is involved, improper signal balancing

from the EAC-2000 back to the donor cell sites can also cause

excessive hand-offs. Refer to the Multi-Donor application note and

troubleshooting guide if this type of installation is involved.

Reverse RF boards with improperly calibrated or defective reverse RSSI

circuitry can also cause excessive hand-backs and hand-ins on the voice

channel. However, this will usually be noticed with a particular channel

rather than with all channels in the EAC-2000.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-15

A.8 No Hand-in

Mobiles drive into the area of the EAC-2000 from the donor area but are

not handed-in until they drive close to the EAC-2000. Calls are otherwise

processed normally to and from the mobiles within the EAC-2000 coverage

area.

This situation will occur if there is significant overlap of coverage between

the donor and the EAC-2000. The signal from the EAC-2000 must be a

few dB stronger than the donor at the mobile before hand-in will occur.

If desired, the hand-in threshold can be raised to minimize the number of

unnecessary hand-in transmissions.

A.9 No Hand-back

Mobiles do not hand-back to the donor when driving from the EAC-2000

coverage area to the donor coverage area.

This condition may occur in the following situations:

• If the hand-back threshold is set too high, the EAC-

2000 will exceed the maximum number of hand-back attempts

allowed before the mobile is close enough to the donor to keep the

EAC-2000 from capturing it with its subsequent hand-in attempt.

The hand-back threshold should be decreased while the number of

hand-back attempts is increased.

• This condition would be associated with

one channel only, rather than all channels. This can be checked by

keying the suspect forward channel via the SET mode, and then

monitoring the transmitted signal for power output, proper deviation,

and the data waveform for excessive distortion.

Page A-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.10 Dropped Calls Along Multi-Hop Path

Mobiles are abruptly dropped or are handed back to the donor channel

while driving along a multi-hop corridor.

This situation will occur if the hand-in and hand-back thresholds are

improperly set at each EAC-2000 along the corridor. Also, minimum or

nonexistent overlapping coverage between the EAC-2000s cause calls to

be dropped.

• In a multi-hop system, the

hand-back thresholds at each EAC-2000 must be set so that they are

at least 10 to 15 dB below the received level from the next EAC-

2000 down the corridor. This level is determined when the EAC-

2000 down the corridor is transmitting back to the current EAC-2000

at its maximum limited output (normally +20 dBm).

The 10 to 15 dB margin is necessary to allow the mobile to operate

down to nominally -110 dBm at any EAC-2000. Otherwise, any

EAC between the donor and the EAC-2000 serving the mobile could

erroneously hand-back a mobile to the wrong channel and cause a

dropped call if the 10 to 15 dB margin is not provided. (For

example, if the maximum received level from the next EAC-2000

down the corridor is at -90 dBm, then the hand-back threshold should

be set at -105 dBm.)

•Calls could also be dropped if there is minimum overlap coverage

between the EAC-2000s, and if the hand-in threshold is set too high.

That is, the mobile could drive down the corridor to an area that is

below the hand-back threshold of its current EAC-2000 and still not

be above the hand-in threshold of the next EAC-2000. The hand-in

threshold of the next EAC-2000 down the corridor should be set such

that it will attempt hand-ins to the mobile before that mobile drops

below the hand-back threshold of its current EAC-2000. Note that

this is the case only for those mobiles that are driving down the

corridor away from the donor.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-17

A.10 Dropped Calls Along Multi-Hop Path (Continued)

• For mobiles that are traveling

toward the donor up a corridor, a too-high hand-back threshold at its

current EAC-2000 could also cause a call to be dropped. That is, the

current EAC-2000 may have depleted its hand-back attempts to the

mobile if that mobile has not progressed to the point where the signal

from the next EAC-2000 up the corridor is stronger than the current

EAC-2000. This is not likely to occur because the hand-back

thresholds must be set to a reasonably low level, as described earlier.

• It also is possible to have a multi-hop

system with adequate signal levels for the interconnecting path (due

to antenna heights at the EAC-2000s), but to have a gap between the

mobile coverage areas of the EAC-2000s. If this is the case, then

mobiles traveling either down or up the corridor will likely have their

calls dropped when they reach this area. To prevent this from

occurring, the mobile coverage areas should be designed such that

overlapping coverage is provided, preferably with received signal

levels from the mobiles at or above -95 dBm in the overlap area.

A.11 Unsuccessful Setups

Mobile is identified as "RSSI > Threshold," and call setup is attempted, but

the mobile does not go to the boosted voice channel. These calls are

labeled as "unsuccessful setup" by SCS at the EAC-2000.

In this situation, mobiles are not being handed-in from their original voice

channel by the EAC-2000. This can occur in areas where signals are

approximately the same at the mobile from the donor and from the

EAC-2000. The EAC-2000 must be at least a few dB stronger than the

donor at the mobile before the EAC-2000 will capture that mobile. This

is a desirable condition in that it keeps the mobile on the donor when

signals from the donor are adequate.

Page A-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.12 Dropped Calls Due to SAT Fades

An excessive number of SAT fades are noted in the call statistics, or

customers are complaining that calls are being dropped.

• If excessive SAT fades are noted with one RF board, then a problem

may exist with the reverse receiver portion (450 kHz

limiter-amplifier, discriminator, audio filter, audio switch) of that

board. In this case, the RF board must be replaced.

• If excessive SAT fades are noted with half or all RF boards, then

check for SAT detector operation as follows:

Enter the command. Check to see if the SAT

free run frequency reads 6100 ± 50 Hz. Press to exit.

Note that SAT fades will be recorded if the mobile subscriber hangs up

within 10 seconds after the call is placed. This will result in a nominal

number of SAT fades in the call statistics, which is considered normal.

A defective reverse preamplifier could also cause an excessive number of

SAT fades. Check the reverse preamplifier for proper gain (9 dB

minimum) and monitor its output with a spectrum analyzer to make sure

that it is not generating noise or other spurious signals.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-19

A.13 Cross-Talk

Cross-talk is heard through the booster on some channels, particularly if

two or more mobiles are close to the EAC-2000.

Cross-talk can be a result of insufficient isolation between the M1/M2 and

donor antennas, and/or too-close spacing between the donor and boosted

channel assignments.

• A minimum of 75 dB

antenna isolation is recommended.

Operation with antenna isolations of less than 80 dB is feasible if

signal levels from the donor cell are stronger than -65 dBm. Refer

to the appendix on isolation for suggestions on achieving and

measuring antenna isolation.

For multi-hop installations, adjacent EAC-2000s along

the corridor should not use channels from the same 21-channel

spacing set. If the same channel set is used, the intermodulation

products from the transmitter outputs in both directions will fall

directly on the receiver inputs. In many cases, the randomness

of the channel assignment by the donor site will minimize this

problem, but there will be channel assignment combinations that

could result in significant cross-talk due to intermod. It is best

to avoid this possibility by offsetting the channel sets between

adjacent EAC-2000s.

• Two or more mobiles that

are very close to the EAC-2000 (within a quarter of a mile or so)

could cause cross-talk to a weak signal at the EAC-2000 from a

distant mobile. The EAC-2000 automatically powers down the two

strong mobiles to minimize this condition, but there could be a few

seconds of cross-talk to the weak mobile until the EAC-2000 has had

time to power down the strong mobiles.

Page A-20 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.13 Cross-Talk (Continued)

• Other noncellular transmitters

that may be operating near the EAC-2000 may also cause cross-talk.

Standard procedures for solving this type of problem should be used.

The presence of a foreign signal on one of the boosted reverse path

channels can be checked as follows:

1. Enter SET, disable RF board 1, select the hand-in threshold

menu, record the value, and then set it to 0 (disabled).

2. Exit SET, and monitor SCS for current call activity.

3. When all current calls are terminated, enter the following

sequence:

Entry Function

Invokes RF board communication mode

Enables "receive only" mode.

Either command shows reverse signal

levels.

4. Repeat the commands several times and note the

RSSI levels on each reverse channel. A channel that has an

abnormally high RSSI reading (i.e., -100 dBm or so) compared

to the other channels probably has a foreign signal present on

one of the boosted reverse channels.

5. When this test is completed, exit the RFC mode by pressing

, and then enter SET to restore board 1 back to service

and restore the hand-in threshold to its original value.

• Nonlinear or oxidized

connections near the EAC-2000 can also cause cross-talk. Again,

standard procedures should be used to solve this type of problem.

• A mobile operating in close proximity to the

EAC-2000 may be susceptible to overload by the voice channel or

hand-off transmitters. This may result in some mobiles responding

to a hand-off data transmission meant for a different mobile, thereby

causing it to end up on the wrong channel.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-21

A.14 Erratic Operation of Remote Modem

Remote dial-up of the cellular modem results in either not connecting, or

if a connection is made, excessive errors.

This situation may be caused by any of several different factors:

• If insufficient isolation exists

between the modem mobile antenna and the donor or the M1 and M2

antennas, RF overload of the mobile can cause modem connect prob-

lems. Antenna isolation problems also cause some modem calls to

be degraded, while others are okay. This is due to the donor cell

randomly assigning the mobile to channels that fall on a spurious

product that is generated due to mobile overload. The use of an

attenuator at the modem mobile's antenna connector can help in may

cases. Contact Field Service for assistance.

• Network limitations in some areas degrade

operation. The modems should be set to negotiate an acceptable

speed, but it may help to lower the baud rate to 2400 or even 1200,

to force the modems to use a lower speed.

• The direct path from

the donor to the mobile may be inadequate or noisy. The EAC-2000

normally does not boost the modem mobile, so that a voice channel

will not be used when remotely monitoring EAC-2000 If this is the

case, either a better antenna (gain) should be used with the modem

mobile or the EAC-2000 should be allowed to boost the modem

mobile.

• If poor results persist, then it may be possible

that the mobile is defective. Troubleshoot this condition by

substitution only after the conditions outlined above have been

checked.

Page A-22 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.15 Alarms

Occasional Synthesizer Unlocked alarms are being logged, but

the boards remain in service.

The unlock may be occurring only when transient conditions

(e.g., high temperature or an adjacent board keyed) exist. The

board should be replaced. The board should be replaced, but as

long as the software does not take the board out of service, it

can be left in operation.

RF COM alarms are reported.

A RF COM alarm indicates that a particular RF board failed to

respond correctly to a command from the main controller board.

An occasional RF COM alarm may be experienced, which

should be of no concern because the board will continue to

operate normally. If a hardware problem exists, the main

controller board will take the affected RF board out of service

and generate an alarm for subsequent auto-dialing.

An IF board generates a personality alarm and the board is

taken out of service.

A personality alarm indicates the wrong board type in the EAC-

2000 (i.e., a JTACS board in an AMPS system).

The system is logging PA alarms.

PA alarms on a single PA are most often caused by PA failure.

PA alarms on multiple PAs indicate a problem with the PA

cage wiring or PA interface board. The following may also

cause PA alarms:

• PA Power Low Alarm Point set too low

• PA power potentiometer set too low

• PA improperly seated in page cage

• Connectors on PA cage or connectors on PA damaged

• Faulty RF board (produces low input power to PA)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-23

(Continued)

• Faulty PA interface board

• Faulty PA cage or system wiring harness

• Installation of PA into unit with power on (causing PA dc

breaker to trip)

• Faulty PA dc breaker

The following troubleshooting procedure is recommended.

1. Using the SET command, examine the PA Power Low

Point. Use Key Forward PA (Main Menu → Power

Amplifiers Menu → Key Forward PA) to key the PA and

examine the reported power. If the reported power is only

slightly low, follow the PA power adjustment procedure

(see Volume 1, Section 4.7) or adjust the PA Power Low

Alarm Point.

2. If the power reported with Key Forward PA is acceptable,

bring the PA back into service. (See the NOTE following

step 10 for instructions on how to do this.) Place test calls

until the call comes up on the board/PA. If an alarm

occurs then, the RF board should be replaced. (Note:

Certain failures on the RF board may cause power to be

generated with Key Forward PA but not when used to

repeat a call. This is because the RF board uses a locally

generated oscillator signal with Key Forward PA and uses

the received signal when a call is being repeated.)

3. If zero or very low PA power is reported, unkey the PA.

Remove it from the card cage and examine the connectors

on the PA and in the associated PA slot. In particular,

pay close attention to the RF power connectors and the dc

power pins.

• If an RF connector in the PA is pushed in, then the

PA will have to be replaced.

• If the RF connector on the card cage receptacle is

pushed out, it is possible to reseat the RF connector

by pushing it in from the rear of the PA cage while

the PA is installed.

4. Examine the coaxial cables that connect the RF card cage

to the PA cage, looking for loose connections, broken

coaxial, etc.

Page A-24 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

(Continued)

5. Examine the PA dc breaker associated with the alarmed

PA (refer back to Figure 4-3 in Volume 1 for breaker

locations). If the breaker is tripped, reset it.

6. Even if no visible problem is seen, reinstall the alarmed

PA. Key it again, and examine the reported power. If the

power is acceptable now, the problem may be that the PA

was improperly seated, or that an earlier PA replacement

caused the breaker to trip.

7. If reseating the PA does not fix the problem, or if alarms

occur on the same PA within a few days, replace the PA.

Key the new PA and examine the power reported.

8. If replacing the PA does not correct the problem, replace

the RF board (or temporarily exchange the board with a

board from another slot).

9. If replacing the PA and the RF board does not correct the

problem, replace the PA interface board.

10. If none of the above procedures correct the problem,

replace the PA cage.

Once a PA alarm occurs, that PA will show an Out-

of-Service Alarm for an indefinite period of time and will not

be used for calls. To cause the system to more quickly test an

out-of-service PA, the operator may reset the system either by

using the RES command or by powering off and then on.

However, boosted control channel service will be lost for a few

seconds.

It is possible to cause the software to retest a single RF board

and PA without loss of service. To do this, use the SET

command to bring up RF board status (Main Menu → RF

Boards Menu → Position x → Status), and select ENABLED.

When the ENABLED option is chosen (even if the board is

already enabled) the board and PA will be fully initialized and

retested. The board/PA will be momentarily keyed and all

major functions—including synthesizer lock, PA power output,

etc.—will be checked. If no alarms occur, the board and PA

will be returned to service. This operation will not cause

control channel interruption unless it is performed on the board

that is repeating the control channel. To see the results, exit

SET and use the ALA command.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-25

Page A-26 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

A.16 Noise

Customers complain about noise bursts or periods of muted

audio.

Under certain circumstances, noise bursts or periods of muted

audio may happen due to the following:

• If the

mobile is in the fringe area of the EAC-2000 out of range

from the donor cell, then the mobile will undergo a series

of noise bursts as the EAC-2000 attempts to hand the

mobile back to the donor cell, and then takes it back.

Since the EAC-2000 has no way of knowing whether the

mobile is driving back to the donor or out into oblivion,

this is a normal consequence.

The impact of this operation can be reduced by increasing

the length of time between hand-back attempts, reducing

the number of hand-back attempts, and/or changing the

handback threshold. This can be accomplished through

the SET menu under System Parameters.

• There have been reported

instances of noise bursts occasionally being heard on

boosted mobiles when the EAC-2000 is setting up a new

call. These noise bursts occur when the hand-off

transmitter (PA 6) is keyed on for a hand-in transmission

and when the correct combination of boosted donor

channels exist.

The EAC-2000 uses a different channel set for its boosted

channel set. The intermodulation products generated by the

high-power voice channel signals therefore fall on a channel set

different from that used by the donor cell. Thus, these

intermodulation products do not fall on the donor channels that

are being boosted. Using a different channel set in this manner

allows the EAC-2000 to receive -75 dBm signals with just a

few channels separation from the high-power +43 dBm boosted

signals.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-27

A.16.1 Burst Noise at the Mobile (Continued)

However, hand-in transmissions by PA 6 are performed on the

donor channels. This allows an intermodulation product to be

generated, where the difference in frequency between any two

EAC-2000 boosted voice channels is mixed with the PA 6

transmission. This product will thus fall on the adjacent (or a

multiple of the adjacent, depending on the combination of EAC-

2000 voice channels that are active) donor channel on which the

hand-off transmission is made. If this product falls on one of

the active donor channels which is being boosted, and it is of

sufficient amplitude, then a noise burst will be passed through

the EAC-2000 to the mobile.

If poor antenna isolation exists at the EAC-2000 the hand-off

burst could be stronger than the donor voice signal that is being

boosted. In this case, the hand-off intermodulation product will

capture the forward voice channel in the EAC-2000 and the

hand-off transmission will be passed to the mobile.

In this case, the mobile would be handed to the new channel

with obvious disastrous results. This has been rare and has

occurred only where the installer has completely disregarded the

minimum recommended antenna separation requirements.

Meeting the minimum antenna isolation requirements described

in the appendix on isolation will ensure that erroneous hand-off

transmissions are not passed to currently boosted mobiles.

The noise burst can be minimized by increasing the isolation

between the donor and the M1/M2 antennas. This is most

easily accomplished by placing a 10 dB pad (with TNC

connections) at the input to the forward preamplifier. This pad

would normally be placed on the RCV port of the donor

duplexer, with the preamp cable being attached to the pad. In

most cases, the EAC-2000 has sufficient forward gain margin

to allow this to be done, even at the minimum acceptable donor

input signal level of -75 dBm. The donor signal will now read

10 dB lower (i.e., -85 dBm). If the EAC-2000 is being

operated at the minimum recommended input signal level, be

sure to also move the Donor RSSI Disconnect level in the SET

menu down by 10 dB.

Page A-28 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

(Continued)

For donor signals that are stronger than -60 dBm or so, it is

recommended that the pad be placed in the D1 antenna lead

rather than at the forward preamp input. The reason for this is

that the reverse signal will likely need to be reduced to prevent

the signals arriving at the donor from being "too hot" and

therefore being above the mobile power cutback threshold at the

donor. This pad may be placed either externally on the D1 type

N connector, or on the antenna port (TNC) of the donor

duplexer. In either case, the power handling capacity of the pad

should be one watt minimum.

The noise burst problem does not exist in the reverse

direction since there are no "equivalent" transmissions made in

the reverse direction.

An alternative approach to eliminating the PA 6 hand-off noise

burst would be to use a boosted channel set separation that is

different than the separation used at the donor cell. For

example, if the donor cell uses a 21-channel spacing, then the

EAC-2000 can be assigned a 22-20-22-20-22 channel spacing

scheme. This will ensure that intermodulation products

generated by PA 6 and the boosted output channels will not fall

in one of the EAC-2000 input channels.

The EAC-2000 PA outputs occasionally remain with a very

noisy signal output after a call has been terminated.

This can happen with an improperly set donor RSSI threshold

or if the donor RSSI threshold has been disabled, and partic-

ularly if the SAT fade timer is set for an abnormally long peri-

od. To prevent this from happening, the SAT fade time in the

EAC-2000 should be set to match the donor cell SAT fade time,

and the donor RSSI threshold should be set 10 dB below the

signal level received from the donor cell site.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-29

A.17 Trouble Locking Onto Control Channel

Subscribers have trouble locking onto the EAC-2000 boosted control

channel.

The EAC-2000 contains a crystal-based reference oscillator. The frequency

calibration of the reference oscillator is trimmed as close as possible at the

factory. However, like all crystals, the oscillator exhibits an aging

characteristic, and the calibration may drift over time.

If drifting does occur, the frequency of the EAC-2000 boosted control

channel may need to be adjusted.

Refer to Appendix C for adjustment procedures.

Page A-30 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

$SSHQGL[%

,VRODWLRQ

Contents

B.1 Need for Isolation ...................................... B-3

B.2 Achieving Antenna Isolation ............................... B-4

B.2.1 Physical Separation .............................. B-4

B.2.2 Hints for Optimizing Physical Separation ............... B-6

B.2.3 Operation with Antenna Isolation of Less Than 80 dB ...... B-9

B.2.4 Additional Techniques ............................ B-9

B.3 How to Measure Antenna Isolation .......................... B-10

B.3.1 Using a Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator ...... B-10

B.3.2 Using a Spectrum Analyzer with Signal Generator ....... B-11

B.3.3 Using a Spectrum Analyzer and EAC-2000 ............ B-11

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-1

B.1 Need for Isolation

In order to discuss narrowband high-power frequency translated repeaters, it

is necessary to understand the concept of antenna isolation. This is most

easily explained by discussing broadband on-frequency boosters (bi-

directional amplifiers).

Broadband cellular boosters, such as the Antenna Specialists Co.’s Extend-A-

Cell® II and Decibel Products' Prism Plus™, require isolation between the

donor and coverage antennas to prevent direct RF oscillation. This oscillation

is induced by positive feedback when the output signal is being received and

re-amplified by the input. This condition is similar to the audio feedback that

sometimes occurs in public address systems (the squeal or screech).

In general, this isolation must be at least 10 dB in excess of the gain set in

the device. If a broadband booster gain of 75 dB is desired, antenna isolation

must be at least 85 dB. This isolation may vary as a function of frequency,

so it is important that the isolation be checked across the entire cellular

spectrum. It is also important to note that isolation may be degraded by

antenna icing, additional antennas or feedlines installed on the antenna

support, as well as other factors.

The EAC-2000 high-power translating repeater system also needs a

significant amount of isolation to operate properly. System gain in the EAC-

2000 exceeds 120 dB, but direct RF oscillation is not a factor due to

frequency translation and narrowband filtering. Isolation can be significantly

below 120 dB.

There are two reasons that antenna isolation is required in the EAC-2000

system:

• Because only a few channels may exist between the input and output

frequencies, the inherent in the high-power transmitting path

can the donor (forward path) receiver.

• The high-power sent by PA 6 on the M2 antenna can

mix with the control channel and any voice channels in use and cause

. If one of these products falls on the donor

input channel of a call in progress, the mobile may hear a noise burst,

or worse, respond to a hand-in message. The result would be a "cross-

connected" call or two mobiles on the same EAC-2000 output channel.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-3

B.1 Need for Isolation (Continued)

If antenna isolation in excess of 80 dB is achievable, then the EAC-2000 will

operate successfully with no other action being required. This appendix

describes—

• Recommended installation techniques and practical hints for achieving

antenna isolation.

• Techniques for obtaining successful operation under less than ideal

conditions (< 80 dB antenna isolation).

• Techniques for measuring isolation.

B.2 Achieving Antenna Isolation

There are two primary ways of achieving antenna system isolation:

• between the antennas. This is sometimes

augmented by placing physical barriers between the antennas if there is

insufficient physical space.

• in series with the donor antenna path.

Physical isolation can be achieved by either vertical or horizontal

separation. Horizontal separation is generally not recommended by

itself as it requires a significantly greater distance to obtain the

equivalent isolation that would be provided by vertical separation.

Horizontal separation is generally successful only when there is

some physical barrier between the antennas.

Figure B-1 illustrates the isolation typically obtainable with

horizontal separation, unity gain antennas, and no intervening

structures. Note that more than 200 feet (60 meters) is required to

obtain only 65 dB of isolation. This distance is impractical for

most installations. However, this isolation would be increased by

the front-to-back ratios of directional antennas and transmission

line losses.

Figure B-2 shows the isolation obtainable with vertical separation.

Twenty-five feet can give up to 65 dB, while 60 feet (18.3 meters)

provides more than 75 dB. This will vary depending upon the

vertical beamwidths of both antennas, their directional

characteristics (if any), their placement on the supporting structure,

and the composition of the supporting structure.

Page B-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

Figure B-1. Antenna Isolation versus Horizontal Separation

Figure B-2. (Dipole) Antenna Isolation versus Vertical Separation

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-5

(Continued)

Higher isolations for a given antenna separation are possible where

directional antennas are used and their coverage patterns do not

overlap. Metal towers often give better isolation than wooden

poles when directional antennas are mounted on opposite sides of

the tower. Note that reflections from nearby structures (within

several hundred feet) become predominant when trying to achieve

isolation in excess of 80 dB.

The following list illustrates some of the antenna installation

techniques that may be used to optimize antenna isolation. Figure

B-3 depicts a typical tower-mounted antenna installation.

1. Place the antennas vertically in-line on the mounting structure

to take full advantage of the deep nulls off the ends of high-

gain vertically polarized antennas.

2. Use high gain antennas. High gain antennas typically have

sharper nulls off the ends of the antenna. The use of a

circular dish-type parabolic reflector donor antenna reduces

the vertical as well as the horizontal beamwidth of the

antenna and thus provides higher isolation to antennas

mounted above or below it than does a partial parabolic

reflector or corner reflector with a single dipole element.

Consider a 60-degree 17 dBd gain sector type antenna over a

partial parabolic antenna with a dipole element as this antenna

typically has a 6–7 degree vertical beamwidth.

3. Consider using a metal antenna support instead of a wooden

pole. Isolations observed on wooden poles have been highly

variable, with some installations having excellent isolation

(particularly with directional antennas for both the mobile

coverage and donor antennas) while others have had poorer

isolation than that achievable on a metal tower. Also,

wooden poles with their attendant antenna installation

arrangements (e.g., wooden cross-arms) are subject to

warpage or out-of-plumb installation. This can seriously tilt

the antennas and cause poor coverage.

Page B-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

Figure B-3. Tower Mounted Antenna Installation

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-7

(Continued)

4. In addition to vertical separation, place the donor and M1/M2

antennas on opposite sides of a metal tower. While this

contradicts technique 1 above somewhat, the presence of the

metal structure between the two antenna systems, while

maintaining vertical separation, can sometimes provide an

additional 10 dB, or more, of isolation.

5. In difficult cases, the use of an ice shield or other metal flat-

screen structure between the vertically separated donor and

M1/M2 antennas can be used to improve isolation. The metal

screen should have bonded joints and be a minimum of 3 feet

(1 meter) square. A 10-feet-square (3-meter-square) screen

gives superior performance, but may prove to be physically

impossible to keep on the tower or pole. The screen should

be mounted 1 to 2 feet (.5 to 1 meter) above the donor

antenna, shielding it from all view of the coverage antennas.

It may be necessary to "fine-tune" the shield placement for

optimum performance.

6. Structures found on the roofs of many buildings can provide

isolation between antennas even if little or no vertical

separation is possible. For example, mount the donor antenna

over the side of the building and mount the coverage

antennas at the other side of the roof, preferably with a

penthouse or elevator shaft between. Sometimes a penthouse,

especially if it is of metal construction, can give sufficient

isolation by itself. If construction is of wood or block, metal

sheeting may be placed on the inside or outside walls to

increase isolation.

7. Very high isolations can be achieved by using earth as the

blocking medium. Isolations in excess of 130 dB have been

reported for tunnel applications.

Nearby structures, such as other towers or

buildings, can degrade antenna isolation if both

antennas are exposed to reflections from these

structures.

Page B-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

When separation alone cannot give the required isolation, it is

necessary to use attenuators in the donor signal path. Attenuators,

or "pads," will increase isolation dB for dB. That is, a 10 dB

pad will improve the isolation by 10 dB.

Although a -75 dBm donor input level is specified, this includes a

10 dB fade margin which is seldom needed on the point-to-point

paths found in typical EAC-2000 installations. Also, a high D1

input signal level from the donor equates to a high signal level

being sent back to the donor from the EAC-2000. This can cause

the cell site to make power control decisions based on EAC signal

strength, which could cause dropped calls.

In view of the above, the following attenuation guidelines are

recommendations:

• With donor signal > -65 dBm, use a 10 dB or greater pad at

the D1 duplexer ANT port. Aim for donor RSSI of -75 dBm

± 5 dBm

• With donor signal < -65 dBm but > -76 dBm, use a 10 dB

pad at the D1 duplexer LOW port. Donor signal levels (after

the pad) should not fall below -85 dBm. If the signal levels

may fall below -78 dBm, the Donor RSSI release threshold

must be reset to -90 dBm.

If interference or cross-connected calls still persist after all

attempts at improving antenna isolation (either physically or

artificially with attenuators) have been exhausted, the following

suggestions may yield further improvement:

• Interference due to the transmitter noise floor can be reduced

by increasing the separation between the donor and boosted

channel sets. Increasing the separation to at least 6 and no

more than 11 channels will help many stubborn cases.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-9

(Continued)

• If short noise bursts or cross-connected calls due to hand-off

PA intermod are reported, they can be eliminated by adopting

an alternating boosted channel set spacing. That is, instead of

setting the boosted channel set spacing to the same increment

(usually 21) as the donor, alternate the channel spacing on a

20-22-20-22-20 channel basis. This will move any locally

generated intermodulation products off the channels that are

being received from the donor.

B.3 How to Measure Antenna Isolation

Antenna isolation is most effectively measured using a spectrum

analyzer with tracking generator.

1. Connect the tracking generator output to the end of the

transmission line going to the M1 or M2 antenna.

2. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the end of the transmission

line going to the D1 antenna.

3. Set the tracking generator output at maximum (usually

0 dBm). Use an accessory amplifier, if available, to boost

this output to at least +20 dBm.

4. Set the spectrum analyzer to sweep first the low split and

then the high split. The isolation is then the spectrum

analyzer reading plus the tracking generator output. (For

example, if the spectrum analyzer reads -50 dBm and the

tracking generator output is +20 dBm, the isolation is 70 dB.)

Note that isolation is often frequency dependent, with several

nulls and peaks possible in each band. The highest peak in

either band defines the minimum isolation that is achieved

with this particular antenna configuration. Be sure to

discount any signals being received by the antenna connected

to the spectrum analyzer. Note these signals with the

tracking generator turned off. These signals will likely be

higher than the signal being generated by the tracking

generator and may make measuring the actual isolation

difficult. Also, many spectrum analyzers have difficulty

measuring signals below -60 dBm to -70 dBm

Page B-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

(Continued)

when sweeping a broad bandwidth. This may limit the ability to

accurately measure isolation unless smaller bandwidths are used.

A second method of measuring isolation uses a signal generator

rather than the tracking generator as the signal source. The signal

generator frequency and amplitude can be manually changed to

avoid conflict with existing strong signals from the donor (and

other) cell sites. The spectrum analyzer sweep bandwidth can also

be narrowed to achieve greater sensitivity for measuring actual

isolation. The signal generator should be manually swept through

both the low split and the high split bands to determine the

minimum isolation point.

A third method to measure isolation uses the EAC-2000 itself as

the signal source and is relatively simple to accomplish with a

spectrum analyzer and the following procedure. (This procedure

should be done after the unit is programmed and the combiner is

tuned.)

1. Connect the D1 antenna feedline to a spectrum analyzer.

2. Go into SET and select menu B, Power Amplifiers.

3. Key up PA 1 through PA 11 in sequence and note the level

on the spectrum analyzer for each channel. Also note the PA

power reading in dBm.

4. Calculate the isolation:

Isolation = PA dBm -3 dB (combiner/duplexer loss) - D1 dBm.

Since this D1 dBm measurement is a negative number, this

can be simplified:

Isolation = PA dBm + |D1 dBm| -3

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-11

(Continued)

PA dBm = 46, D1 dBm = -30, |D1 dBm| = 30

Isolation = 46 +30 -3

Isolation = 73 dB

5. Take the highest readings obtained from PAs 1–5 and 7–11 to

calculate an isolation value for the M1 antenna. Take the

readings from PA 6 to calculate the isolation value for the

M2 antenna. To get a more accurate reading of isolation on

the M2 antenna, we recommend temporarily exchanging the

M1/M2 antenna connections and rereading the values

received when keying PAs 1–5 and 7–11.

Page B-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

$SSHQGL[&

5HIHUHQFH2VFLOODWRU$GMXVWPHQW

C.1 Adjusting the Reference Oscillator (If Needed)

The EAC-2000 contains a crystal-based reference oscillator. The frequency

calibration of the reference oscillator is trimmed as close as possible at the

factory and .

However, like all crystals, the oscillator exhibits an aging characteristic, and

the calibration may drift over time. To maintain the specified accuracy over

time, the frequency of the EAC-2000 boosted control channel should be

checked periodically and adjusted, if necessary, to compensate for long-term

aging.

Do NOT use voice channels as a basis for frequency adjustment,

since the EAC-2000 oscillator accuracy contributes only a small part of the

accuracy on voice channels.

There are two approved vendors for the oscillator. The

following shows a typical adjustment session for one of them.

The procedure for the other vendor merely uses T8 in place of

T7 in the following sequence.

The easiest way to tell which vendor oscillator is installed is

simply to try one. If the software indicates "acknowledge

errors," or if the frequency does not move, then use the other.

At the command entry level prompt >:

RFC<CR> TYPE "H" FOR HELP

#T7<CR> TRIMMING POT 7

ENTER C, U or D (Center, Up, or

Down); RET when finished:

CUUUUUDDU<CR> (no response)

#<ESC> >

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page C-1

(Continued)

The pot should be centered any time an adjustment is made.

This not only centers the pot, but also ensures that the

software and hardware variables are initialized properly. This

may actually cause the frequency to move several parts off.

If the frequency seems to be very far off,

especially at installation time, be sure the measurement

equipment you are using is calibrated accurately.

The U’s and D’s may then be used to trim it back in.

Page C-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)

*ORVVDU\DQG,QGH[

27-7659-2

Issue 12/95

*ORVVDU\

AMPS – Advanced Mobile Phone System. Cellular standard that provides compatible operation

in the 824–849 and 869–894 MHz band.

Boost – To receive, amplify, and reradiate signals to fill in weak coverage areas.

Boosted Control Channel – The control channel used between the booster and the mobiles in the

booster coverage area (a different frequency than the donor control channel).

Booster – A system that boosts or repeats.

Booster Coverage Area – The area where subscribers obtain coverage through the booster.

Booster Link Channel – A dedicated channel in an EAC-2000 in Multi-hop configuration. When

the EAC-2000 responds to a call, it transmits a continuous data message over the booster link

channel, which the next booster in the chain decodes in order to identify the channel on which the

call is boosted.

Command Entry Level – The level at which the software system accepts three-letter commands.

Indicated by the prompt character >.

D1 Antenna – The primary antenna facing the donor cell site, used for reception of control and

voice channel signals from the donor cell site and for transmission of control and voice signals

back to the cell site.

Donor Cell Site – The cell site in communication with the booster.

Donor Control Channel – The control channel used between the cell site and the booster (and all

the mobiles in direct contact with the cell site).

EAC-2000™ – The trademarked name for a booster made by Allen Telecom Systems.

Forward Path – The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by the donor cell, which is received,

amplified, and reradiated by a booster and received ultimately by a subscriber in the booster

coverage area.

Grab-back Message – A second voice channel assignment message sent to a mobile leaving the

booster coverage area, directing the mobile to come back to the boosted voice channel. If the

donor's signal is stronger, the mobile will ignore the grab-back message; if the EAC-2000 signal

is stronger, the mobile will come back to the boosted voice channel.

Hand-back Threshold – Signal level at which a mobile being boosted becomes a candidate for

returning to the original donor site voice channel. This threshold is set as an operating parameter

for the individual system.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Glos-1

Hand-in Threshold – Signal level at which a mobile on one of the donor voice channels becomes

a candidate for boosting. This threshold is set as a parameter for the individual system.

Hand-off – The process of transferring a boosted call back to the donor cell or to another booster

or cell.

Inactivity Timeout – A programmable period of time after which, if no keyboard entries have

been received, the EAC-2000 software system will terminate any running commands and end the

session.

M1 Antenna – Primary antenna facing the mobiles in the booster coverage area. Used for

transmission of the boosted control channel and boosted voice channels to the mobiles, and for

diversity reception from the mobiles.

M2 Antenna – Secondary antenna facing the mobiles in the booster coverage area, used for

sending hand-off messages to the mobiles and for diversity reception from the mobiles.

Mobile Antenna – Antenna for the installed cellular mobile facing the donor cell site.

Modem Mobile MIN – Assigned mobile identification number of the mobile cellular telephone.

Multi-hop Operation – Two or more EAC-2000 units set up to operate together in a line to

provide seamless cellular coverage (e.g., along a traffic corridor). Each booster in the line

communicates with the previous and next unit.

PA – Power Amplifier

Primary Donor Cell – When a booster is adjacent to several cell sites, the control channel of the

cell with the best signal is chosen as the donor control channel, and this cell is referred to as the

primary donor cell.

Remote Link – Modem link between the EAC-2000 and another terminal. The remote terminal

may be used to exercise the system.

Repeater – Synonymous with booster, usually applied to boosters that translate frequencies. The

EAC-2000 is type-accepted as a repeater.

Reverse Path – The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by a subscriber mobile in the booster

coverage area, which is received, amplified, and reradiated by a booster and received ultimately

by the donor cell site.

RSSI – Received Signal Strength Indicator.

SAT – Supervisory Access Tone.

Glos-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95)

,QGH[

Bold Roman

numerals indicate volume

numbers.

Accessories, III: 3-4

replacing, Apps.: Parts-1 to -5

breaker locations, I: 4-3, 4-4

connections, I: 3-5

(See also Power)

ALA. (See Command(s))

Alarm report. (See Command(s), ALA)

Alarm(s), Apps.: A-23

connecting external, I: 3-7 to -9, III: 3-3

critical, I: 4-23 to -24, 5-5, II: 2-11, 2-58

log only, I: 4-24

programming, I: 4-19 to -24

RSSI, II: 2-11

(See also individual alarms—e.g., PA

alarms)

Amplifiers. (See Control channel amplifiers,

PAs, Voice channel amplifiers)

Antenna(s)

connectors, illustrated, I: 3-6

D1, I: 1-7,2-4,2-5,2-6,2-7,2-9, III: 2-3

installation, illustrated, I: 2-8, Apps.: B-7

installing, I: 3-6, Apps.: B-6 to -12

isolation, I: 2-6, 2-7 to -8, 3-6, 7-3,

Apps.: B-4 to -10

M1/M2, I: 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, III: 2-3

mobile, I: 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, III: 2-3

placement/location of, I: 2-2, 2-6

return loss low alarm point, II: 2-10, 2-50

separation, I: 2-6

types, I: 2-4 to-5, III: 2-3

Auto-dial

delay between retries, II: 2-6, 2-32

dial-up phone numbers, II: 2-6, 2-30

enable, II: 2-5, 2-29

max trial period, II: 2-6, 2-32

trials max, II: 2-6, 2-31

Backplane. (See EAC-2000,

diagrams, System boards)

Back-up control channel option, II: 2-4, 2-22

Baud rate. (See Modem—setup, local port,

remote port)

Block diagram. (See EAC-2000, diagrams)

Boards. (See System boards)

Boosted control channel(s), II: 2-4, 2-20,

III: 2-1

defined, I: 1-3

Boosted control channel(s) (Continued)

selecting, I: 2-12, 7-4 to -5

setting, I: 4-16

Boosted voice channel(s), II: 2-5, 2-27

defaults, II: 2-5

selecting, I: 2-16, 7-4 to -5

setting, I: 4-19

Booster link channel, I: 4-15, 8-5, II: 2-4,

2-24

- previous EAC, I: 4-15, II: 2-5, 2-24

Breaker. (See ac)

Burse noise, Apps.: A-26

Cabinet

footprint, illustrated, I: 3-4

size, I: 2-3, III: 3-1

Call processing

described, I: 5-4 to -6III: 2-10 to -13

parameters, II: 2-9

problems, Apps.: A-10

recommendations, II: 2-9

Card cage wiring diagram. (See EAC-2000,

diagrams)

Cellular boosters

operation, illustrated, III: 1-2

use of, III: 1-2

Channel(s)

assignment, III: 1-3

for combined multi-cab/-hop/-donor

operation, I: 10-2

selecting, I: 2-11

(See also Control channel(s); Directed

retry channels)

Combined operation. (See Multi-cabinet,

Multi-hop, Multi-donor)

Combiner

cavity, illustrated, I: 4-27

reverse, III: 2-8

tuning, I: 4-26 to -30

Command(s)

ALA, I: 4-13, II: 3-14 to -19

basic, I: 4-7 to -10

DCH, II: 3-27 to -28

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Index-1

Command(s) (Continued)

DCS, II: 3-20 to -26

entering, I: 4-8, II: 1-6 to -8

listed, I: 4-9, II: 1-9

LOC, I: 4-10, II: 1-8

MIN, II: 3-30 to -31

Command(s) (Continued)

PWR, II: 3-12

RES, I: 4-8, 4-10, II: 1-8

REV, II: 3-32

RSS, II: 3-9 to -10

SAT, II: 3-13

SCS, II: 3-5 to -8

SET, I: 4-8, II: 2-1 to -60

special, II: 4-1 to -2

SSR, I: 4-9, II: 3-11

SSS, I: 4-13, II: 3-1 to -4

syntax, I: 4-7, II: 1-6

system monitoring, II: 3-1 to -32

TIM, I: 4-32, II: 3-29

Communication parameters. (See

Modem—setup, Local port, Remote

port)

Compliance with standards, III: 3-4

Console timeout, II: 2-5, 2-29

Continuous cycles, escaping from, I: 4-8,

II: 1-8

Control channel(s)

amplifiers, III: 2-1

boosting, I: 1-5

parameters, II: 2-4

response, I: 7-1, III: 2-14 to -15

RF board to use for, II: 2-4, 2-20

state during "all channels busy",

II: 2-4, 2-21

(See also Boosted control channel(s);

Donor control channel(s); Revertive

control channel; Substitute control

channel)

Controller board. (See System boards)

Critical alarm(s). (See Alarms)

Cross-talk, Apps.: A-21

D1. (See Antenna(s))

DCH. (See Command(s))

DCS. (See Command(s))

Delay between hand-in attempts.

(See Hand-in)

Dial command. (See Modem—setup)

Dial prefix string (See Modem—setup)

Dial-up phone numbers. (See Auto-dial)

Directed retry channels, I: 2-14, 4-15,

II: 2-4, 2-22

setting, I: 4-16

Disconnect parameters, II: 2-9

Donor control channel(s), I: 1-6, 4-24,

II: 2-4, 2-19, III: 2-11

defined, I: 1-3

identifying, I: 2-11

Donor control channel(s) (Continued)

RSSI, alarm points, I: 4-24, II: 2-59

setting, I: 4-15

(See also Control channel(s))

Donor RSSI, II: 2-9, 2-46

Donor voice channel(s)

identifying, I: 2-15 to -16

lists, I: 1-6, II: 2-5, 2-26 to -27, III: 2-11

RSSI, high alarm point, I: 4-24, II: 2-60

setting, I: 4-17 to -18

Doors, securing, I: 3-5

Dropped calls, Apps.: A-6, A-14, A-18,

A-20

Dynamic forward power control algorithm,

II: 2-52

EAC-2000

answering, I: 5-4

combined with EAC-IVs, I: 7-4

concept, III: 2-1 to -2

diagrams, end of Vol. 3

illustrated, I: 3-2, 3-3, III: 3-6, 3-7, 3-8

operation, I: 1-4 to -7, II: 1-2 to -5,

III: 2-3 to -5

originating, I: 5-5

specifications, III: 3-1 to -3

Environment, III: 3-1

Equipment characteristics, III: 3-4 to -5

Erratic operation of EAC-2000, Apps.: A-23

External alarms/controls. (See Alarms)

Fan activation. (See PA, temperature)

Figures, listed, I: vi, II: vi, III: v

Footprint. (See Cabinet)

Forward PA

power low alarm point, II: 2-3, 2-15

power step, II: 2-3, 2-15

(See also Key forward PA)

Forward path, I: 1-2, 1-4, III: 2-4

defined, I: 1-3

Frequency allocation, I: 1-4, III: 1-3

Gain, III: 3-2

Grab-back, I: 1-7, III: 2-12

Index-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95)

Hand-back, I: 1-6, III: 2-12

max num attempts per call, II: 2-9, 2-47

min delay between attempts, II: 2-9, 2-48

mobile power step, II: 2-8, 2-43

Hand-back/grab-back control, II: 2-9, 2-49

Hand-back threshold(s), II: 2-8, 2-43,

III: 2-12

determining, I: 6-1

setting, I: 6-2

setting for Multi-hop, I: 7-5 to -7

Hand-in, III: 2-11

delay between attempts, II: 2-8, 2-45

excessive, Apps.: A-15

mobile power step, II: 2-8, 2-43

none (troubleshooting), Apps.: A-16

Hand-in threshold(s), II: 2-8, 2-41

determining, I: 6-1

setting, I: 6-2

Hand-off(s)

cellular system, Apps.: A-7

messages, III: 2-5

noise bursts, Apps.: A-26

to a new cell, III: 2-13

Hang-up string (See Modem—setup)

Hardware installation, I: 3-1 to -10

Inactivity timeout, I: 4-10, II: 1-8

Initialization string (See Modem—setup)

Inputs/outputs

alarm states, II: 2-10

electrical specifications for, I: 3-8

external analog, II: 2-55

external digital, II: 2-56, 2-57

typical wiring for, I: 3-9

Interchangeability of equipment, III: 3-4

Interface specifications, III: 3-3

Isolation

achieving, Apps.: B-4 to -9

measuring, I: 2-9, Apps.: B-10 to -12

need for, Apps.: B-3

Key forward PA, II: 2-3, 2-16

Key reverse PA, II: 2-3, 2-16

Local link, III: 2-16

establishing, II: 1-2 to -3

Local port

baud rate, II: 2-7, 2-35

comm params, II: 2-7, 2-36

Locking onto control channel, Apps.: A-29

Log only alarms (See Alarms)

M1, M2. (See Antenna(s))

Main harness wiring diagram. (See

EAC-2000, diagrams)

MDU (See Multi-donor operation)

Mechanical

installation, I: 3-4 to -5

specifications, III: 3-1

Menu(s)

Alarms, II: 2-50

Call Processing Parameters, II: 2-48

Control Channels, II: 2-19

Menu(s) (Continued)

Critical Alarms, II: 2-58

Disconnect Control, II: 2-46

External Analog Inputs, II: 2-55

External Digital Inputs, II: 2-56

External Digital Outputs, II: 2-57

Modem Control, II: 2-28

Power Amplifiers, II: 2-14

RF Board Position, II: 2-13

RF boards, II: 2-12

SET Main, II: 2-12

SET, using, I: 4-11, II: 1-7

SET menu map, I: 4-12, II: 2-2

Site ID, II: 2-17

System Parameters, II: 2-17

Thresholds and Power Control, II: 2-40

Voice Channels, II: 2-25

Microcontroller, III: 2-6

MIN. (See Command(s))

Mobile

antenna (See Antenna(s))

checking out, I: 5-2

dynamic power control threshold, II: 2-8,

2-41

power control causes PA power

cutback, II: 2-10, 2-53

power step, I: 4-25, II: 2-6, 2-39

programming, I: 5-2

RSSI > threshold, II: 2-9, 2-49

shelf, III: 2-9 (See also EAC-2000,

diagrams)

setting up service, I: 5-2

Modem, III: 3-5

control parameters, II: 2-5 to -6

equipment, I: 5-1

erratic operation, Apps.: A-22

mobile MIN, I: 4-25, II: 2-6, 2-38, 3-30

mobile power step, II: 2-6, 2-39

setup parameters, II: 2-6 to -7

setup strings, II: 2-6, 2-33 to -35

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Index-3

Mounting

the cabinet, I: 3-4

surface, I: 2-4

Multi-cabinet operation, I: 10-1 to -3

Multi-donor activation threshold, I: 8-2, 8-4,

II: 2-8, 2-42, III: 2-14

Multi-donor operation, I: 1-6, 2-1, 2-6,

8-1 to -4, III: 2-13

installing EAC-2000 for, I: 8-2

with Multi-cabinet/-hop, I: 10-1 to -3

Multi-hop operation, I: 2-2, 2-6, 4-13,

7-1 to -8, II: 2-4, 2-18,

III: 2-14 to -15

Multi-hop operation (Continued)

enabling, I: 7-3 to -4

installing EAC-2000 for, I: 7-2 to -8

with Multi-cabinet/-donor, I: 10-1 to -3

selecting boosted channels for, I: 7-4

Noise, Apps.: A-27

Optimizing performance, I: 6-1 to -2

Output power, setting, I: 4-26 to -31

Outputs. (See Inputs/Outputs)

Parameter(s)

alarm, II: 2-10 to -11

initial, I: 4-13 to -25

power amplifier, II: 2-3

RF board, II: 2-3

summaries, II: 2-3 to -11

system, II: 2-4 to -9

Parts, ordering, Apps.: Parts-1 to -5

PA(s)

45-watt, III: 2-8

cage wiring diagram. (See EAC-2000,

diagrams)

to antenna loss - high alarm point,

II: 2-10, 2-51

interface board, III: 2-9

power levels, adjusting, I: 4-26 to -30

power potentiometer, illustrated, I: 4-28

setting power low alarm points, I: 4-31

temp - fan activation point, II: 2-10, 2-51

temp - high alarm point, II: 2-10, 2-51

temp - PA power cutback point, II: 2-10,

2-52

Password(s), I: 4-25, II: 2-5, 2-28 to -29

bypassing, I: 1-3

Pin out, external alarm/control connector,

I: 3-7

Power

class. (See Station power class)

control parameters, II: 2-8, 2-40 to -45

cutback point. (See PA, temp)

levels (See PAs)

output, III: 3-2

service requirements, I: 2-3

specifications, III: 3-1

(See also ac connections)

Power supply

described, III: 2-9

shelf wiring diagram, III: 3-10

voltage parameters, II: 2-10, 2-53 to -54

Powering up/down, I: 4-3

Preamplifiers, III: 2-8

Primary donor cell, I: 1-7, III: 2-10, 2-11

PWR. (See Command(s))

Quick start procedures, I: ix

Reference oscillator adjustment,

Apps.: C-1 to -2

Regulator module, III: 2-9

wiring, illustrated, III: 3-9

Reliability, III: 3-5

Remote link, III: 2-16

EAC-2000 answering, I: 5-3

EAC-2000 originating, I: 5-4

establishing, II: 1-4 to -5

installing, I: 5-1 to -6

testing, I: 5-4 to -6

Remote port

baud rate, II: 2-7, 2-36

comm params, II: 2-7, 2-37

handshake, II: 2-7, 2-38

Report values, setting, I: 4-32

Reports/readings, examples

ALA, II: 3-15

DCH, II: 3-28

DCS, II: 3-21

MIN, II: 3-30

PWR, II: 3-12

RSSI, II: 3-9

SAT, II: 3-13

SCS, II: 3-5

SSS, II: 3-2

TIM, II: 3-29

REV. (See Command(s))

Reverse PA

power low alarm point, II: 2-3, 2-16

power set, II: 2-3, 2-15

(See also Key reverse PA)

Index-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95)

Reverse path, I: 1-3, 1-4, III: 1-2, 2-4

setting output power, I: 4-30

Revertive control channel option, I: 2-12,

II: 2-4, 2-23, 3-25

RF board(s), III: 2-6

diversity, II: 2-3, 2-14

status, II: 2-3, 2-13

to use for control channel, II: 2-4, 2-20

RF specifications, III: 3-2

RSS. (See Command(s))

RSSI, III: 3-2

alarm points, II: 2-11, 2-59

averaging speed, II: 2-8, 2-44

(See also Donor RSSI, Mobile RSSI,

Donor control channel(s), Donor voice

channel(s))

SAT

fade timeout, II: 2-9, 2-47

(See also Command(s))

SCS. (See Command(s))

Separation of antennas, I: 2-6, 3-6,

Apps.: B-4 to -6

(See also Antenna(s))

Service

for mobile, setting up, I: 5-2

skills required , III: 3-5

SET, II: 2-1 to -60

exiting, I: 4-11, II: 1-7

menu map, I: 4-12, II: 2-2

moving through menus, I: 4-11, II: 1-7

Set defaults feature, II: 2-60

Setups, unsuccessful, Apps.: A-18

Signal level/strength, I: 2-6, 3-7, 7-3

at MDU, I: 8-3

measuring, I: 2-9 to -10

weak, from donor, Apps.: A-6

Site

ID, I: 4-14, II: 2-4, 2-18

requirements, I: 2-2 to -4

Space recommendations, I: 2-3

Specifications, III: 3-1 to -4

SSS. (See Command(s))

Start-up procedures. (See Quick start)

Station power class selective boosting,

II: 2-8, 2-45

Substitute control channel, I: 2-13, 4-15,

II: 2-4, 2-23

SYN LOC alarms, Apps.: A-23

System boards, III: 2-6 to -9

backplane, III: 2-7

controller, III: 2-7

PA interface, III: 2-9

(See also RF boards)

System status, I: 4-13

Talk-back range, Apps.: A-11

Temperature. (See PA, temperature)

Terminal

connecting, I: 4-5

location of connector, illustrated, I: 4-5

Threshold(s)

parameters, II: 2-8, 2-40 to -45

programming, I: 4-19 to -24

TIM. (See Command(s))

Time values, setting, I: 4-32

Transmitter combiner. (See Combiner)

Transmitter output noise, Apps.: A-28

Troubleshooting, Apps.: A-1 to -27

Voice channel(s)

amplifiers, III: 2-2

boosting, I: 1-5

parameters, II: 2-5

(See also Boosted voice channel(s);

Donor voice channel(s))

Warranty, iii

Wiring diagrams. (See EAC-2000, diagrams)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Index-5

3DUWV$FFHVVRULHV

2UGHU,QIRUPDWLRQ

This section provides procedures for ordering or exchanging parts and accessories, a

list of replaceable assemblies for the EAC-2000™, and reference drawings. Warranty

information is given in the front of this manual.

Construction is comprised of machine-placed surface

mount components. Special factory test fixtures are required for repair.

Replacing Parts and Accessories

To order spare or replacement assemblies, refer to the following instructions:

Failed EAC-2000 parts or assemblies that are still under the manufacturer’s

warranty can be exchanged by following these procedures:

1. Obtain the EAC-2000 serial number. The serial number is labeled on each

of the system components.

2. Call the Extend-A-Cell Hotline: (800) 800-EAC4 (3224) or 216-349-8413.

Be prepared to supply the unit serial number and any other pertinent

information. Refer to the following parts list and reference drawings to

identify specific parts and their locations.

3. Repair parts/assemblies will be shipped. Allen Telecom Systems will ship

replacement parts or assemblies with a Return Materials Authorization

form. This form must be used to return failed parts or assemblies to Allen

Telecom Systems. All parts are shipped next day air, free of charge,

unless otherwise instructed by the customer.

4. Return failed parts/assemblies to Allen Telecom Systems according to

instructions on the Return Materials Authorization form.

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95) Parts-1

Selected EAC-2000 parts or assemblies that are no longer under warranty can

be replaced through Allen Telecom Systems’ exchange program. This program

permits customers to exchange a failed part or assembly for a working part or

assembly, for a nominal charge. Contact Allen Telecom Systems, Systems

Engineering Department, to determine which parts and assemblies can be

exchanged under this program.

To take advantage of this program, follow the procedures listed above under I.

Exchange Procedures: Units Under Warranty.

Spare parts for the EAC-2000 can be purchased by contacting Allen Telecom

Systems, Customer Service Department at or

for prices and delivery. Refer to the following list and illustrations to identify

specific parts and their locations.

Parts-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95)

Replaceable Parts/Assemblies for EAC-2000

The following list includes service parts/assemblies that are frequently purchased as

spares and is not inclusive of all parts/assemblies that are available for the EAC-2000.

Items not included in this list may be ordered by contacting Allen Telecom Systems

Customer Service Department.

1 19-5612-1 Reverse Combiner Module

2 19-5598-1 Controller Board

3 19-5838-1 D1 Duplexer

4 19-5613-1 Forward Preamp Module

5 19-5599-1 RF Board

6 21-117-1 45-Watt Power Amplifier

7 19-5588-1 PA Interface Board

8 19-5627-1 Power Sensor

9 59-12-1 28 Vac Power Supply

10 19-5620-1 Regulator Module

11 19-5614-1 Reverse Preamp Module

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95) Parts-3

Reference Drawings

Parts-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95)

Reference Drawings (Continued)

AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95) Parts-5

Andrew Wireless Innovations Group 9GB2000 Cellular Repeater User Manual vol1eac200drev1b2

Andrew Wireless Innovations Group Cellular Repeater vol1eac200drev1b2

users manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation